JP7736094B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a play area is formed, and a game ball launching means that launches game balls into the play area based on the player's launch operation. When a game ball launched from the game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the play area, the player is granted a bonus, such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls. The ball entry section is variable, and can be switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the game situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-78904

In the above-mentioned types of gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in their configuration in order to increase attention to the game.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

The present invention provides
a specific determination means for executing a specific determination when a predetermined determination trigger is met;
a means for transitioning to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined gaming state based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result;
A means for changing a predetermined variable ball entry means from a first state in which the game ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter to a second state in which the game ball can be entered or is easier to enter than in the first state, and then executing a specific game in which the game ball is returned to the first state;
Equipped with
The specific game can be executed in the special game state,
As game states different from the predetermined game state and the special game state, there are a first specific game state to which a game can be shifted via the special game state when a predetermined first condition is met, and a second specific game state to which a game can be shifted without passing through the special game state when a predetermined second condition different from the first condition is met,
A variable means is provided corresponding to a predetermined ball entry means different from the predetermined variable ball entry means, and is switchable between a first mode in which the predetermined ball entry means can receive a game ball, and a second mode in which the predetermined ball entry means cannot receive a game ball or is more difficult to receive than the first mode,
The switching control modes of the variable means include a first switching mode in which a ball is relatively likely to enter the predetermined ball entry means, and a second switching mode in which a ball is relatively unlikely to enter the predetermined ball entry means,
The switching control mode in the first specific game state is the first switching mode, and the switching control mode in the second specific game state is the second switching mode.

This invention can effectively increase attention to the game.

1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board unit. FIG. 2 is an oblique view of the game board unit from the rear side. FIG. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. A front view showing the back pack unit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. 10 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display content on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display content on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lotteries, etc. (a) A schematic diagram showing a win/loss table for the low probability mode, and (b) a schematic diagram showing a win/loss table for the high probability mode. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for a big win, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for a special miss. (a) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of jackpot and the lottery mode and support mode, and (b) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of special miss and the lottery mode and support mode. (a) A schematic diagram showing a support lottery table for low frequency support mode, (b) A schematic diagram showing a support lottery table for high frequency support mode A, and (c) A schematic diagram showing a support lottery table for high frequency support mode B. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an overview of a support mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU of the main control device. A flowchart showing the winning process for an operating port. 10 is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table corresponding to deviation from normal. This is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table corresponding to a jackpot. This is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table for special misses. 10 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the large prize opening. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. 10 is a flowchart showing a through gate control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process for a through gate. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram comparing the display times of images on the through gate display unit. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for electric utility support. 10 is a flowchart showing an electric utility switching process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for confirmation display. 10 is a flowchart showing a support mode switching process. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device and the display control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable display control process executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. A flowchart showing the first variable display control process. A flowchart showing the first fluctuation start processing. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the outline of the game presentation. (a) A schematic diagram showing a symbol combination corresponding to a big win, (b) A schematic diagram showing a symbol combination corresponding to a special miss. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when a special miss triggers a transition to the fourth normal game state. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state. 10 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a change in a ball held by a player. (a) A schematic diagram comparing support modes in the second embodiment, (b) a schematic diagram showing the display content when transitioning to high-frequency support mode A1, and (c) a schematic diagram showing the display content when transitioning to high-frequency support mode A2. 10 is a flowchart showing a support mode switching process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. 10 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the first and fourth normal gaming states. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table corresponding to deviation from normal. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table corresponding to deviation from normal. 10 is a timing chart showing the flow of a game. FIG. 11 is a front view of a game board unit according to a third embodiment. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lotteries, etc. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the first operating port. A schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the second operating port. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table for the second operating port. 10 is a timing chart showing the flow of a game. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for operating ports in the fourth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the first change start processing executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. (a) A schematic diagram showing the flow of the first special effect, and (b) a schematic diagram showing the flow of the second special effect. 10 is a timing chart showing the flow of a game. FIG. 13 is a front view of a game board unit according to a fifth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the variable winning device. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lotteries, etc. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the first operating port, and FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the second operating port. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for a first operating port, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for a second operating port. (a) A schematic diagram showing the behavior when a special winning result is obtained, (b) A schematic diagram showing the transition pattern of the game state. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a support mode switching process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of transitioning to a special winning game state. 10 is a flowchart showing the special winning start processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of ending a special winning game. 10 is a flowchart showing a V allocation setting process. A flowchart showing V winning processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of transitioning to a jackpot gaming state. A flowchart showing the transition process at the end of a jackpot. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state. 10 is a flowchart showing a preliminary check process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a special variable display time table for the second operating port. 10 is a timing chart showing the flow of a game. A schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for an operating port in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a transition pattern of a game state. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state. FIG. 23 is a front view of the game board unit in the seventh embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters, etc. used in lotteries, etc. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the first operating port. A schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the second operating port. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for a first operating port, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for a second operating port. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of win and the lottery mode and support mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a support mode switching process. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state. FIG. 23 is a front view of the game board unit in the eighth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters, etc. used in lotteries, etc. (a) A schematic diagram showing a win/loss table for the low probability mode, and (b) a schematic diagram showing a win/loss table for the high probability mode. (a) A schematic diagram showing a distribution table for the first operating port, and (b) a schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the second operating port. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the winning type, the lottery mode, and the support mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process executed by the MPU of the main control device when an opening/closing execution mode ends. 10 is a flowchart showing a support mode switching process executed by the MPU of the main control device. A schematic diagram showing a win/lose table in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for big wins, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of win and the lottery mode and support mode. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram comparing support modes, and FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram comparing the display time of the image on the through gate display unit. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process executed by the MPU of the main control device when an opening/closing execution mode ends. 10 is a flowchart showing the game round end processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. 10 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a change in a ball held by a player. (a) A schematic diagram comparing support modes in the 10th embodiment, (b) a schematic diagram showing the display content when transitioning to high-frequency support mode A1, and (c) a schematic diagram showing the display content when transitioning to high-frequency support mode A2. 10 is a timing chart showing the flow of a game. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the lottery result and the image displayed on the operating port display unit in the 11th embodiment. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table corresponding to deviation from normal. This is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table for special misses. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the variable display mode of the symbols on the display screen. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a support mode switching process in the twelfth embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. (a) A flowchart showing the special notification processing executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device, and (b) and (c) are schematic diagrams showing special notifications. 10 is a flowchart showing a special notification control process executed by the MPU of the main control device. A front view of the game board unit in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of various counters used in lotteries, etc. (a) A schematic diagram showing a win/loss table for the low probability mode, and (b) a schematic diagram showing a win/loss table for the high probability mode. (a) A schematic diagram showing a distribution table for the first operating port, and (b) a schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the second operating port. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the winning type, the lottery mode, and the support mode. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the gaming state. This is a flowchart showing the first change start processing executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. 10 is a timing chart showing the flow of a game.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Figure 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, Figure 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 seen from the front side, and Figures 3 and 4 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded form. Note that for convenience, the components within the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 are omitted in Figure 3.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main unit 12 attached to this outer frame 11.

As shown in Figure 2, the outer frame 11 is made up of long frame materials connected on all four sides, and is formed into a rectangular frame shape overall. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the amusement hall by attaching and fixing this outer frame 11 to the island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be attached to the island equipment of the amusement hall, etc.

The gaming machine main section 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in a state that allows it to be opened and closed. Specifically, an upper support bracket 17 is fixed to the connection between the upper and left frame sections of the outer frame 11, and a lower support bracket 18 is provided at the connection between the lower and left frame sections of the outer frame 11. These upper support brackets 17 and lower support brackets 18 form a support mechanism that allows the gaming machine main section 12 to rotate toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11, with the left side being the base end and the right side being the tip end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 (see Figures 3 and 4).

As shown in Figures 3 and 4, the gaming machine main section 12 comprises an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a rear pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main section 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11. In detail, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The rear pack unit 15 is also rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the rear pack unit 15 can be rotated rearward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in Figure 1, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 having an outer shape substantially identical to that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the center of the frame body 20, allowing almost the entire play area PE (described later) to be viewed from the front, and the window portion 21 is blocked from the rear side of the front door frame 14 by a glass unit 22.

The glass unit 22 comprises a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder has a partition that separates the holding area of the glass panels 23 into front and rear, with the two glass panels 23 facing each other from the front and rear across the partition. In other words, by ensuring a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the glass panels 23 double-cover the play area PE from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

It should be noted that it is not necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder; each glass panel 23 may be attached individually to the frame 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is optional, and may be one, three or more. However, in terms of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to use multiple glass panels, with each glass panel facing each other at a specified gap. Incidentally, it is also possible to use a transparent synthetic resin panel member instead of a glass panel.

Around the glass unit 22 (more specifically, the window portion 21), various light-emitting devices such as lamps are provided. For example, a circular illumination unit 26 incorporating light-emitting devices such as LEDs is provided along the periphery of the window portion 21. The circular illumination unit 26 lights up or flashes in response to changes in the game status, such as when a jackpot is hit or a predetermined reach is reached. Furthermore, at the center of the circular illumination unit 26, at the top of the pachinko machine 10, is provided an error display lamp unit 27 that lights up when an error or other malfunction occurs, and to the left and right of this are prize ball lamp units 28 that light up when prize balls are being paid out. Furthermore, speaker units 29 that output sound effects, background music, and the like according to the game status are provided close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28 (see Figure 3).

Below the window 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge 31 and a lower bulge 32 are arranged side by side, bulging out toward the front. An upper tray 33 with an upward opening is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34 with a similar upward opening is provided inside the lower bulge 32 (see Figure 2). The upper tray 33 has the function of temporarily storing game balls dispensed from the dispensing device (described below) and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism (described below) while aligning them in a row. The lower tray 34 also has the function of storing surplus game balls within the upper tray 33 and functioning as a receptacle for storing game balls that were released by the game ball launching mechanism but did not reach the play area PE (see Figure 3) and are returned to the player.

A performance button 35 that can be operated by the player is located in the upper bulge 31 in front of the upper tray 33. This performance button 35 is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, which executes performances based on the operation of the performance button 35.

A game ball launch handle 41 is provided to the right of the lower bulge 32, protruding toward the front. When the game ball launch handle 41 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism, which will be described later. The launch speed of the game ball increases as the amount of operation (rotation amount) of the game ball launch handle 41 increases, and the game ball will reach the play area PE when this amount of operation is adjusted by the player to a predetermined amount. Furthermore, by adjusting this amount of operation, the player can selectively hit the game ball into the right route or left route, which will be described later.

As shown in Figure 3, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin and comprises a front door-side upper tray passageway leading to the upper tray 33 and a front door-side lower tray passageway leading to the lower tray 34. The passage forming unit 45 has a receiving port formed at its upper corner that protrudes rearward and opens upward, and by dividing the receiving port into left and right halves with a partition wall, the entrance to the front door-side upper tray passageway and the entrance to the front door-side lower tray passageway are separated. The upstream sides of the front door-side upper tray passageway and the front door-side lower tray passageway lead to the gaming ball distribution section described below, and gaming balls that enter the front door-side upper tray passageway are guided to the upper tray 33, and gaming balls that enter the front door-side lower tray passageway are guided to the lower tray 34.

Protruding shafts are provided at the upper and lower ends of the pivot base end on the rear surface of the front door frame 14. These protruding shafts form an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to Figure 5. Figure 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. As with Figure 3, the configuration within the play area PE of the pachinko machine 10 has been omitted for convenience in Figure 5.

(inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is primarily composed of an inner frame base body 50, which has a generally rectangular outer shape similar to that of the outer frame 11. The height of the inner frame base body 50 is set slightly smaller than that of the outer frame 11. The inner frame base body 50 is positioned close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, leaving a slight gap between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base body 50. A panel is attached to the outer frame 11 to close this gap. The panel is positioned below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically, its lower end), and when the inner frame 13 is closed to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 rests on the panel. A slight clearance may be provided between the panel and the inner frame base body 50 to prevent mutual interference, etc.

Support brackets 71 and 72 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the pivot base side (left side in Figure 5) on the front surface of the inner frame base body 50. Although not shown, the support brackets 71 and 72 have axles, and bearings provided on the front door frame 14 are inserted into these axles, thereby supporting the front door frame 14 so that it can rotate relative to the inner frame 13.

A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and front door frame 14 is disposed at the pivot tip of the inner frame base body 50 (right side in Figure 5). The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end of the inner frame base body 50 (the vertical frame member described below) and has front door hook members 76 scattered along its length (vertical direction). The inner frame base body 50 has slits corresponding to each front door hook member 76 that protrude toward the front side of the inner frame 13 and hook receiving members 49 (see Figure 3) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14. The front door hook members 76 protruding through these slits engage with front door hook members 76 provided on the front door frame 14 in a one-to-one correspondence, thereby locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. The locking device 75 also has inner frame hook members 77 that extend rearward from the inner frame 13. These inner frame hook members 77 hook onto hook receiving members 19 fixed to the outer frame 11, locking the gaming machine main unit 12 in a closed position relative to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 78 is installed on the inner frame base body 50 (locking device 75) to unlock the locking device 75. The cylinder lock 78 is provided separately from the locking unit (hook members 76, 77, interlocking rod, etc.) that constitutes the main part of the locking device 75, and is located adjacent to the locking unit. When the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the right (clockwise), the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and when the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the left (counterclockwise), the inner frame 13 is unlocked from the outer frame 11.

A storage recess 51 that stores the game board unit 80 is formed in the center of the inner frame base body 50. The storage recess 51 is recessed toward the rear of the gaming machine to match the outer shape of the game board unit 80, and the game board unit 80 is fitted into this storage recess 51 from the front of the gaming machine and secured in place by a manual locking mechanism. A roughly rectangular window hole 52 is formed in the bottom of the storage recess 51, and the rear structure of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80b, described below) protrudes through this window hole 52 to the rear of the inner frame 13. Note that almost the entire area of this window hole 52 is covered from the front of the gaming machine by the game board unit 80 attached to the inner frame base body 50.

(Game board unit 80)
The game board unit 80 is composed of a game board 80a formed mainly from wooden board material and a back block 80b provided on the back side of the game board 80a, on which various game components (variable display device, control device, movable presentation mechanism, etc.) described below are mounted on a base body 251.

The aforementioned play area PE, into which game balls flow, is formed on the front of the game board 80a. As already explained, the play area PE is covered by the glass unit 22 (more specifically, the rear glass panel 23). The glass unit 22 is positioned so that the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front of the game board 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, i.e., so that game balls flowing down the play area PE do not line up front and back at the same point on the play area PE. This prevents balls from clogging the play area PE. Note that the game board 80a is not limited to being made of wood, and can also be made of synthetic resin.

The game board unit 80 (particularly the various components arranged in the play area PE of the game board 80a) will be described below with reference to Figures 6 and 7. Figure 6 is a front view of the game board unit 80, and Figure 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 as seen from the rear.

The game board 80a has multiple large and small openings that penetrate its thickness (front-to-back). As shown in Figure 6, each opening is equipped with a general winning opening 81, an actuation opening unit 82, a variable winning device 83, a through gate 84, and other components. When game balls enter the general winning opening 81, the actuation opening unit 82, and the variable winning device 83, they are detected by sensors installed corresponding to each winning opening. Based on the detection results, the player is awarded a prize, such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls). Additionally, an outlet 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80a (play area PE). Game balls that do not enter the various winning openings are discharged from the play area PE through the outlet 86. In the following description, to clearly distinguish game balls entering the general winning opening 81, the actuation opening unit 82, and the variable winning device 83 from those entering the outlet 86, these will also be referred to as "winning."

In addition, various game components such as numerous game pins 87 and windmills 94 are arranged on the game board 80a to appropriately distribute the flow path of the game balls. The various components of these game pins 87, windmills, etc. differentiate the flow path of the game balls, and there is a reasonable probability of winning the general winning slot 81, etc., mentioned above.

A central opening is formed in the center of the gaming board 80a, and a transparent opening cover is attached to cover this central opening from the back side of the gaming board unit 80. Behind this central opening are located the variable display unit 85 and other components belonging to the back block 80b, and the variable display unit 85 and other components can be seen from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening (opening cover).

The operating port unit 82, through gate 84, and other components are arranged around the central opening. The operating port unit 82 has a first operating port 91 located below the variable display unit 85, and a second operating port 92 located below the first operating port 91. Of these two operating ports 91, 92, the second operating port 92 is equipped with an electric device 93 that functions as an opening/closing ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or opening/closing member (opening/closing means). The electric device 93 has a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable piece, and is switchable between an open state (assistance state) that allows the ball to enter the second operating port 92, and a closed state (non-assistance state) that prevents the ball from entering.

The electric device 93 may be configured so that when it is in the closed state, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second operating port 92, but when it is switched to the open state, it is easier for the ball to enter the second operating port 92 than when it is in the closed state.

The through gate 84 is located upstream of the second operating port 92, more specifically to the side of the variable display unit 85. If a player wins the support lottery triggered by the game ball passing through the through gate 84, the electric device 93 will be switched from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

When a ball enters the first operating port 91, three game balls are dispensed, and when a ball enters the second operating port 92, four game balls are dispensed, but the number of game balls dispensed is not limited to the above.

The variable winning device (special ball winning device or special ball winning means) 83 is provided with a large winning opening and a shutter that can be switched between an allowable state that allows a ball to enter the large winning opening and a blocked state that prevents the ball from entering. In the following explanation, the state of the variable winning device 83 when the shutter is in the allowable state will be referred to as the "open state," and the state of the variable winning device 83 when the shutter is in the blocked state will be referred to as the "closed state."

The variable winning device 83 may be configured so that when it is in the closed state, it is difficult for the ball to enter the variable winning device 83, but when it is switched to the open state, it is easier for the ball to enter the variable winning device 83 than when it is in the closed state.

In the normal game mode, which will be described later, an internal lottery is held based on the winning of the actuation ports 91, 92, and if the internal lottery is won (for example, a jackpot), the game transitions to a special game mode (open/close execution mode), which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game mode. The variable winning device 83 is maintained in a closed state, and is configured to switch to an open state when the game transitions to the special game mode. In the special game mode, the game is configured to repeatedly switch to the open state for multiple rounds (for example, up to six rounds), with one round consisting of the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls).

Next, we will provide additional information about the variable display unit 85. The variable display unit 85 has a pattern display device 95 that variably displays (variably displays) patterns in response to winning entries into the actuation ports 91 and 92. The pattern display device 95 is configured as a liquid crystal display device with a liquid crystal display, and its display content is controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. On the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95, for example, patterns are displayed in a row at the top, middle, and bottom, and these patterns are displayed variably by scrolling horizontally. When a jackpot is won, a predetermined combination of patterns is displayed stationary on a preset pay line, and the game transitions to the opening and closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot). Note that the pattern display device 95 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device; it can also be a dot matrix or 7-segment type display device.

A center frame 96 is provided on the gaming board 80a, surrounding the central opening. The center frame 96 is fixed to the front side of the gaming board 80a, and in this fixed state, it stands upright from the front of the gaming board 80a, so that the gap dimension between the center frame 96 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter dimension of the gaming ball. This prevents gaming balls flowing down the gaming area PE from colliding with the symbol display device 95, and the flow path of gaming balls flowing down the gaming area PE is broadly divided into the right route, which bypasses the variable display unit 85 (more specifically, the center frame 96) from the right side, and the left route, which bypasses it from the left side. In this embodiment, the various game components provided in the game area PE are arranged symmetrically (a so-called symmetrical gauge), and there is no difference in advantage or disadvantage between the right route and the left route, so that game balls launched along either the right route or the left route can enter the actuation ports 91, 92, the through gate 84, and the variable winning device 83.

A stage on which game balls can roll left and right is formed on the upper surface of the frame portion that forms the lower part of the center frame 96. Game balls that flow in through an inlet formed in the left frame portion of the center frame 96 are discharged onto the stage through a warp passage also formed in the center frame 96. The stage is configured so that game balls that reach the stage have a relatively high chance of flowing into the first actuation port 91; specifically, so that they have a higher chance of flowing into the first actuation port 91 than game balls that do not pass through the stage, which contributes to increasing the player's attention to the movement of the game balls on this stage. In this embodiment, as described above, the central opening is covered with a transparent opening cover, which prevents game balls that reach the stage from moving toward the rear block 80b (variable display unit 85).

The actuation ports 91, 92 are positioned closer to the variable display unit 85. Because a win in the actuation ports 91, 92 can trigger a transition to a special game state, it is thought that the player will pay attention to whether or not a win will occur in the actuation ports 91, 92, and also to the symbol display device 95 to determine whether or not a transition to a special game state will occur. Providing the actuation ports 91, 92 closer to the variable display unit 85 is a device that allows the player to focus their attention on the area around the variable display unit 85.

A play area partitioning member 98 is disposed at the right end of the play board 80a, which, together with the guide rail 100 described below, defines the play area PE. The play area partitioning member 98 is equipped with a stopper member that game balls flying along the guide rail 100 collide with, and a main display unit 99. The stopper member is a buffer member located near the tip of the guide rail 100, and game balls that collide with the stopper member have their momentum weakened before flowing down the play area PE. In other words, the stopper member has a force-dissipating function that weakens the momentum of the game balls that collide with it.

Here, we will provide additional information about the main display unit 99. The main display unit 99 is embedded in the play area partition member 98, and is positioned so that a portion of it faces the glass unit 22. This facing portion is provided with a main display section D that displays predetermined images, etc. The main display unit 99 is electrically connected to the main control device, which will be described later, and the display content of the main display section D is controlled by the main control device.

As shown in FIG. 6(b), the main display unit D comprises a first actuation port display unit D1 that displays the result of a lottery based on a win at the first actuation port 91, and a second actuation port display unit D2 that displays the result of a lottery conducted based on a win at the second actuation port 92. In the first actuation port display unit D1, a winning entry at the first actuation port 91 triggers a changing display of a pattern, and the result of the changing display being stopped is the result of the internal lottery conducted based on a winning entry at the first actuation port 91 being clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on a winning entry at the first actuation port 91 is a winning result corresponding to a transition to the special game state, the changing display in the first actuation port display unit D1 is stopped, a predetermined pattern is displayed as a result of the stopping, and then the game transitions to the special game state.

In the second actuation port display unit D2, a winning entry into the second actuation port 92 triggers a changing display of a pattern, and the result of the changing display stopping is the clear display of the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning entry into the second actuation port 92. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the second actuation port 92 is a winning result corresponding to a transition to the special game state, the changing display in the second actuation port display unit D2 stops, a predetermined pattern is displayed as the stopping result, and then a transition to the special game state is made according to the result.

Here, based on a win in either of the actuation ports 91, 92, a variable display is initiated on the corresponding actuation port display section D1, D2, a predetermined stop result is displayed and the variable display is stopped (a confirmed display), and one game session corresponds to the time period during which this state is maintained until the confirmed display time has elapsed. However, one game session is not limited to the above. For example, in a configuration in which a single display area is provided and the variable display is displayed in that single display area regardless of which actuation port 91, 92 is won, one game session can also correspond to the time period during which the variable display is initiated in that single display area, the variable display is stopped (a confirmed display) with the predetermined stop result displayed, and the time period during which this state is maintained until the confirmed display time has elapsed.

In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which game balls are held up to four times each through the first actuation port 91 and the second actuation port 92 (up to eight balls in total), and the main display section D of the main display unit 99 is provided with a first actuation port hold number display section S1 and a second actuation port hold number display section S2 that display the number of balls held through the actuation ports 91 and 92, respectively.

In addition to the above-mentioned operating port displays D1 and D2, the main display section D of the main display unit 99 also has a through gate display section DS that displays the lottery results based on winning at the through gate 84. The through gate display section DS displays a changing pattern in response to winning at the through gate 84, and as a result of the stopping of the changing display, the result of the internal lottery conducted based on winning at the through gate 84 is made clear (a final display is executed). If the result of the support lottery based on winning at the through gate 84 is a support win, the through gate display section DS displays a predetermined stop result, stops the changing display, and after the final display has ended, it transitions to an electric role open state. In the electric role open state, the above-mentioned electric role device 93 attached to the second operating port 92 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times a game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is reserved up to four times, and the main display section D of the main display unit 99 is provided with a reserved number display section SS that displays the number of reserved balls.

The main display unit D described above can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and visibility is guaranteed because game balls are prevented from moving in front of these various display units.

Referring again to Figure 5 to explain the configuration of the inner frame 13, below the game board unit 80 on the inner frame base body 50, a game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided which launches game balls into the play area PE based on operation of the game ball launching handle 41.

(Game ball launching mechanism 110)
The game ball launching mechanism 110 mainly comprises a solenoid 111 that launches game balls placed at a predetermined launch waiting position, a launch rail 112 that determines the launch direction of the game balls launched by the solenoid 111, a ball delivery device 113 that supplies game balls to the launch waiting position, and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base body 50, thereby making it integrated with the inner frame base body 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 at an angle so that it slopes upward toward the game board unit 80. The launch rail 112 has a groove with a roughly V-shaped cross section, and the game ball fits into this groove, thereby determining the forward and backward position of the game ball.

A ball stopper is located near the downstream end (i.e., the bottom end) of the launch rail 112, and stops the gaming balls supplied from the ball delivery device 113 in the launch standby position described above. The solenoid 111 is located further downstream from the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to the power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. Based on the electrical signal output from the power supply and launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the extension/contraction direction, causing the game ball placed in the launch standby position to be launched toward the game board unit 80, or more specifically, toward the guide rail 100 attached to the game board unit 80.

The guide rail 100, together with a play area partitioning member 98 fixed to the game board unit 80 (specifically, the front surface of the board), defines the play area PE so that the play area PE has an approximately circular outer shape. The guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102, which are arranged facing each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball. These rails 101, 102 define a single guide passage 103. The guide passage 103 has an entrance section 104 that opens at the tip (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112, and an exit section 105 located at the top of the play area PE. A game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the play area PE by moving in the order of launch rail 112 → guide rail 100 (entrance section 104 → exit section 105). Furthermore, a return prevention member 106 is attached to the game board unit 80 at the end of the exit section 105, more specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101, to prevent game balls that have reached the play area PE from returning back into the guide path 103, preventing game balls that have already reached the play area PE from interfering with the launch of subsequent game balls.

Each of the rails 101, 102 that make up the guide rail 100 forms an arc centered approximately in the center of the play area PE. As a result, a game ball passing through the guide path 103 is more likely to move (slide or roll) along the outer rail 102, i.e., while remaining in contact with the outer rail 102, due to the centrifugal force generated within the game ball. In other words, when a game ball is launched so as to reach the play area PE, the area of the guide path 103 along the outer rail 102 essentially forms the passing area (passing path) through which the game ball passes, and the area along the inner rail 101 is essentially an area through which the game ball does not pass.

As shown in Figure 5, the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally across the lower edge of the game board unit 80. In other words, the rails 100, 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are offset left and right near the lower edge of the game board unit 80. This brings the rails 100, 112 close to the lower edge of the game board unit 80, while creating a predetermined gap between the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage is located below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage is molded integrally with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 does not reach the play area PE and instead returns through the guide passage 103 as a foul ball, the foul ball will enter the foul ball passage through the gap. The foul ball passage leads to the lower tray passage on the front door side, and game balls that enter the foul ball passage are discharged into the lower tray 34 shown in Figure 1. This reduces interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be launched.

A through-hole is formed in the inner frame base body 50 to the left of the launch rail 112 (more specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14) that penetrates the inner frame base body 50 in the front-to-rear direction, and a passageway forming member 121 is disposed in this through-hole. The passageway forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base body 50 and has a main body side upper tray passage 122 and a main body side lower tray passage 123. The upstream sides of the main body side upper tray passage 122 and main body side lower tray passage 123 lead to the game ball distribution section, which will be described later. In addition, the receiving port of the passageway forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 fits below the passageway forming member 121, and the front door side upper tray passage is disposed below the main body side upper tray passage 122, and the front door side upper tray passage is disposed below the main body side lower tray passage 123.

Attached to the inner frame base body 50 below the passage forming member 121 is an opening/closing member 124 that opens and closes the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123. The opening/closing member 124 is biased to a forward position that closes the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123. When the front door frame 14 is open, this biasing force causes each opening/closing member 124 to close, preventing game balls from falling out of each passage 122, 123. In contrast, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14 pushes the opening/closing member 124 open against the biasing force. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage are connected, and further, the main body side lower tray passage 123 and the front door side lower tray passage are connected.

Next, the rear structure of the inner frame 13 (inner frame base body 50 and game board unit 80) will be described with reference to Figures 7 and 8. Figure 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

As shown in Figure 8, a bearing fitting 132 is attached to the pivot base end side (right side in Figure 8) on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50. The bearing fitting 132 has bearing portions 133 formed spaced apart above and below, and these bearing portions 133 allow the rear pack unit 15 to be rotatably attached to the inner frame 13. In addition, a plurality of fixing levers 134 are provided on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50 for fixing the rear pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in a closed state.

As already explained, a window hole 52 that penetrates the thickness of the inner frame base body 50 and opens to the back side of the inner frame base body 50 is formed in the bottom of the storage recess (game board storage section) 51 in the inner frame base body 50, and this window hole 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 stored in the storage recess 51. Various components such as a control device are mounted on the back of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80b), and these various components are exposed to the back side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52. Here, the configuration of the back of the game board unit 80 will be explained with reference to Figure 7.

As already explained, a rear block 80b is attached to the rear of the game board 80a. The rear block 80b has a roughly box-shaped base body 251 that is open on the game board 80a side, and this base body 251 is fixed to the rear of the game board unit 80, thereby integrating the game board 80a and the rear block 80b.

The front side of the base body 251 is the area where the movable performance mechanism and other components are placed, and the rear side is the area where the control device that controls these various components and the variable display unit 85 (pattern display device 95) are placed.

More specifically, a portion of the base body 251 protrudes from the rear side of the inner frame base body 50, and the above-mentioned pattern display device 95 (see Figure 6) and a display control device for driving the pattern display device 95 are attached to this protruding portion. The pattern display device 95 and display control device are stacked in the front-to-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50) with the pattern display device 95 at the front and the display control device at the rear. Furthermore, the notification/performance control device 140 is mounted on the rear portion of the base body 251, positioned behind the display control device.

The notification and performance control device 140 is equipped with a notification and performance control board that controls audio output, lamp display, and display control in accordance with instructions from the main control device (described below). The notification and performance control board is housed in a board box 141 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

A main control device unit 160 is provided below the notification/performance control device 140, covering the base body 251 from behind. The main control device unit 160 has a mounting base 161 made of synthetic resin fixed to the back of the game board unit 80 (more specifically, the back block 80b), and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. The main control device 162 is equipped with a main control board that has the function of mainly controlling the game (main control circuit) and the function of monitoring the power supply (power outage monitoring circuit), and the main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

The board box 163 comprises a roughly rectangular box base (front case body) and a box cover (rear case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are unopenably connected by a box sealing part 164 that serves as a sealing means, thereby sealing the board box 163. Multiple box sealing parts 164 are provided on the short sides of the board box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

The box sealing unit 164 can be configured in any way as long as it securely connects the box base and box cover. However, the box base and box cover are securely connected by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole that makes up the box sealing unit 164. The sealing process using the box sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening after sealing and allows early and easy detection of any unauthorized openings. Even after opening, resealing is possible. Specifically, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pin into at least one locking hole among the multiple box sealing units 164. When opening the board box 163, for example, when a malfunction occurs in the housed main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connection between the box sealing unit with the inserted locking pin and the main body of the board box 163 is severed. This separates the box base and box cover of the board box 163, allowing the main control board inside to be removed. To reseal the box, a locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If a record of the board box 163 being opened is left on the board box 163, it is easy to detect any unauthorized opening by looking at the board box 163.

The base box 163 and mounting base 161 are unsealably connected by the base seal 165. More specifically, the base seal 165 has a locking hole and locking pin, just like the box seal 164, and by inserting the locking pin into the locking hole, the base box 163 and mounting base 161 are inseparably connected. This makes it easy to detect any unauthorized removal of the base box 163.

A collection passage (not shown) is formed on the front of the base body 251 facing the lower back of the game board unit 80, corresponding to the game board openings of the general winning opening 81, the operating opening unit 82, and the variable winning device 83, and gathering in one location downstream. As a result, all game balls that win the general winning opening 81, etc. are collected below the game board unit 80 via the collection passage. In other words, the base body 251 is given the function of collecting game balls that win in the various winning openings.

A discharge passage, described below, is located below the game board unit 80, and game balls that have collected below the game board unit 80 are discharged into the discharge passage via the recovery passage. The outlet 86 also leads to the discharge passage, and game balls that do not win in any of the winning ports are discharged into the discharge passage via the outlet 86.

Furthermore, the base body 251 that constitutes the rear block 80b is equipped with detection sensors for each of the ball entry sections mentioned above: a general entry port detection sensor that detects game balls that have entered the general entry port 81, and an activation port detection sensor that detects game balls that have entered the activation ports 91 and 92. These various detection sensors form a winning detection mechanism. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control device 162, and detection information (detection signals) are output from each detection sensor to the main control device 162.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be explained based on Figures 9 and 10. Figure 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in Figure 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the rear pack unit 15. The rear pack unit 15 has a rear pack 201 as the main body of the rear pack unit 15, and a dispensing mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage panel, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the rear pack 201.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in Figure 10, comprises a base 211 to which the payout mechanism 202 and other components are attached, and a protective cover 212 that protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a generally rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover 212 is closed on the left and right sides and the top, with only the bottom open, and is large enough to enclose at least the variable display unit 85.

An external terminal board is provided on the base portion 211. The external terminal board is provided with various output terminals, and various signals are output via these output terminals to the gaming hall's management control device (hall computer). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10, a pair of upper and lower latch pins 214 are provided on the base portion 211 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10. The latch pins 214 are inserted into the bearing portions 133 provided on the inner frame 13, thereby rotatably supporting the back pack unit 15 relative to the inner frame 13. The base portion 211 is formed with multiple insertion holes through which the fixing levers 134 provided on the inner frame 13 are inserted. The fixing levers 134, when inserted into the insertion holes, abut against the base portion 211 from behind, thereby fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame 13.

A payout mechanism 202 is disposed on the base 211, bypassing the protective cover 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is located at the top of the back pack 201 and opens upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the gaming hall are sequentially replenished into the tank 221. A tank rail 222 that slopes gently downstream is connected to the side of the tank 221, and a case rail 223 that extends vertically is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A payout device 224 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 223. Game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to a game ball distribution unit 225 provided on the base 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 224.

The game ball distribution section 225 has the function of distributing game balls paid out from the payout device 224 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or the discharge passage described below, and is formed so that its inner opening leads to the upper tray 33 via the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage described above, and its outer opening leads to the lower tray 34 via the main body side lower tray passage 123 and the front door side lower tray passage.

A discharge passage panel and control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211, sandwiching the lower end from the front and rear. A discharge passage that is open to the rear is formed on the discharge passage panel on the surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open portion of the discharge passage is blocked by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed to discharge game balls to island equipment or the like in the gaming hall, and game balls that have been guided into the discharge passage from the above-mentioned collection passage or the like pass through the discharge passage and are discharged outside the pachinko machine 10.

The control device aggregate unit 204 has a horizontally elongated mounting base 241, on which a payout control device 242 and a power supply/launch control device 243 are mounted. The payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are stacked one behind the other so that the payout control device 242 is at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 242, a payout control board that controls the payout device 224 is housed in a board box 244, and a status return switch 245 provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box 244. For example, if the status return switch 245 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout device 224, the ball jam will be cleared.

The power supply and launch control device 243 has a power supply and launch control board housed in a board box 246. The power supply and launch control board generates and outputs the required power for various control devices, and also controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the game ball launch handle 41. Specifically, it controls the drive of the solenoid 111 that makes up the game ball launch mechanism 110 and the drive of the ball delivery device 113.

The power supply/launch control device 243 is also provided with a power switch 247. By operating the power switch 247, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an on state (ON state) and a cut-off state (OFF state).

The pachinko machine 10 has a function to store and retain various types of data, so that in the unlikely event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is retained, and when the power is restored, the state at the time of the power outage is restored. For example, if the power is cut off in the normal manner, such as when an amusement hall closes, the state before the power outage is stored and retained. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while pressing the reset switch 166 on the main control unit 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These switches can be operated from the front of the gaming machine by opening the gaming machine main unit 12 (inner frame 13) and exposing the back of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, when the opening of the gaming machine main unit 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, these switches cannot be operated from the front of the gaming machine. In other words, the above switches are difficult to operate when the gaming machine main unit 12 is closed, making it difficult for someone who does not have the key for the locking device 75 (for example, a fraudster) to operate them from the front of the gaming machine.

(Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control board 401 provided in the main control device 162 is equipped with an MPU 402. The MPU 402 is an element that incorporates a ROM 403 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 402, a RAM 404 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 403, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits such as a random number generator, etc. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 402, such as the functions of ROM 403 and RAM 404, may be configured to be provided as separate elements.

The MPU 402 has an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 402 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 405, a dispensing control device 242, various detection sensors, and other components provided in the main control device 162. The power outage monitoring board 405 is connected to the power supply and launch control device 243, and power is supplied to the MPU 402 via the power outage monitoring board 405.

As part of the various detection sensors, a ball entry detection sensor 391a that detects balls (winning) into the general winning opening 81, a ball entry detection sensor 391b that detects balls (winning) into the variable winning device 83, a ball entry detection sensor 391c that detects balls (winning) into the first operating opening 91, a ball entry detection sensor 391d that detects balls (winning) into the second operating opening 92, and a ball entry detection sensor 391e that detects balls (winning) into the through gate 84 are connected, and the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 determines whether a ball has been entered into each entry section (ball entry determination). The MPU 402 also executes a jackpot lottery based on winnings into the first operating opening 91 and the second operating opening 92, and executes a support lottery based on winnings into the through gate 84.

The output side of the MPU 402 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 405, the payout control device 242, and the notification/effect control device 140. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 242 based on the result of a winning entry into a winning ball entry section, such as the above-mentioned actuation ports 91 and 92. In this case, the command information storage area 425 in the ROM 403 is referenced when outputting the prize ball command. If a win into the general entry port 81 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output. If a win into the variable entry device 83 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is output. If a win into the first actuation port 91 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is output. If a win into the second actuation port 92 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 4 game balls is output.

Various commands, such as a change start command, type command, change end command, opening command, and ending command, are output from the main control device 162 to the notification/performance control device 140. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referenced. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Each of the above commands is composed of information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of this predetermined number of bytes.

Also connected to the output side of the MPU 402 are a variable winning drive unit that opens and closes the shutter of the variable winning device 83, an electric device drive unit that opens and closes the electric device 93 of the second operating port 92, and the main display unit 99. The main control board 401 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 402 controls the drive of the various drive units through these driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 402 controls the drive of the variable winning drive unit so that the variable winning device 83 opens and closes. Furthermore, if the support lottery for the electric role device 93 is won, the MPU 402 controls the drive of the electric role device drive unit so that the electric role device 93 opens and closes. Furthermore, the MPU 402 controls the display of the main display section D of the main display unit 99.

Furthermore, an external output terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 402, and information regarding ball entries into various entry areas and lottery results such as jackpots is output via this external output terminal board 213 to the management control device (hall computer) on the gaming hall side. This allows the hall computer to grasp the status of the pachinko machine 10, the game situation, etc.

The power outage monitoring board 405 relays between the main control board 401 and the power supply/launch control device 243, and is equipped with the function of monitoring the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 243. The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls using the payout device 224 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power supply and launch control device 243 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) at, for example, an amusement facility. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, it generates the operating power required for the main control board 401, payout control device 242, etc., and supplies the generated operating power through a specified power path. The power supply and launch control device 243 is also responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 110, which is activated when specified launch conditions are met.

The notification and performance control device 140 is equipped with a notification and performance control board equipped with an MPU. The MPU contains a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, a RAM that temporarily stores various data when the control programs stored in the ROM are executed, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. Note that it is not essential that the ROM and RAM be integrated into a single chip for the MPU; they may each be integrated into separate chips. The MPU of the notification and performance control device 140 drives and controls the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also controls the display control device 410.

The display control device 410 controls the display of the pattern display device 95 based on commands input from the notification/effect control device 140. In this case, the notification/effect control device 140 determines the variable display mode of the patterns on the pattern display device 95 (for example, whether or not a reach has occurred and the content of the reach effect, etc.) and the static display mode of the patterns (the type of pattern combination that will finally be displayed statically when the variable display ends) based on various commands input from the main control device 162.

Here, the configuration and contents of the variable display of the symbols for each game will be explained. In the following explanation, reference will be made to Figures 12 and 13 as appropriate. Figures 12 and 13 are schematic diagrams for explaining the display contents on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95.
For convenience of explanation, the background image and the like displayed on the display screen 95a are omitted from FIG. 13 and other figures.

The display control device 410 is provided with a character ROM. This character ROM pre-stores data for nine main symbols numbered "1" to "9" (see Figures 12(a) to (i)), as well as data for sub-symbols without numbers (see Figure 12(j)).

As shown in Figure 13(a), the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 has three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 set up on the upper, middle, and lower rows. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured with a main symbol and a sub-symbol arranged in a predetermined order. On the display screen 95a, the symbols in each of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a cyclical, changing manner, scrolling in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left).

In the upper pattern column Z1, nine main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, with one sub-symbol between each main symbol. In the lower pattern column Z3, nine main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with one sub-symbol between each main symbol. In other words, the upper and lower pattern columns Z1 and Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. In contrast, in the middle pattern column Z2, nine main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with an additional main symbol of "4" between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1," with one sub-symbol between each of these main symbols. In other words, the middle pattern column Z2 alone is composed of 10 main symbols, for a total of 20 symbols.

As shown in FIG. 13(b), the display screen 95a displays three symbols per symbol row, resulting in a total of nine symbols being displayed in a 3x3 grid. Five active lines, namely the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the downward-right line L4, and the upward-right line L5, are set on the display screen 95a. The display stops in the order of the top symbol row Z1, the bottom symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. If the display of all symbol rows Z1-Z3 ends with a predetermined symbol combination (e.g., a symbol combination with the same number) formed on any active line, a jackpot animation is displayed, indicating the occurrence of a normal jackpot or a special jackpot.

In light of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 can be referred to as the first symbol row (or first picture row), the lower symbol row Z3 as the second symbol row (or second picture row), and the middle symbol row Z2 as the third symbol row (or third picture row).

Of the above main symbols, the odd-numbered symbols (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols," while the even-numbered symbols (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols." When a special jackpot result is achieved, the same specific symbol combination or the same non-specific symbol combination is displayed as a stopped symbol. When a regular jackpot result is achieved, the same non-specific symbol combination is displayed as a stopped symbol.

The manner in which the pattern display device 95 displays the changing patterns is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction in which the changing patterns in the pattern rows are displayed, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. For example, multiple pattern rows can be set to be arranged horizontally, and the direction in which the changing patterns in the pattern rows are displayed can be set vertically.

A reserve display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 95a, specifically below the variable display area ME, which is made up of a variable display area for the upper symbol row, a variable display area for the middle symbol row, and a variable display area for the lower symbol row. The reserve display area is made up of a reserve number display area Da, which is partitioned and displayed with unit reserve display areas aligned horizontally in the same number as the maximum number of reserved balls when game balls enter the operation ports 91 and 92, and an execution target display area Dc, which can display a reserve image (reserve icon) corresponding to the game currently being played in the variable display area ME.

More specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be held when a game ball enters the operating ports 91, 92 is eight, and corresponding to this, the reserved number display area Da is set up with a first unit reserved display area, a second unit reserved display area, a third unit reserved display area, a fourth unit reserved display area, a fifth unit reserved display area, a sixth unit reserved display area, a seventh unit reserved display area, and an eighth unit reserved display area.

For example, if a game ball enters actuation ports 91 and 92 and the number of reserved balls is one, a predetermined reserved image (reserved icon) is displayed only in the first unit reserved display area, and if a game ball enters actuation ports 91 and 92 and the number of reserved balls is four, predetermined reserved images (reserved icons) are displayed in each of the first unit reserved display area to the fourth unit reserved display area. Figure 13(b) shows an example where the number of reserved balls in actuation ports 91 and 92 is three. Note that in the following explanation, "reserved number" will also be simply referred to as "reserved number."

(Regarding various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

During play, the MPU 402 uses various counter information to perform jackpot lottery draws, set the display on the main display unit 99 (main display section D), and set the symbol display on the symbol display device 95. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, it uses a hit random number counter C1 used in the jackpot lottery draw, a type counter C2 used to determine the type of hit, such as a special jackpot result or a regular jackpot result, a reach random number counter C3 used in the reach lottery draw when the symbol display device 95 misses and changes, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and a change type counter CS that determines the display time for the symbols on the operating port display sections D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 and the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95. Furthermore, it uses an electric device release counter C4 used in the lottery to determine whether the electric device 93 attached to the second operating port 92 is to be in the electric device release state.

Each counter C1-C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 set in a specified area of RAM 404. RAM 404 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 432 consisting of an activation port reserved area RE, an execution area AE, and a total reserved ball storage area.

The actuation port reserve area RE comprises a first area, a second area, a third area, a fourth area, a fifth area, a sixth area, a seventh area, and an eighth area. Depending on the winning history of the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 is stored in one of the first to eighth areas as the reserved information described above. This reserved information corresponds to special information.

In this case, if multiple consecutive wins occur through the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92, the numerical information is stored in chronological order in the first to eighth areas in the order of first area → second area → third area → fourth area. Up to four winning balls in the first actuation port 91 or second actuation port 92 can be reserved and stored for each area. The reserved ball storage area 432 also has a total reserved number storage area, which stores information for specifying the number of winning balls reserved and stored for the first actuation port 91 or second actuation port 92.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area of the operation port reserve area RE when the image changes display begins on the operation port display sections D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99. At the start of one game, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Here, we will provide additional explanation about various counters.

The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 599, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value (i.e., 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the operation port reserve area RE of the reserved ball storage area 432 of RAM 404 when a gaming ball enters the first operation port 91 or the second operation port 92.

The random number value that results in a jackpot is stored as a hit/miss table (hit/miss information group) in hit/miss table storage area 421, which serves as hit/miss information group storage means in ROM 403. As shown in FIG. 15, a hit/miss table for the low probability mode (low probability hit/miss information group) and a hit/miss table for the high probability mode (high probability hit/miss information group) are set as hit/miss tables. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, the hit/miss lottery means has set the lottery modes to a low probability mode (low probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low, and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high.

When the low-probability mode win/loss table (Figure 15(a)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are six: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, of the values of the win random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, when the high-probability mode win/loss table (Figure 15(b)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107", ... "597". In other words, out of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0-599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107", ... "597" correspond to jackpot results. Incidentally, as long as the probability of winning is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in a jackpot can be any number.

In this embodiment, the value of the random number that results in a jackpot corresponds to a miss result. Miss results are broadly divided into normal miss results and special miss results. Details will be described later, but special miss results are more favored than normal miss results in that they trigger the support mode of the electric device 93 to switch to high-frequency support mode A, which will be described later. If a special miss occurs under specified conditions, the support mode will switch to high-frequency support mode after the game round related to that special miss has ended. In the following explanation, normal miss results will also be simply referred to as "miss results."

In a situation where the low-probability mode win/loss table (Figure 15(a)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values that result in a special loss (i.e., special loss information) are "111," "333," and "555," a total of three. In other words, of the win random number counter C1 values from "0 to 599," "111," "333," and "555" correspond to the special loss result. On the other hand, in a gaming situation where the high-probability mode win/loss table (Figure 15(b)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values that result in a special loss (i.e., special loss information) are "111," "333," and "555," a total of three. In other words, of the win random number counter C1 values from "0 to 599," "111," "333," and "555" correspond to the jackpot result. In other words, the probability of a special loss is the same in both low-probability mode and high-probability mode.

Next, we will explain the type counter C2. The type counter C2 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 29, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value (i.e., 29). In this embodiment, multiple jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results differ in two conditions: (1) the lottery mode in the win/lose lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (2) the support mode by the electric role device 93 after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

The support modes provided by the electric device 93 attached to the second operating port 92 are set to a low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) so that the frequency with which the electric device 93 of the second operating port 92 opens per unit time is relatively high or low when compared under conditions in which game balls are continuously being released into the play area PE in the same manner. The high-frequency support mode is broadly divided into high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special miss or the like as described above, and high-frequency support mode B, which is triggered by a jackpot. The differences between these support modes will be explained later.

The type counter C2 is updated periodically, and when a game ball enters the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92, it is stored in the actuation port reserve area RE in the reserved ball storage area 432 of RAM 404.

The allocation destinations of game results for type counter C2 are stored as an allocation table (allocation information group) in the allocation table storage area 422, which serves as an allocation information group storage means in ROM 403. The contents of the allocation table will now be explained using the schematic diagram in Figure 16. The allocation tables include an allocation table for jackpots (first allocation information group) shown in Figure 16(a) and an allocation table for special misses (second allocation information group) shown in Figure 16(b).

As shown in Figure 16(a), the jackpot allocation table allocates game results to a 6R normal jackpot result (a special game result corresponding to a low probability) and a 6R special jackpot result (a special game result corresponding to a high probability). Specifically, of the value of the type counter C2, which ranges from "0 to 29," "0 to 14" corresponds to a 6R normal jackpot result, and "15 to 29" corresponds to a 6R special jackpot result.

As shown in Figure 17(a), a 6R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the special game state (open/close execution mode) ends, the lottery mode becomes low probability mode and the support mode becomes high frequency support mode B. This high frequency support mode B ends when the number of games executed during high frequency support mode B reaches the termination reference number, or when a jackpot result occurs before the termination reference number is reached (more specifically, when the game state transitions to special game state), and the game switches to low frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the termination reference number is set to 40 times.

A 6R probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the special game state (open/close execution mode) ends, the lottery mode becomes high probability mode and the support mode becomes high frequency support mode B. This high frequency support mode B continues until the next jackpot result occurs and the game transitions to the special game state, at which point the game switches to low frequency support mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 16(b), in the allocation table for special losses, special loss result A and special loss result B are set as the allocation destinations for game results. Specifically, of the value of the type counter C2, which ranges from "0 to 29," "0 to 23" corresponds to special loss result A, and "24 to 29" corresponds to special loss result B.

As shown in Figure 17 (b), neither special miss result A nor special miss result B triggers a change in lottery mode, but rather triggers a change in support mode by the electric device 93.

Specifically, special miss result A triggers the switch of the support mode to high-frequency support mode A after the end of the game that resulted in special miss result A. This high-frequency support mode A ends when the number of games played during high-frequency support mode A reaches the termination reference number, or when a jackpot result occurs before the termination reference number is reached (more specifically, when a transition to a special game state occurs), and the mode transitions to low-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the termination reference number is set to 20.

Special miss result B also triggers the support mode to switch to high-frequency support mode A after the end of the game that resulted in special miss result B. This high-frequency support mode A ends when the number of games played during high-frequency support mode A reaches the termination reference number, or when a jackpot result occurs before the termination reference number is reached (more specifically, when the game transitions to a special game state), and the game transitions to low-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the termination reference number is set to 40.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value (i.e., 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the actuation port reserve area RE in the reserved ball storage area 432 of RAM 404 when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92. Whether or not a reach will occur is then determined based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of ROM 403.

However, in a game that transitions to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 402 determines whether a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display is the same in each game state, but may be set individually for each game state. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a higher number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display is set when the support mode is high frequency support mode than when it is low frequency support mode.

Here, the term "reach display" (reach state) refers to a display state intended to make the player believe that a game machine equipped with a symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) capable of displaying (or varying) symbols (pictures) in a variable manner, in which the stop display result after the variable display can be a special display result in a game where the game result corresponds to the open/close execution mode, is in a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result, from the start of the variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 95 to the stage where the stop display result is derived and displayed.

In other words, by displaying the symbols in some of the multiple symbol rows displayed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 as still symbols, a reach symbol combination is displayed that may result in a symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the open/close execution mode, and in this state, the symbols in the remaining symbol rows are displayed as varying symbols.

More specifically, as a preliminary step to ending the display of changing patterns, a reach line is formed by displaying a stopped symbol combination on a pre-set effective line within the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95, which has the potential to form a symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the open/close execution mode, and while this reach line is formed, the display of changing patterns is performed using the final stopped symbol sequence.

To explain the contents displayed on display screen 95a in more detail, first the display of changing patterns in the upper pattern row ends, and then the display of changing patterns in the lower pattern row ends. Then, when a main pattern with a number that makes up a winning combination is displayed frozen on one of the active lines, a reach line is formed. When this reach line is formed, a reach display is made by displaying changing patterns in the middle pattern row. When a jackpot occurs, the main pattern that forms the reach line, along with the main pattern with a number that makes up the winning combination, is displayed frozen on the reach line, and the display of changing patterns in the middle pattern row ends.

The reach display also includes a method in which, while a reach symbol combination is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with varying symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background screen to create a reach effect, or a method in which the reach symbol combination is displayed in a reduced size or is not displayed at all, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image across substantially the entire display screen 95a to create a reach effect. Furthermore, when a reach display is being displayed or before a reach display, the reach random number counter C3 or another counter may be used to determine whether to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character.

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value (i.e., 198). The fluctuation type counter CS is used by the MPU 402 to determine the fluctuation display time in the first operating port display section D1 and second operating port display section D2 of the main display unit 99 (main display section D), and the fluctuation display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 95. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing. The buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained when determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation display in the first operating port display section D1 and second operating port display section D2, and at the start of the pattern fluctuation by the pattern display device 95.

The electric device release counter C4 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 599, and reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value (i.e., 599). The electric device release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric device holding area 433 of RAM 404 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a support lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the electric device 93 of the second operating port 92 to an open state based on the stored value of the electric device release counter C4. Below, a supplementary explanation of the support mode is provided with reference to the schematic diagrams in Figures 18 and 19.

The random number value that results in a support win is stored as a support lottery table (win/lose information group) in the win/lose table storage area 421, which serves as a win/lose information group storage means in ROM 403. As shown in FIG. 18, the support lottery tables include a support lottery table for low-frequency support mode (low-probability win/lose information group), a support lottery table for high-frequency support mode A (low-probability win/lose information group), and a support lottery table for high-frequency support mode B (high-probability win/lose information group).

In a situation where the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode (Figure 18(a)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values that result in a support win (i.e., winning information) are "1", "3", "5", "7", ... "595", "597", and "599", a total of 300. In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values from "0 to 599", "1", "3", "5", "7", ... "595", "597", and "599" correspond to a support win result. All other values correspond to a non-support win result.

In a situation where the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode A (Figure 18(b)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values that result in a support win (i.e., winning information) are "1", "3", "5", "7", ... "595", "597", and "599", a total of 300. In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599", "1", "3", "5", "7", ... "595", "597", and "599" correspond to a support win result. All other values correspond to a support non-win result. In other words, the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode A is shared with the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, when the win/loss table for high-frequency support mode B (Figure 18 (c)) is referenced during the above lottery, the random number values that result in a support win (i.e., winning information) are all 598 values except for "4" and "304". In other words, of the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", all except for "4" and "304" correspond to a support win result. In other words, high-frequency support mode B is differentiated from the above-mentioned high-frequency support mode A and low-frequency support mode in that support wins occur in almost every support lottery.

As shown in Figure 19, in low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a support win is 1/2, and when a support win occurs, the number of times the electric device 93 switches to the open state (number of openings) is set to "1," and the time the electric device 93 remains in the open state (opening time) is set to "0.1 seconds." In this way, by making the opening time extremely short, winning at the second operating port 92 is essentially avoided during low-frequency support mode.

High-frequency support mode A is similar to low-frequency support mode in that the probability of winning a support win is 1/2. However, when a support win occurs, the number of times the electric device 93 switches to the open state (opening count) is set to "2," the time the electric device remains open (opening time) is set to "2 seconds," and the interval time during which it remains closed is set to "0.2 seconds." By extending the opening time compared to low-frequency support mode, winnings into the second operating port 92 are permitted during high-frequency support mode A. By allowing winnings into the second operating port 92 to occur as needed, it is possible to play while minimizing the loss of balls (investment). In other words, compared to low-frequency support mode, high-frequency support mode A is configured to have a higher ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls fired (the so-called base).

In high-frequency support mode B, the probability of winning the support is 1/1.1, and when a support win occurs, the number of times the electric device 93 switches to the open state (number of openings) is set to "2." The time during which the electric device remains in the open state (opening time) is set to "2 seconds," and the interval time during which it remains in the closed state is set to "0.2 seconds." By extending the opening time compared to low-frequency support mode, winnings are permitted through the second operating port 92 during high-frequency support mode B. In high-frequency support mode B, winnings through the second operating port 92 occur more frequently than in high-frequency support mode A, making it possible to play while further minimizing the loss of balls (investment). In other words, compared to low-frequency support mode and high-frequency support mode A, high-frequency support mode B is configured to have a higher ratio of prize balls to the number of game balls fired (the so-called base).

As already explained, the game states in this embodiment are broadly divided into a normal game state in which gameplay progresses by repeating game turns based on balls entering the actuation ports 91, 92, and a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) to which a jackpot is triggered and which opens and closes the variable winning device 83. The normal game states are comprised of a first normal game state in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode; a second normal game state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode B; a third normal game state in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode B; and a fourth normal game state in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode A. The player's advantage is differentiated in the following order: first normal game state < fourth normal game state, third normal game state < second normal game state.

(Regarding various processes executed by the main control device 162)
Next, we will explain the timer interrupt processing and normal processing that are executed to progress the game by the MPU 402 in the main control device 162. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 402 also executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power outage signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but we will not explain these various types of processing here.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 20. This process is initiated by the MPU 402 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, a reading process is performed for the various winning detection sensors (e.g., the above-mentioned detection sensors 391a to 391e). That is, the status of the various winning detection sensors connected to the main control unit 162 is read, the status of the winning detection sensors is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Then, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the following step S103, the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric role release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric role release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the following step S104, a through winning process is executed in response to a win at the through gate 84. In the through winning process, it is determined whether a through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If this flag is stored, the value of the electric role release counter C4 updated in step S103 above is stored in the electric role holding area 433, provided that the number of reserved information for the through gate 84 stored in the electric role holding area 433 (hereinafter also referred to as the number of reserved role memories SN) is less than 4. Then, if a through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435, the winning detection flag is erased and the through gate winning process is terminated.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, where the winning process for the operating port associated with the winning at operating port 91, 92 is executed, and the timer interrupt process ends.

(Winning process for operating port)
Here, the winning process for the operating port will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 21 and 22.

In step S201, it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered the first operating port 91 (winning). If it is determined that the gaming ball has entered the first operating port 91, the process proceeds to step S202, where a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 242 to pay out three gaming balls.

In the following step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer in the gaming hall indicating that a gaming ball has entered the first actuation port 91. This allows the hall computer to understand that a ball has entered the first actuation port 91. In the following step S204, the value corresponding to the first actuation port 91 is read from the reserve number storage area, and this value is set as the reserve memory number RaN for the first actuation port (hereinafter also referred to as the reserve memory number RaN for the first actuation port). Then, in step S205, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, etc., and this winning process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the gaming ball has not entered the first actuation port 91, the process proceeds to step S206. In step S206, it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered (won) the second actuation port 92. If it is determined that the gaming ball has entered the second actuation port 92, the process proceeds to step S207, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 242 to pay out four gaming balls. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S207 is sent to the payout control device 242 in the external output process S401 of the normal process, which will be described later.

In the following step S208, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer in the gaming hall indicating that a gaming ball has entered the second actuation port 92. This allows the hall computer to understand that a ball has entered the second actuation port 92. In the following step S209, the value corresponding to the second actuation port 92 is read from the reserve number memory area, and this value is set as the reserve memory number RbN for the second actuation port (hereinafter also referred to as the reserve memory number RbN for the second actuation port). Thereafter, in step S205, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, etc., and this winning process ends.

If a negative judgment is made in both steps S201 and S206, i.e., if no ball has entered either the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92, the winning process ends.

Now, with reference to Figure 22, we will explain the information acquisition process in step S205.

(Information acquisition processing)
In the information acquisition process, first in step S301, it is determined whether the number of activation pending memories N stored in the reserved number memory area of reserved ball storage area 432, more specifically, the number of activation pending memories N (RaN or RbN above) related to the ball entry section that triggered the information acquisition process among first activation port 91 and second activation port 92, is less than the upper limit ("4" in this embodiment). If the number of activation pending memories N is the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated as is, but if it is less than the upper limit, in step S302, the number of activation pending memories N of the corresponding activation port is incremented by 1, and in step S303, the total number of reservations stored in the reserved number memory area (hereinafter referred to as the common reservation number CRN) is incremented by 1.

In the following step S304, the values of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS updated in step S103 above are stored in the first free memory area in the operation port holding area RE, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the common holding number CRN incremented by 1 in step S302 above.

In other words, if the first actuation port reserved memory number RaN is set, the values of the hit random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS updated in step S103 above are stored in the first free memory area in the actuation port reserved area RE, i.e., the area corresponding to the actuation reserved memory number N added by 1 in step S302 above.

Furthermore, if the second activation port reserved memory number RbN is set, the values of the hit random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 above are stored in the first free memory area in the activation port reserved area RE, i.e., the area corresponding to the activation reserved memory number N added by 1 in step S302 above.

After storing the hold information, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, a display update process is performed on the hold number display section of the main display unit 99. In the display update process, if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the first actuation port 91, the display in the hold number display section S1 for the first actuation port is updated, and if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the second actuation port 92, the display in the hold number display section S2 for the second actuation port is updated.

Each hold number display unit S1, S2 is made up of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs lit on these hold number display units S1, S2 matches the hold number related to the first actuation port 91 and the hold number related to the second actuation port 92. If the hold number related to the first actuation port 91 increases as a result of the current win, the number of lit LEDs on the hold number display unit S1 for the first actuation port will be increased accordingly, and if the hold number related to the second actuation port 92 increases, the number of lit LEDs on the hold number display unit S2 for the second actuation port will be increased accordingly.

In the following steps S306 and S307, the sub-side (auxiliary) control devices, the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410, are made to recognize that a win has occurred in the actuation ports 91 and 92, and a pre-confirmation process and a hold command setting process are executed to execute the hold notice, etc., described below, and the information acquisition process is terminated. Note that the hold command includes information as to whether the win is based on the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92.

The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S307 will be sent to the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process described below.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 23. Normal processing is processing that starts after main processing, which is started when the power is turned on, is executed, and in normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps S401 to S407 is executed as a periodic process with a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S409 and S410 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, external signal output processing is first executed in step S401. In the external signal output processing in step S401, output data such as timer interrupt processing or commands set in the previous normal processing is sent to each control device and hall computer on the sub-side.

Specifically, it determines whether or not a prize ball command is set, and if a prize ball command is set, it sends it to the payout control device 242. Also, if various commands are set, such as performance commands such as a fluctuation start command, type command, fluctuation end command, hold command, or shift command (described below), it sends them to the notification/performance control device 140.

In addition, although details will be described later, for example, each time the display of the changing patterns on the operating port display sections D1 and D2 of the main display section D finishes, an external signal indicating that the pattern has been confirmed is output to the hall computer, and when in opening/closing execution mode, an external signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect is output to the hall computer, and when in high frequency support mode, an external signal indicating that the high frequency support mode is in effect is output to the hall computer.

Next, in step S402, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the following step S403, a game round control process is executed to control the game for each game round. This game round control process performs jackpot determination, setting the variable display of patterns by the pattern display device 95, and display control of the main display unit 99.

After executing the game count control process in step S403, the process proceeds to step S404, where the game state transition process is executed. Details will be described later, but this game state transition process transitions the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode), high probability mode, high frequency support mode B, etc. Details of the game count control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In the following step S405, a through gate control process is executed, including a support lottery process based on winning at the through gate 84, and in step S406, an electric role support process is executed to drive and control the electric role device 93 attached to the second operating port 92. Details of the through gate process in step S405 and the electric role support process in step S406 will be described later.

Then, in step S407, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined interval (e.g., 0.6 seconds), provided that a launch permission signal has been input from the power supply/launch control device 243. This causes the game ball to be launched toward the play area PE.

In the following step S408, it is determined whether the timing for the next normal processing has arrived, i.e., whether one cycle (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, during the remaining time until the timing for the next normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

Since the execution time for each process in steps S401 to S407 changes depending on the game state, the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated in the same way.

(Game play control processing)
Next, the game play control process in step S403 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

In the game turn control process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 24, step S501 first determines whether the special game state (open/close execution mode) is in effect. If the open/close execution mode is in effect, the game turn control process is terminated without executing any of the processes from step S502 onwards, i.e., the game turn start process in steps S503 to S506 and the game turn progress process in steps S507 to S509.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, steps S502 and S503 determine whether a game is in progress. Specifically, it determines whether the operating port display sections D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 are displaying a variable value. If a variable value is being displayed, a negative determination is made in step S502 and the process proceeds to step S503. In step S503, it determines whether the confirmation display in the operating port display sections D1 and D2 has ended. If a positive determination is made in step S503, the process proceeds to steps S504 to S506 for the start of a game. In the start of a game process, first in step S504, it determines whether the total number of start reserved balls (common reserved number CRN) is "0". If the common reserved number CRN is "0", this means that no reserved information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432. Therefore, the game control process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if the common reserve number CRN is not "0", step S505 executes a data setting process to set the data stored in the operating port reserve area RE of the reserved ball storage area 432 for variable display, and then step S506 executes a variable start process to start the variable display of the operating port display sections D1 and D2 on the main display unit 99 and the variable display of the pattern display device 95, after which the game turn control process is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S505 and the fluctuation start process in step S506 will be explained in detail. First, the data setting process in step S505 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 25.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S601, the activation pending memory count N stored in the pending number storage area, which is the target of this setting process, and the common pending count CRN are decremented by 1. Then, the number of pending information stored in the activation port reserve area RE (see FIG. 14), i.e., the activation pending memory count N, is determined to be "0." If the activation pending memory count N is "0," the data setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the activation pending memory count N is not "0," the data (pending information) stored in the first area of the activation port reserve area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the data (pending information) stored in the second to eighth areas of the activation port reserve area RE are shifted sequentially toward the lower areas. As a result, for example, as data from the first area moves to the execution area AE, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, fifth area → fourth area, sixth area → fifth area, seventh area → sixth area, and eighth area → seventh area.

In the following step S604, a shift command is set, which is information that causes the notification/performance control device 140 to recognize that a data shift has occurred in the operating port holding area RE. Then, this data setting process ends. The shift command set in step S604 is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 of the normal processing (Figure 23). This shift command is then also sent to the display control device 410 via the notification/performance control device 140.

(Fluctuation start processing)
Next, the fluctuation start processing in step S506 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

The fluctuation start process first executes, in step S701, an update process for the number of plays counter provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404. The number of plays counter is cleared to 0 upon transition to the special play state, and is incremented by "1" each time the update process of step S701 is executed. By referencing the value of this number of plays counter, MPU 402 can determine the number of plays executed after the special play state ends.

In the following step S702, a win/loss determination process is executed based on the winning of the operation ports 91, 92. This win/loss determination process is executed to determine whether the reserved information referenced in the current fluctuation start process corresponds to a jackpot win. Specifically, the information for jackpot determination stored in the execution area AE, i.e., the information obtained from the win random number counter C1, is determined. Then, if the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode, the win/loss table for the low probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 421 of ROM 403 is referenced to determine whether the determined information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot. If the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 421 of ROM 403 is referenced to determine whether the determined information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot.

In the following step S703, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination process in step S702 corresponds to a jackpot. If the result corresponds to a jackpot, the jackpot type determination process is executed in step S704.

In this type determination process, the type determination information stored in the execution area AE, i.e., the information obtained from the type counter C2, is identified. The jackpot allocation table stored in the allocation table storage area 422 of the ROM 403 is then referenced to determine whether the identified type determination information corresponds to a 6R normal jackpot result or a 6R special jackpot result.

If it is a 6R special jackpot, a positive judgment is made in step S705, and the process proceeds to step S706, where the stop result setting process for a 6R special jackpot is executed. If it is a 6R regular jackpot, a negative judgment is made in step S705, and the process proceeds to step S707, where the stop result setting process for a 6R regular jackpot is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S703, if a negative judgment is made in step S703, i.e., if there is no jackpot, the process proceeds to step S708. If the result of this lottery is a normal miss as described above, a negative judgment is made in step S708 and the process proceeds to step S713. In step S713, the stop result setting process for a normal miss is executed. If the result of this lottery is a special miss as described above, a positive judgment is made in step S708 and the process proceeds to step S709, where the process of determining the type of special miss is executed.

In this type determination process, the type determination information stored in the execution area AE, i.e., the information obtained from the type counter C2, is identified. Furthermore, the special miss sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area 422 of the ROM 403 is referenced to determine whether the above-identified type determination information corresponds to special miss result A or special miss result B.

If the result is special miss A, a positive judgment is made in step S710, and the process proceeds to step S711, where the stop result setting process for special miss A is executed. If the result is special miss B, a negative judgment is made in step S710, and the process proceeds to step S712, where the stop result setting process for special miss B is executed.

In the stop result setting process of steps S706, S707, and S711 to S713, information on the pattern to be ultimately displayed on the main display unit 99 is determined by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 424 of ROM 403, and the determined information is stored in RAM 404.

In steps S706 and S707, information that allows the MPU 402 to identify whether the win/loss determination result for this game is a 6R special jackpot result or a 6R regular jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Specifically, in step S706, a 6R special jackpot flag is stored, and in step S707, a 6R regular jackpot flag is stored.

In addition, in steps S711 and S712, information that allows the MPU 402 to identify whether the win/loss determination result for the current game is special loss result A or special loss result B is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Specifically, in step S711, the special loss A flag is stored, and in step S712, the special loss B flag is stored.

After executing any of steps S706, S707, and S711-S713, the process of setting the variable display time is executed in step S714. In the process of setting the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403 is referenced to obtain variable display time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS, etc. The obtained variable display time information is then set in the variable display time counter (variable display time measurement means) provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404.

After executing the variable display time setting process in step S714, proceed to step S715 to set a variable start command and a type command. The variable start command includes information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the variable display time. The type command also includes information on the game result. In other words, the type command includes information on the game result, such as information on the 6R special jackpot result, information on the 6R normal jackpot result, information on special miss result A, and information on special miss result B. Note that in step S713, the value of the number of plays counter is referenced to determine whether the ceiling has been reached, and this information is also included in the variable start command.

The variation start command and type command set in step S715 are sent to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 of normal processing (Figure 23). Based on the received variation start command and type command, the notification/effect control device 140 determines the light emission pattern of the lamp unit 26 and the sound (BGM and sound effects) output pattern from the speaker unit 29 for that game round, and controls the lamp unit 26 and speaker unit 29 so that the determined effect content is executed. Furthermore, based on the received variation start command and type command, the notification/effect control device 140 determines the details of the game presentation for that game round, such as the pattern variation display pattern on the pattern display device 95, and adds this determined information to the variation start command and type command and sends it to the display control device 410. Based on the received variation start command and type command, the display control device 410 controls the display of the pattern display device 95 so that the game presentation (display presentation) is executed in the manner determined by the notification/effect control device 140.

Then, in step S716, the display of the changing patterns is started on the corresponding one of the first actuation port display section D1 and the second actuation port display section D2 of the main display unit 99, and then this change start process is terminated. Note that it is also possible to configure the display of the changing patterns, etc. to start before the lottery is executed.

(Setting process for variable display time)
Next, an overview of the variable display time setting process (step S714) will be described with reference to Figures 27-29. As already explained, in this embodiment, reserved information is acquired based on balls entering the first actuation port 91 and the second actuation port 92, and the variable display and final display of the images and symbols for the game round are executed based on the acquired reserved information. Here, the variable display time of the images and symbols is set according to the current game state, the result of the current win/loss lottery based on balls entering the actuation ports D1 and D2, the number of reserved information stored in the actuation port reserved area RE, and so on. Note that when comparing a jackpot result with a loss result, the former is likely to be longer than the latter. In the case of a loss result where a reach display does not occur, the variable display time is configured to be shorter as the number of reserved information stored increases.

The variable display time setting process first determines whether the lottery in step S702 described above resulted in a jackpot or special miss. Specifically, it determines whether any of the following flags is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404: a 6R guaranteed jackpot flag, a 6R normal jackpot flag, a special miss A flag, or a special miss B flag.

(Time table showing fluctuations in response to deviations from normal)
If the lottery result is a normal miss (complete miss) that does not correspond to reaching the ceiling (not reached), it is determined whether or not to generate a reach display on the symbol display device 95 in this game. Specifically, it determines whether or not to generate a reach display by referring to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 403. Then, it refers to a variable display time table corresponding to a complete miss from the various variable display time tables stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403, and sets the variable display time according to the current game status, the number of reserved information stored in the operation port reserve area RE, and whether or not a reach has occurred.

Figure 27 (a1) shows an example of the variable display time when a complete miss occurs in the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. For example, if the number of stored pending information is "0" or "1," the variable display time is set to either "12, 13, or 14 seconds." If the number of stored pending information is "2," the variable display time is set to either "7, 8, or 9 seconds." If the number of stored pending information is "3" to "8," the variable display time is set to either "3, 4, or 5 seconds." Note that in the first normal gaming state, the fixed display time of the symbols on the actuation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the symbols on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second."

Figure 27 (a2) illustrates the variable display time for a complete miss in the fourth normal gaming state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A. For example, if the number of stored pending information bits is "0" or "1," the variable display time is set to one of "12, 13, or 14 seconds." If the number of stored pending information bits is "2," the variable display time is set to one of "7, 8, or 9 seconds." If the number of stored pending information bits is "3" to "8," the variable display time is set to one of "3, 4, or 5 seconds." Note that in the fourth normal gaming state, the fixed display time for the symbols on the actuation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time for the symbols on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second." In other words, the setting mode for the variable display time in the fourth normal gaming state is the same as the setting mode for the variable display time in the first normal gaming state.

Figure 27 (a3) shows an example of the variable display time when there is a complete miss in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B. For example, if the number of stored pending information is "0", the variable display time is set to either "12, 13, or 14 seconds", and if the number of stored pending information is "1" to "8", the variable display time is set to either "1 or 2 seconds". Note that in the second normal gaming state, the fixed display time of the patterns on the actuation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the patterns on the pattern display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 seconds".

Figure 27 (a4) shows an example of the variable display time in the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode B, in the case of a complete miss. For example, if the number of stored pending information is "0," the variable display time is set to either "12, 13, or 14 seconds," and if the number of stored pending information is "1" to "8," the variable display time is set to either "1 or 2 seconds." In other words, the setting mode for the variable display time in the third normal gaming state is the same as the setting mode for the variable display time in the second normal gaming state. Note that in the third normal gaming state, the fixed display time for the symbols on the actuation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time for the symbols on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second."

Incidentally, in any of the first through fourth normal game states, in a game in which a reach display corresponding to a miss result (miss reach) occurs, the variable display time is set to anywhere from 20 to 30 seconds, regardless of the number of pending information stored. This variable display time is within the same range as the variable display time set in a game in which a jackpot result occurs (see Figure 28), and a relatively long time within that range is likely to be set in the case of a jackpot result, while a relatively short time within that range is likely to be set in the case of a miss result. In other words, a difference is set so that a reach display with a long variable display time has a higher likelihood of a jackpot than a reach display with a short variable display time.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 shown in this embodiment, if play progresses without a jackpot and the number of plays in normal play reaches a preset upper limit (hereinafter also referred to as the ceiling), the support mode may be forcibly switched to high-frequency support mode A in response to reaching the ceiling. In the play round in which the ceiling is reached, a variable display time (specifically, 20 to 30 seconds) corresponding to the reach display is set, just like in the play round in which a jackpot or special miss occurs.

However, this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure a variable display time that does not correspond to a reach display in a game in which the ceiling is reached. For example, regardless of whether the ceiling is reached or not, the variable display time setting may be the same for game in which the ceiling is reached and game in which the ceiling is not reached.

Incidentally, the term "complete miss" used in the explanation below is a general term for game results that do not fall into the category of jackpots, special misses, or regular misses that do not correspond to reaching the ceiling.

(Variable display time table for jackpots)
When the lottery result is a jackpot (6R probability jackpot or 6R normal jackpot), a variable display time table corresponding to the jackpot is referred to from various variable display time tables stored in a variable display time table storage area 423 of a ROM 403, and the variable display time is set regardless of the current game state and the number of reserved information stored in the operating port reserved area RE.

Figure 28 shows an example of the variable display time when a complete miss occurs in the first to fourth normal gaming states. Regardless of whether the number of stored pending information is "0" to "8," the variable display time is set to "20 to 30 seconds." This variable display time range is the same as the range when a miss reach occurs, as described above, and within this range, a relatively long time is more likely to be set than a relatively short time. In the first, third, and fourth normal gaming states, the fixed display time of the symbols on the actuation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the symbols on the symbol display device 95 is "1 second," while in the second normal gaming state, the fixed display time of the symbols on the actuation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the symbols on the symbol display device 95 is "0.5 seconds."

(Fluctuating display time table for special deviations)
If the lottery result is a special miss (special miss A or special miss B), the variable display time is set by referring to the variable display time table corresponding to the special miss from various variable display time tables stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403.

Figure 29 (c1) shows the variable display time when a special miss occurs in the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. Regardless of whether the number of stored pending information is anything from "0" to "8," the variable display time is set to anywhere from "20 to 30 seconds." The range of this variable display time is the same as when the above-mentioned miss reach occurs, and within this range, a relatively long time is more likely to be set than a relatively short time. Note that in the first normal game state, the fixed display time of the symbols on the actuation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the symbols on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second."

Figure 29 (c2) shows the variable display time when a special miss occurs in the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A. Regardless of whether the number of stored pending information is anything from "0" to "8," the variable display time is set to anywhere from "20 to 30 seconds." The range of this variable display time is the same as when the above-mentioned miss reach occurs, and within this range, a relatively long time is more likely to be set than a relatively short time. Note that in the first normal game state, the fixed display time of the symbols on the actuation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the symbols on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second."

Figure 29 (c3) shows the variable display time in the case of a special miss in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B. Even if the number of stored pending information is anything from "0" to "8," the variable display time is set to either "1 or 2 seconds." The range of this variable display time is the same as that in the case of a complete miss described above, making it difficult to identify a special miss from the variable display time. Note that in the second normal gaming state, the fixed display time of the patterns on the actuation port display sections D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the patterns on the pattern display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 seconds."

Figure 29 (c4) shows the variable display time in the case of a special miss in the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode B. Regardless of whether the number of stored pending information is anything from "0" to "8," the variable display time is set to either "1 or 2 seconds." The range of this variable display time is the same as that in the case of a complete miss described above, making it difficult to identify a special miss from the variable display time. Note that in the third normal gaming state, the fixed display time of the patterns on the actuation port display sections D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the patterns on the pattern display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 seconds."

As already explained, in the pachinko machine 10 shown in this embodiment, if play progresses without a jackpot and the number of plays in the normal game state reaches a preset upper limit (ceiling), the support mode may be forcibly switched to high-frequency support mode A in response to the ceiling being reached. Reaching the ceiling does not occur in high-frequency support mode B, but it can occur in the first normal game state corresponding to the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, or the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode A. In a game in which the ceiling is reached in the first normal game state or the fourth normal game state, the variable display time is set to the same variable display time as the reach display, etc. (more specifically, 20 to 30 seconds). In other words, the reach display is executed in a game in which the ceiling is reached.

Returning to the explanation of the game play control process (Figure 24), if the operating port display sections D1 and D2 on the main display unit 99 are displaying a variable or fixed value, the process proceeds to step S507. In step S507, it is determined whether the variable display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time counter in RAM 404 (variable display time information) has reached "0". This value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Figure 20) is activated.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, variable display processing is executed in step S508. In the variable display processing, the display mode of the corresponding one of the operating port display sections D1, D2 is changed. After that, the game turn control processing is terminated. If the variable display time has elapsed, final display processing is executed in step S509, and then the game turn control processing is terminated. Details of this final display processing will be described later.

(Game state transition processing)
Next, the game state transition process in step S404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether the game is currently in the opening/closing execution mode (special game state). If the game is not currently in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, where it is determined whether one game round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether a preset fixed display time (stop display time) has elapsed since the variable display ended on either the operating port display section D1 or D2 of the main display section D. If the game round has not ended, the game state transition process is terminated.

If the game has ended, a positive determination is made in step S802 and the process proceeds to step S803. In step S803, it is determined whether the game result of the current game (the result of the win/lose lottery described above) corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode (special game state). Specifically, it is determined whether a 6R special jackpot flag or a 6R regular jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If neither of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process is terminated.

If any of the above flags is stored, the opening/closing execution mode start process is executed in step S804. This start process releases the operation restriction of the variable winning device 83 by the locking device, and the opening and closing operation of the variable winning device 83 is permitted until the opening/closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, in the start process of step S804, an opening/closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, and a waiting time for opening in the opening/closing execution mode is set. Note that in the above step S801, whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is determined based on the presence or absence of this opening/closing execution mode flag.

In the following step S805, the round counter RC1 provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set to "6". The round counter RC1 functions as a means for tracking the number of times the variable winning device 83 has been opened. After executing the processing of step S805, the process proceeds to step S806, where the high-frequency support mode flags A and B stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased. This forcibly switches the support mode in the opening/closing execution mode to the low-frequency support mode. Thereafter, the opening command setting process is executed in step S807, and the external signal setting process is executed in step S808, after which the game state transition process ends.

The opening command set in step S807 is sent to the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 in step S401 of the normal processing (Figure 23). The notification/effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. The content of this effect includes the display mode of the pattern display device 95, and this determined display mode is output from the notification/effect control device 140 to the display control device 410 as a display content command. The display control device 410 controls the display of the pattern display device 95 so that a display corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode, for example, a moving image of a character or the like as display content corresponding to a jackpot, or a background image, is switched, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification/effect control device 140.

The external signal set in step S808 is also sent to the gaming hall's hall computer in step S401 of normal processing (Figure 23), and the hall computer can determine that it is in opening/closing execution mode based on this external signal.

Returning to the explanation of step S801, if it is determined in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S809. In step S809, it is determined whether the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the special prize opening/closing process is executed in step S810. Here, the special prize opening/closing process will be explained with reference to Figure 31.

(Big prize opening and closing process)
In the large prize opening opening/closing process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether the variable prize winning device 83 (large prize winning device) is open or not. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive status of the variable prize winning device drive unit of the variable prize winning device 83. If the large prize winning device is not open, in step S902 it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". If the determination in step S902 is positive, the large prize winning device opening/closing process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S902, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, a determination is made as to whether the value of timer counter TC1 is "0." Timer counter TC1 is a counter referenced when determining the opening time or interval time of the large prize opening, and its value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see Figure 20) is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S903, the large prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" and the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0", proceed to step S904 and execute the process of opening the variable prize winning device 83 (large prize winning opening). Specifically, the variable prize winning device drive unit is driven to open the large prize winning opening.

Then, steps S905 and S906 are executed to set the closing conditions (open setting) for the variable prize winning device 83 (large prize opening). Specifically, in step S905, the timer counter TC1 is set to "15000" (equivalent to 30 seconds), and in the following step S906, the first prize winning counter PC1 is set to "10."

After executing the processing of step S906, an opening command indicating that the variable winning device 83 (large winning opening) has been opened is set in step S907, and the large winning opening opening/closing processing is terminated. This set opening command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 of the normal processing (see Figure 23). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening based on the opening command received, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S901, if it is determined in step S901 that the variable winning device 83 (large winning opening) is open, the process proceeds to step S908, where it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0." If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0," the process proceeds to step S909, where it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the large winning opening based on a detection signal from a detection sensor disposed in the variable winning device 83.

If a win has occurred, a win command output process is executed in step S910. The win command is output to the notification/effect control device 140, and the win command is configured to change the effect during the open/close execution mode executed on the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95, for example.

After executing the command output process in step S910, the process proceeds to step S911. In step S911, the value of the first prize counter PC1 is decremented by 1, and in the following step S912, it is determined whether the value of the first prize counter PC1 is "0." If it is not "0," the process of opening and closing the large prize opening is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S912, i.e., if the value of the first prize counter PC1 is "0", or if a positive judgment is made in step S908 (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC1 is determined to be "0"), this means that the conditions for closing the large prize opening are met. In this case, in step S913, the variable prize opening device drive unit is set to a non-operated state to close the variable prize opening device 83 (large prize opening).

In the following step S914, the round counter RC1 is updated. Specifically, if the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0", the round counter RC1 is decremented by 1, and if the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the value of the round counter RC1 is maintained at "0".

Then, in step S915, it is determined whether the updated value of the round counter RC1 is "0." If the determination in step S915 is negative, the process proceeds to step S916, where the timer counter TC1 is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2.0 seconds).

After executing the processing of step S916, a close command is set in step S917, and the main prize opening/closing processing is terminated. This set close command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 of the normal processing (Figure 23). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the received close command based on the close command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S915, if it is determined in step S915 that the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S918. In step S918, the ending start process is executed. In this start process, an ending wait time is set for the ending of the opening and closing execution mode, during which the next game round is not started before the game begins. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, which is pre-stored in ROM 403, is set in a wait time counter provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404.

Then, in step S919, an ending command is set, and the main prize opening/closing process is terminated. This set ending command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (Figure 23).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Figure 30), after executing the large prize opening/closing process in step S810, the process proceeds to step S811, where it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0", the game state transition process ends. If the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S812. In step S812, it is determined whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process ends.

If the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, in step S813, the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. The transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode is explained below with reference to the flowchart in Figure 32.

(Transition process when closing/opening execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether the current open/close execution mode was triggered by a 6R probability variable jackpot. If the determination in step S1001 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S1002, where a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Based on the high probability mode flag thus set, the win/loss table for the high probability mode will be referenced in the win/loss lottery for subsequent game rounds.

Then, the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode B flag set in this way, the D support lottery table for high-frequency support mode B is referenced in the support lottery during the subsequent electric role support processing, and the variable display time table for high-frequency support mode B is referenced as the variable display time table for determining the variable display time of the image on the through gate display section DS.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001, if the jackpot that triggered this open/close execution mode is a 6R normal jackpot, a count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 (step S1004), and the continuation count counter provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set to "40". Then, proceed to step S1003, and a high frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404.

The value of the continuation counter is decremented by "1" each time a game is played, and high-frequency support mode B ends when the value of the continuation counter reaches "0." In other words, the value of the continuation counter determines the upper limit of the number of games that can be played during high-frequency support mode B (the above-mentioned termination reference number).

After executing the processing of step S1003, the process proceeds to step S1006, where the value of the number of plays counter provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is cleared (reset) to 0. Then, in step S1007, the various flags for the open/close execution mode (such as the jackpot flag) stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode is stopped.

Next, the through gate control processing in step S405 during normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 33 and 34.

(Through gate control process)
In the through gate control process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not support is being provided by the electric role device 93. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. The support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 when support by the electric role device 93 starts, and is deleted from the various flag storage area 435 when support ends.

If a support flag is stored, the through gate control process is terminated. If a support flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S1101 and the process proceeds to step S1102. In step S1102, it is determined whether a changing or final display of a pattern is currently being performed in the through gate display section DS in the main display section D. If a negative determination is made in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is reserved up to four times; in other words, up to four pieces of reserved information (electric role reserved) based on winnings at the through gate 84 are stored in the electric role reserved area 433. In step S1103, it is determined whether the number of reserved role memories SN is "0". If the number of reserved role memories SN is "0", a positive determination is made in step S1103 and the through gate control process is terminated. If the number of reserved role memories SN is not "0", a negative determination is made in step S1103 and the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the electric role reserved area 433 for variable display.

In this data setting process, the number of reserved feature memories SN is decremented by 1. Then, it is determined whether the number of reserved information stored in the electric feature reservation area 433 is "0". If the number of reserved feature memories SN is "0", this data setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of reserved feature memories SN is not "0", the data (reserved information) stored in the first area of the electric feature reservation area 433 is moved to the execution area. Then, the data (reserved information) stored in the second to fourth areas of the electric feature reservation area 433 is shifted sequentially toward the lower areas. As a result, for example, as the data in the first area is moved to the execution area, the data in each area is shifted, such as from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, and the fourth area to the third area.

After executing the data setting process in step S1104, the process to start changing the image on the through gate display unit DS is executed in step S1105, and then this through gate control process is terminated. The change start process in step S1105 will now be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 34.

(Fluctuation start processing)
In the fluctuation start processing, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode B. If the current support mode is either low-frequency support mode or high-frequency support mode A, a negative determination is made in step S1201 and the processing proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, a support lottery process (low-probability support lottery process) is executed by referring to the support lottery table corresponding to the low-frequency support mode and high-frequency support mode A (see FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b)). If the current support mode is high-frequency support mode B, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 and the processing proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, a support lottery process (high-probability support lottery process) is executed by referring to the support lottery table corresponding to high-frequency support mode B (see FIG. 18(c)).

If a support lottery result is won in steps S1202 and S1203, an affirmative judgment is made in step S1204, and the process proceeds to step S1205, where the stop result setting process for the support win is executed. If a support lottery result is not won in steps S1202 and S1203, a negative judgment is made in step S1204, and the process proceeds to step S1206, where the stop result setting process for the support non-win is executed.

After executing the stop result setting process of steps S1205 and S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207, where the process for setting the variable display time of the image on the through gate display unit DS is performed. The variable display time table storage area 423 of ROM 403 stores a variable display time table for low-frequency support mode and a variable display time table for high-frequency support mode. If the current support mode is low-frequency support mode, the variable display time of the image is set by referring to the variable display time table for low-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the variable display time set by referring to the variable display time table for low-frequency support mode is specified to be "10 to 20 seconds" (see Figure 35). In contrast, if the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or B, the variable display time of the image is set by referring to the variable display time table for high-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the variable display time set by referring to the variable display time table for high-frequency support mode is specified to be "0.5 seconds" (see Figure 35). In other words, in high-frequency support modes A and B, the time during which the image changes display on the through gate display unit DS is significantly shorter than in low-frequency support mode.

In addition, in all support modes, the time for the image to be displayed on the through gate display unit DS is standardized to 0.5 seconds.

After executing the setting process in step S1207, the variable display of the image on the through gate display unit DS begins in step S1208, and this through gate control process ends.

(Electrical support processing)
Next, the electric role support process in step S406, which is executed as part of the normal process, will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 36 and 37.

In the electric role support processing, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not support is being provided by the electric role device 93. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If support is not being provided, a negative determination is made in step S1301 and the processing proceeds to step S1302. In step S1302, it is determined whether or not the timing has come when the final display of the pattern has ended in the through gate display unit DS. If the final display of the pattern has not ended, a negative determination is made in step S1302 and the electric role support processing ends. If the final display of the pattern has ended, a positive determination is made in step S1302 and the processing proceeds to step S1303.

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not a support win has been awarded in the support lottery based on winning through gate 84. If a support win has not been awarded, a negative determination is made in step S1303, and the electric role support processing is terminated. If a support win has been awarded in the support lottery based on winning through gate 84, a positive determination is made in step S1303, and the processing proceeds to step S1304. In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or B. If it is low-frequency support mode, the processing proceeds to step S1305, and the round counter RC2 provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set to "1". The round counter RC2 functions as a means for keeping track of the number of times the electric role device 93 has been opened. If it is high-frequency support mode A or B, the processing proceeds to step S1306, and the round counter RC2 is set to "2".

After executing the processing of steps S1305 and S1306, the process proceeds to step S1307, where a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in step S1308, the opening start processing is executed, and the main electric role support processing is terminated. In the opening start processing, a waiting time for opening is set. After this waiting time has elapsed, the opening and closing operation of the electric role 93 will begin.

Returning to the explanation of step S1301, if a positive judgment is made in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1309. In step S1309, it is determined whether the opening wait time set in step S1308 has elapsed. If the opening wait time has not elapsed, a negative judgment is made in step S1309, and the main electric support processing is terminated. If the opening wait time has elapsed, a positive judgment is made in step S1309, and the process proceeds to step S1310. Here, the electric opening/closing processing in step S1310 will be explained with reference to Figure 37.

(Electrical switching processing)
In the electric role opening/closing process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether the electric role 93 is open (open state). Whether the electric role 93 is open is determined by whether the electric role drive unit is in a driven state. If the electric role 93 is open, proceed to step S1402, where it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0." If the value of the round counter RC2 is "0," the electric role opening/closing process ends. If the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0," proceed to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is "0." The timer counter TC2 is a counter referenced when determining the opening time and interval time of the electric role 93, and its value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S1403, the electric role opening/closing process ends. If the determination in step S1403 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S1404.

In step S1404, the electric role release process is executed. Specifically, the output of a drive signal to the electric role drive unit (solenoid) is started, and the electric role 93 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Then, in step S1405, the second winning counter PC2 is set to "10". In the following step S1406, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A or B. If it is high-frequency support mode A or B, the timer counter TC2 is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2 seconds) (step S1407). If it is low-frequency support mode, the timer counter TC2 is set to "50" (equivalent to 0.1 seconds).

Returning to the explanation of step S1401, if a positive determination is made in step S1401, i.e., if the electric role device 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S1409. In step S1409, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0." If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0," the process proceeds to step S1410. In step S1410, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second operating port 92 based on a detection signal from the detection sensor for the second operating port 92. If a win has not occurred, the electric role opening/closing process is terminated. If a win has occurred, the value of the second winning counter PC2 is decremented by 1 in step S1411, and in the following step S1412, it is determined whether the value of the second winning counter PC2 is "0." If it is not "0," the electric role opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive determination is made in step S1412, i.e., if the value of the second winning counter PC2 is "0", or if a positive determination is made in step S1409 (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC2 is determined to be "0"), this means that the condition for ending the opening of the electric device 93 has been met. In this case, in step S1413, the output of the drive signal to the electric device drive unit is stopped to close the electric device 93 (second operating port 92).

In the following step S1414, the round counter RC2 is updated. Specifically, if the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", the round counter RC2 is decremented by 1, and if the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the value of the round counter RC2 is maintained at "0".

Then, in step S1415, it is determined whether the updated value of round counter RC2 is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1415, the process proceeds to step S1416, where timer counter TC2 is set to "100" (equivalent to 0.2 seconds). If a determination is made in step S1415 that the value of round counter RC2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1417. In step S1417, the ending start process is executed. In this start process, the waiting time for the electric role support ending is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, which is pre-stored in ROM 403, is set in the waiting time counter provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 36, after executing the electric role opening/closing process of step S1310, the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, it is determined whether the value of the round counter RC2 is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1311, the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S1311, the process proceeds to step S1312, where it is determined whether the waiting time for the ending set in step S1417 above has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S1312, the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S1312, the process proceeds to step S1313. In step S1313, the support flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 is erased, and the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. This lifts the restrictions on the support lottery based on winning through gate 84.

As detailed above, the support mode of the electric device 93 is configured to switch from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode primarily via the special game state, but in the event of a special miss or reaching the ceiling, there are cases where the mode switches from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode without going through the special game state. Below, with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 38 and 39, we will provide additional explanation of the configuration related to the support mode switching, specifically the confirmation display process (step S509) of the game count control process (Figure 24) executed as part of the normal processing.

(Processing for confirmation display)
As shown in Fig. 38, in the confirmation display process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a confirmation display is currently being performed on the actuation port display units D1 and D2. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, a process for setting a confirmation display time is executed. In this embodiment, the confirmation display time is set to "1 sec" in the first normal gaming state, the third normal gaming state, and the fourth normal gaming state, and "0.5 sec" in the second normal gaming state.

In the following step S1503, the start processing of the final display is executed. In this start processing, the display of the operation port display units D1 and D2 is controlled to stop the image determined in each of the processes in steps S706, S707, S711 to S713. After that, in step S1504, a change end command is set, and the final display processing is terminated. The change end command is output to the notification/performance control device 140, etc. in step S401 of the normal processing, and upon receiving the change end command, the notification/performance control device 140 terminates the change display of the image currently being displayed on the image display device 95, etc. (transitions to the final display).

Returning to the explanation of step S1501, if a positive judgment is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether the final display time for the images in the actuation port display sections D1 and D2 has elapsed. If a negative judgment is made in step S1505, the final confirmation display process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S1505, the support mode switching process is executed in step S1506, and the final confirmation display process is terminated. Now, the support mode switching process will be described with reference to Figure 39.

(Support mode switching process)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode B. If the determination in step S1601 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, it is determined whether a count limit flag is stored in the various flags storage area 435 of RAM 404. If the determination in step S1602 is negative, the switching process ends. If the determination in step S1602 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1." In the following step S1604, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0." If the determination in step S1604 is negative, the switching process ends. If the determination in step S1604 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S1605, where the high-frequency support mode flag (more specifically, the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the number-limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are cleared, and the switching process is terminated. Clearing the high-frequency support mode flag switches the support mode from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S1601, if a negative judgment is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A. If a positive judgment is made in step S1606, the process proceeds to step S1607. In step S1607, it is determined whether the value of the number of plays counter has reached its upper limit. If a negative judgment is made in step S1607, the process proceeds to step S1608. In step S1608, the continuation number counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation number counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S1609, it is determined whether the value of the continuation number counter is "0". If a negative judgment is made in step S1609, the switching process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S1609, the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag) and the number limit flag are cleared in step S1605, and the switching process is terminated. In other words, if the number of games played during high frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the mode will switch to low frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S1606, if a negative judgment is made in step S1606, i.e., if the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1610. In step S1610, it is determined whether the value of the number of plays counter has reached its upper limit. If a negative judgment is made in step S1610, the process proceeds to step S1611. In step S1611, it is determined whether the current play corresponds to a special miss. If it does not correspond to a special miss, a negative judgment is made in step S1611, and this switching process ends. If a positive judgment is made in step S1611 (if it corresponds to a special miss) or if a positive judgment is made in step S1610 (if the ceiling has been reached), the process proceeds to step S1612. In step S1612, a high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flags storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in the following step S1613, a number-limit flag is set in the various flags storage area 435 of RAM 404. After that, proceed to step S1614, execute the continuation counter setting process, and then terminate this switching process.

In the continuation counter setting process, if the value of the play count counter reaches the upper limit (ceiling) during the current play, the continuation counter is set to "400". This means that high-frequency support mode A will continue until a jackpot is achieved during that high-frequency support mode A or 400 play counts have been executed during that high-frequency support mode A. If the current play result is a special miss A, the continuation counter is set to "20". This means that high-frequency support mode A will continue until a jackpot is achieved during that high-frequency support mode A or 20 play counts have been executed during that high-frequency support mode A. If the current play result is a special miss B, the continuation counter is set to "40". This means that high-frequency support mode A will continue until a jackpot is achieved during that high-frequency support mode A or 40 play counts have been executed during that high-frequency support mode A.

Returning to the explanation of step S1607, if the value of the play count counter reaches the upper limit (ceiling) during high-frequency support mode A, the continuation count counter is set (overwritten) to "400" in step S1614, and this switching process is terminated. This extends high-frequency support mode A so that it continues until the number of plays executed during high-frequency support mode A reaches 400. In other words, if the ceiling is reached during high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss, the number of plays for high-frequency support mode A to continue is reset (overwritten), and the upper limit of the fourth normal game state is raised without going through other normal game states, etc.

(Regarding the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410)
Next, with reference to the block diagram of Figure 40, a supplementary explanation will be given of the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410.

An MPU 442 is mounted on the notification/performance control board 441 provided in the notification/performance control device 140. The MPU 442 contains a ROM 443 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 442, a RAM 444 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 443, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. Note that it is not essential for the ROM 443 and RAM 444 to be integrated into a single chip for the MPU 442; they may each be integrated into a separate chip. This is also true for the MPUs of other control devices.

The MPU 442 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control unit 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 442, and receives game play control commands (game play control information) such as the above-mentioned fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command from the main control unit 162. It also receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands, as well as open/close execution mode commands (open/close execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

The output side of the MPU 442 is connected to the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14, and the display control device 410. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/performance control device 140 are sent (transferred) to the display control device 410 while maintaining their information format.

The display control device 410 includes an MPU 472, which is an element in which a program ROM 473 and a work RAM 474 are integrated into a single chip, and a display control board 471 on which a video display processor (VDP) 475, a character ROM 476, and a video RAM 477 are mounted. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 473 and the work RAM 474 be integrated into a single chip for the MPU 472; each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/effect control device 140, or performs predetermined calculations based on the received commands, to control the VDP 475 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 475). More specifically, the MPU 472 performs processing to identify the variable display pattern for each game play on the pattern display device 95 based on the commands sent from the notification/effect control device 140, as well as processing related to hold notices, etc., and performs drawing processing for the VDP 475 in accordance with the processing results. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95.

The program ROM 473 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 472, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images. The work RAM 474 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 472 executes various programs. This work data, flags, etc. are stored in various areas of the work RAM 474.

VDP475 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the image processing device that serves as the LCD driver built into the pattern display device 95. Because VDP475 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is like a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. VDP475 adjusts the timing of the MPU472, video RAM477, etc. to mediate the reading and writing of data, and reads image data stored in video RAM477 from character ROM476 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 95.

The character ROM 476 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 95. This character ROM 476 stores bitmap image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot in the bitmap image, and so on.

It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 476, with each character ROM 476 responsible for storing image data, etc. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 476 to store JPEG image data for background images stored in the program ROM 473.

Video RAM 477 is memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 95, and the display content of the pattern display device 95 can be changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 477.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the outline of the variable display mode of the pattern on the display screen 95a is identified by the notification/performance control device 140 with reference to commands from the main control device 162, and the details of the variable display mode are determined by the display control device 410 based on the identification results. Specifically, the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 executes a variable display control process as part of periodic processing that is activated at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 2 msec), and this variable display control process identifies the outline of the variable display mode of the pattern. Here, the variable display control process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 41.

(Variable display control process)
In the variable display control process, if the gaming state is the first normal gaming state, a positive judgment is made in step S1701, and a first variable display control process for the first normal gaming state is executed in step S1702. If the gaming state is the second normal gaming state, a negative judgment is made in step S1701 and a positive judgment is made in step S1703, and a second variable display control process for the second normal gaming state is executed in step S1704. If the gaming state is the third normal gaming state, a negative judgment is made in steps S1701 and S1703, and a third variable display control process for the third normal gaming state is executed in step S1705. If the gaming state is the fourth normal gaming state, a negative judgment is made in steps S1701 and S1703 and a positive judgment is made in step S1707, and a fourth variable display control process for the fourth normal gaming state is executed in step S1708.

(First variable display control process)
Here, referring to the flowchart of Figure 42, we will explain the first variable display control process executed in the first normal game state.

In the first variable display control process, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether one game is being played, i.e., whether the symbol display device 95 is displaying a variable or final symbol display for one game. If it is determined that a game is not being played, the process proceeds to step S1802, where it is determined whether a variable start command sent from the main control device 162 has been received.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1802, the variable display control process is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S1802, the first variable start process described below is executed in step S1803, and then the variable display control process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1801, if a positive judgment is made in step S1801, i.e., if it is judged that a game round is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1804, it is judged whether or not a fluctuation end command sent from the main control unit 162 has been received. If a negative judgment is made in step S1804, fluctuation in progress processing is executed in step S1805, and then the fluctuation display control process is terminated. Fluctuation in progress processing is a process for executing various effects and changing the determined effects during the game round started by the fluctuation start processing.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1804, the process proceeds to step S1806, where a process for ending the variation is executed, and then this variation display control process is terminated. In the process for ending the variation, the pattern variation display and the currently running effects are terminated (confirmed and stopped) in accordance with the hold information for the relevant game round. In this process, the speaker unit 29 and lamp unit 26 are driven and controlled to perform an effect corresponding to the confirmed stop. A confirmation command is then output to the display control device 410, and this variation end process is terminated. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the pattern display device 95 to confirm and stop the patterns based on the received confirmation command.

(First fluctuation start processing)
Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the first fluctuation start processing in step S1803 with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 43. The first fluctuation start processing is processing for starting the effects for a game round based on receiving a fluctuation start command from the main control device 162. In the first fluctuation start processing, settings such as a reach display are made as effects for a game round.

In the first fluctuation start process, first, in step S1901, the currently received fluctuation start command is read, and information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time are identified from that command. Also, as already explained, when a fluctuation start command is sent from the main control unit 162, a type command is also sent. In step S1601, the type command received along with the currently received fluctuation start command is read, and various information related to the game result, such as information on the probability variable jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, information on the special miss result, information on the normal miss result, and information on reaching the ceiling, is identified from that command. Then, in step S1901, from the identified information, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the jackpot type if a jackpot has been won, information on the presence or absence of a special miss, information on the type of special miss if a special miss, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if a jackpot has not been won and there is no special miss, information on whether or not the ceiling has been reached, information on the fluctuation display time, etc. are identified, and the identified information is stored in a register of MPU 442.

In the following step S1902, it is determined whether the result of the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result, based on the information obtained in step S1901. If the current game result is a jackpot result (6R special jackpot result or 6R regular jackpot result), the jackpot effect setting process is executed in the following step S1903. The jackpot effect setting process is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the jackpot symbol combination to be stopped and the active line on which that symbol combination will be stopped, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the jackpot symbols.

In the stop result determination process for a jackpot, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the stop result where the same symbol combination is formed on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the following symbol combinations are defined as symbol combinations corresponding to a jackpot: "1", "1", "1" symbol combination, "2", "2", "2" symbol combination, "3", "3", "3" symbol combination, "4", "4", "4" symbol combination, "5", "5", "5" symbol combination, "6", "6", "6" symbol combination, "7", "7", "7", "7" symbol combination, "8", "8", "8" symbol combination, "9", "9", "9" symbol combination, and "9" symbol combination (see, for example, Figure 45(a)).

As already explained, when a jackpot result is reached, the result is notified via a reach display. The process for determining the variable display mode for a jackpot retrieves the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, and determines the presentation pattern for a normal reach display or super reach display that corresponds to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. Additionally, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If it is determined in step S1902 that the result is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1904. In step S1904, it is determined whether the ceiling will be reached in this game. If the ceiling will be reached, a positive determination is made in step S1904 and the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, the effect setting process for reaching the ceiling is executed. The effect setting process for reaching the ceiling is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination to be displayed as a stop symbol for reaching the ceiling and the active line on which that symbol combination will be displayed as a stop symbol, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the symbols to reach the ceiling.

In the process for determining the stop result for reaching the ceiling, a stop result in which a combination of symbols for reaching the ceiling is formed on one of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result for this game round. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the combination of "1", "3", and "4" symbols is defined as the symbol combination that corresponds to reaching the ceiling (see Figure 45 (b)).

When the ceiling is reached, the result is notified via a reach display. The process of determining the variable display mode for reaching the ceiling retrieves the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, and determines the presentation pattern for a normal reach display or super reach display that corresponds to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. Additionally, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot occurs in the game round where the ceiling is reached, the jackpot takes priority. In other words, the symbol combination and variable display mode that are displayed in that game round are set by the setting process in step S1903.

If a negative determination is made in step S1904, the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to a special miss. If a positive determination is made in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, the effect setting process for a special miss is executed. The effect setting process for a special miss is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination for a special miss to be stopped and the active line on which that symbol combination will be stopped, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the symbols for a special miss.

In the stop result determination process for special misses, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the stop result where a combination of symbols corresponding to a special miss is formed on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, just as when the ceiling is reached, the combination of "1", "3", and "4" symbols is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to a special miss (see Figure 45 (b)).

If a special miss occurs, the result is notified via a reach display. The process for determining the variable display mode for a special miss retrieves the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, and determines the presentation pattern for a normal reach display or super reach display that corresponds to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. Additionally, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1908, where the effect setting process for a complete miss is executed. In the effect setting process for a complete miss, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. If a reach will occur, the effect setting process for a reach occurrence is executed, and if a reach will not occur, the effect setting process for a reach not occurring is executed.

The effect setting process for reaching a win can be broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination to be displayed when a win is reached and a valid line on which that symbol combination will be displayed, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the symbol when a win is reached and a complete miss.

In the stop result determination process for reach-compatible complete misses, the stop symbols are determined so that they do not result in any of the symbol combinations corresponding to a jackpot result, a symbol combination corresponding to a special miss result, or a symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1-L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

The process for determining the variable display mode for reach-compatible complete misses retrieves the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, and determines the presentation pattern for normal reach display or super reach display that corresponds to the game result for the variable display time and type command of the currently received variation start command. In addition, the process executes a process for storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

The effect setting process for when a reach does not occur can be broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination to be displayed as a complete miss and not a reach and the effective line on which that symbol combination will be displayed as a complete miss, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the symbol for a complete miss and not a reach.

In the stop result determination process for non-reach complete misses, the stop symbols are determined so that they do not result in any of the symbol combinations corresponding to a jackpot result, special miss results, or ceiling hit results. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each active line L1-L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

The process for determining the variable display mode for a complete miss that does not correspond to a reach is to obtain the variable display pattern table for a miss that does not correspond to a reach stored in various table areas of ROM 443, and determine the presentation pattern that corresponds to the game result for the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

After executing any of steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908, the process proceeds to step S1909. In step S1909, commands containing information about the stop result and presentation pattern determined in steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908 are output to the display control device 410 as stop result commands and pattern commands, respectively. Based on the received stop result commands and pattern commands, the MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the display of the symbol display device 95 to execute presentations for the current game round.

After executing the processing of step S1909, the processing to start the effect for the game round is executed in the following step S1910, and then this fluctuation start processing is terminated. Specifically, drive control of the speaker unit 29 and lamp unit 26 is started based on the effect pattern determined in the above steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908, and the effect for the game round is started.

Here, we will provide additional explanation about the display mode of the patterns displayed on the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95, based on the schematic diagram in Figure 44.

(Display mode)
The variable display modes of the symbols executed in the variable display area ME of the display screen 95a are roughly divided into five types: non-reach miss, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. The variable display times for these variable display modes are set to be different, and it is possible to grasp an overview of the variable display mode for each game based on the information relating to the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162.

Specifically, the variable display time for a reach-incompatible miss is "1 sec to 14 sec" (the difference is set depending on the game status, number of reserved positions, etc.), the variable display time for normal reach A is "20 sec," the variable display time for normal reach B is "25 sec," which is longer than the variable display time for normal reach A, and the variable display time for super reach A to C is "30 sec," which is longer than the variable display time for normal reach A and B. For example, if the information regarding the variable display time provided in the command from the main control unit 162 is "20 sec," the notification/effect control unit 140 will understand that normal reach A should be executed, and if the information regarding the variable display time provided in the command from the main control unit 162 is "25 sec," the notification/effect control unit 140 will understand that normal reach B should be executed. On the other hand, if the information regarding the variable display time given in the command from the main control device 162 is "30 seconds," the decision as to which of Super Reach A to C to execute will be left to the notification and performance control device 140.

In this determination, in a play count corresponding to a jackpot, the order of likelihood of selection is Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A, and in a play count corresponding to a complete miss, the order of likelihood of selection is Super Reach A > Super Reach B > Super Reach C. In other words, in a play count corresponding to a jackpot result, the order of likelihood of selection is Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A, and in a play count corresponding to a miss, the order of likelihood of selection is Complete Miss > Normal Reach A > Normal Reach B > Super Reach A > Super Reach B > Super Reach C. In other words, the expectation of winning a jackpot is set to increase as the variable display time becomes longer, and the expectation is set to increase in the order of Super Reach A < Super Reach B < Super Reach C.

In addition, for play times that correspond to special misses, the order of likelihood of selection is Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A, and for play times that result in the ceiling being reached, the selection rates are equally divided so that Super Reach C = Super Reach B = Super Reach A.

Here, the variable display modes of normal reach A and B will be explained with reference to Figure 44(a). When normal reach A or B is selected, the variable display (scrolling display) of all symbol columns that are currently displayed is first initiated, followed by the end of the variable display of symbols in the upper symbol column (upper symbol column Z1) (a static display), and then the end of the variable display of symbols in the lower symbol column (lower symbol column Z3) (a static display). With the upper and lower symbol columns Z1 and Z3 thus displayed statically, a reach line is formed by the static display of a main symbol with the same number on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 (see Figure 13(a)). Then, with this reach line formed, the variable display of the middle symbol column (middle symbol column Z2) is initiated, resulting in a reach display (reach variable display). After the reach display is initiated, the variable display ends by the static display of middle symbol column Z2. When the same symbols as those making up the reach display stop on the reach line, it is announced that a jackpot has been won, and when other symbols stop on the reach line, it is announced that a jackpot has not been won. In this way, the final symbol combination displayed is maintained as is for a predetermined period of time. In other words, the current round of play continues until the stop display period has elapsed, and once that stop display period has elapsed, it is permitted to move on to the next round of play.

In this embodiment, the difference in variable display time between normal reach A and normal reach B is ensured by setting a difference in the variable display time of the middle symbol row Z2 after the reach line is formed, but the method for setting the difference between the two is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to ensure the difference in variable display time by setting a difference in the time from when the variable display begins to when the reach line is formed.

Next, we will explain the variable display modes of Super Reach A, B, and C, taking into account the variable display modes of Normal Reach A and B described above. As shown in Figures 44 (b) and (c), for Super Reach A, B, and C, the above-mentioned reach line is formed through the same process as for Normal Reach A and B. After the reach line is formed, a predetermined character is displayed as a moving image in conjunction with the variable display of middle symbol column Z2, thereby creating a reach effect. Specifically, for Super Reach A, after the reach line is formed, a character modeled after a fairy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of middle symbol column Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME). For Super Reach B, after the reach line is formed, a character modeled after a boy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of middle symbol column Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME). For Super Reach C, after the reach line is formed, a character modeled after a girl is displayed in the center of the variable display area of middle symbol column Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME).

Next, referring to Figure 46, we will explain the flow of gameplay when a special miss or reaching the ceiling triggers a transition to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A. Figure 46 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of gameplay when a special miss triggers a transition to the fourth normal game state.

At time ta1 during the first normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, the display of changing patterns in the operation port display unit and the display of changing patterns in the pattern display device 95 begin based on a win in the operation port. Since this game corresponds to a special miss for this round, the display of changing patterns transitions to a reach display at time ta2, a predetermined period of time after the display of changing patterns and patterns begins. Then, at time ta3, a static display (confirmed display) of the pattern combination corresponding to the special miss precedes the confirmed display of the pattern in the operation port display unit. Immediately thereafter, at time ta4, the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95 goes dark, and at time ta5, the static display of the pattern corresponding to the special miss is displayed in the operation port display unit, and a message indicating a transition to high frequency support mode A (for example, the words "Entering Chance Zone") is displayed on the display screen 95a.

At time ta6, which is the time the fixed display time has elapsed since time ta5, the support mode switches to high frequency support mode A, and the background of the display screen 95a switches to the background corresponding to high frequency support mode A. Furthermore, the number of remaining plays required to continue high frequency support mode A is displayed in the corner of the display screen 95a.

As mentioned above, the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss is displayed prior to the confirmed symbol display on the operating port display, and by buying time to provide a notification indicating a transition to High Frequency Support Mode A, the notification is less likely to be missed.

The game flow when the trigger for transitioning to high frequency support mode A is reaching the ceiling is basically the same as the game flow when the trigger for transitioning is a special miss. However, unlike in the case of a special miss, during the game state corresponding to high frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the display of the remaining number of plays on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is omitted.

(Game Overview)
Next, an overview of the game of this pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figures 47 and 48. Figure 47 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state, and Figure 48 is a timing chart showing an example of the change in the number of balls held as the game progresses.

As already explained, the first normal game state, in which the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is the most unfavorable game state for the player. In this first normal game state, the player aims to win a prize in the first actuation port 91 and transition to another game state, such as a special game state. As described above, the game board 80a shown in this embodiment is a so-called left-right symmetrical gauge (see Figure 6), and a prize can be won in the first actuation port 91 regardless of whether the game ball is fired toward the right or left route. In addition, a through gate 84 is provided on each of the right and left routes, and a portion of the game ball fired aiming at the first actuation port 91 can enter the through gate 84. However, if a support lottery based on a prize in the low-frequency support mode is won, the opening time of the electric device 93 is extremely short, making a prize in the second actuation port 92 virtually impossible. In other words, during the first normal game state, the player cannot receive any benefits from the electric device 93, and the number of balls in their possession decreases more quickly as the game progresses (see Figure 48).

As shown in Figure 47, if a 6R jackpot occurs in the first normal gaming state, the game will transition through a special gaming state to the second normal gaming state, which is compatible with the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B.

In the second normal game state, the electric device 93 opens frequently, and its opening time is set to a length that substantially allows a winning entry into the second actuation port 92. Therefore, in addition to a winning entry into the first actuation port 91, a winning entry into the second actuation port 92 occurs, and a predetermined number of prize balls (four in this embodiment) are awarded to the player based on the winning entry into the second actuation port 92. This reduces the loss of balls as the game progresses during the second normal game state compared to the first normal game state, allowing the player to play while minimizing investment (loss of balls). Furthermore, because the second normal game state continues until the next jackpot, successive transitions to the special game state can significantly increase the number of balls held. Furthermore, if a 6R jackpot occurs in the second normal game state, the game returns to the second normal game state via the special game state. In this way, looping between the second normal game state and the special game state significantly increases the number of balls held (see Figure 48).

If a 6R normal jackpot occurs in the first or second normal game state, the game will transition through a special game state and then to the third normal game state, which is compatible with low probability mode and high frequency support mode B.

In the third normal gaming state, the electric device 93 opens frequently, and its opening time is set to a length that substantially allows a winning entry into the second operating port 92. Therefore, in addition to a winning entry into the first operating port 91, a winning entry into the second operating port 92 occurs, and a predetermined number of prize balls (four in this embodiment) are awarded to the player based on the winning entry into the second operating port 92. As a result, during the third normal gaming state, the loss of balls is mitigated, just as in the second normal gaming state, making it possible to play while minimizing investment (loss of balls). However, a termination threshold number (upper limit: 40) is set for high frequency support mode B in the third normal gaming state. If the number of games executed during the third normal gaming state reaches this upper limit, the game will transition to the first normal gaming state.

Here, there is concern that staying in the first normal gaming state for a long time will lead to monotony in the game and reduce the player's motivation to play. In this regard, in this embodiment, if a special miss occurs during the first normal gaming state, the game will transition to the fourth normal gaming state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode A.

While the probability of a jackpot during the fourth normal gaming state is the same as in the first normal gaming state, the electric device 93 opens more frequently, resulting in more frequent winnings in the second operating port 92. As a result, during the fourth normal gaming state, the loss of balls is mitigated compared to the first normal gaming state, making it possible to play while minimizing investment (loss of balls) (see Figure 48). Also, in the fourth normal gaming state, as in the first normal gaming state, the variable display time for each game is significantly shortened as the number of reserved balls increases. Therefore, by transitioning to the fourth normal gaming state, winnings in the second operating port 92 occur more frequently, resulting in faster game progress.

Furthermore, if a special miss occurs during the first normal gaming state, the game will transition to the fourth normal gaming state without passing through the special gaming state. This minimizes the time required from when a special miss occurs until the player can enjoy the benefits of high-frequency support mode A. Realizing a configuration in this way that allows the player to enjoy the benefits of high-frequency support mode quickly is preferable in terms of minimizing the delay in state transitions and emphasizing the lightness of gameplay. Furthermore, diversifying transition patterns by configuring the game to allow transition to the high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) via two different routes, via a special gaming state and without passing through a special gaming state, is also preferable in terms of diversifying gameplay.

Here, in the first normal gaming state, the probability of winning a jackpot is low and the base is also low. This can lead to excessive investment in gameplay. This not only negatively impacts the player's impression of the gaming machine, but can also reduce the integrity of gameplay. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, a ceiling (maximum number of plays) is set for the first normal gaming state, and when this ceiling is reached, the game transitions to the fourth normal gaming state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A. In the fourth normal gaming state, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same as in the first normal gaming state, but the frequent opening of the electric device 93 results in more frequent winnings in the second operating port 92. This allows the player to play while minimizing the loss of balls (see Figure 48).

The first embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If a lottery based on balls entering the actuation ports 91, 92 results in a jackpot, the support mode changes via the special game state. If a special miss results, the support mode changes without going through the special game state. This configuration diversifies the game flow when changing to a higher support mode, helping to prevent gameplay from becoming monotonous. Furthermore, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, when switching to a higher support mode, the frequency with which the electric device 93 opens differs depending on whether the trigger is a jackpot or a special miss. By providing game assistance through high-frequency support mode A while maintaining the support advantage of high-frequency support mode B, game diversification can be optimally achieved. In particular, for the unfavorable high-frequency support mode B, the support mode is quickly switched without going through the special game state. This configuration is preferable for improving player satisfaction.

If a special miss occurs during the first normal game state, the game will transition to the fourth normal game state without passing through the special game state. At this time, the lottery mode will remain in low probability mode, but the support mode will change from low frequency support mode to high frequency support mode A. This makes it possible to aim for a jackpot result while keeping investments to a minimum, and a type of player rescue function will be implemented. Because this rescue function is implemented without passing through the special game state as described above, the time required for the function to be implemented can be minimized, making it less likely that the player will feel as if the game is being unnecessarily delayed.

As shown in this embodiment, when switching from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode B, the probability of winning the support lottery based on passing through the through gate 84 is changed, and when switching from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A, the winning probability remains unchanged, but the time required from winning to the electric role device 93 opening is shortened. In this way, by using different parameters to differentiate between high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B, the two high-frequency support modes can coexist favorably.

Compared to high frequency support mode A, high frequency support mode B has a higher ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired, i.e., the value obtained by dividing the number of game balls paid out by the number of game balls fired (hereinafter referred to as the base), making it possible to proceed with the game while minimizing the loss of balls in hand. In other words, if a jackpot is achieved and the game transitions to high frequency support mode B via a special game state, there is a chance to win a large number of balls. In contrast, in high frequency support mode A, while the base is more favorable than in low frequency support mode, the degree of this is kept lower than in high frequency support mode B, which prevents the rescue function from becoming excessive. With this configuration, the use of multiple support modes can add more variety to the game.

By setting an upper limit (termination threshold) on the number of times that high-frequency support mode A can be played, it becomes possible to return from high-frequency support mode A to low-frequency support mode, which effectively prevents a decrease in the sense of tension during play after switching to high-frequency support mode A.

In the third normal game state, which is entered upon a normal jackpot result, the reference number of times for terminating high-frequency support mode B is 40, and in the fourth normal game state, which is entered upon a special miss result, the reference number of times for terminating high-frequency support mode A is set to be equal to or less than the reference number of times for terminating high-frequency support mode B (specifically, 20 or 40). This is advantageous for increasing the frequency of transitions to the fourth normal game state and increasing the frequency of game state transitions. Furthermore, by setting a portion of the reference number of times for terminating set in the fourth normal game state, which is entered upon a special miss result, to the same number as the reference number of times for terminating high-frequency support mode B, it is possible to give the appearance that there are multiple transition routes to one game state (third normal game state, fourth normal game state). This is advantageous for realizing game diversification while avoiding it becoming a factor that causes player confusion.

In addition, a termination threshold number is set for each of the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state. Providing transition routes to limited advantageous states with upper limits on the number of plays via/not via special game states contributes to diversifying gameplay. In this configuration, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by configuring the base in high frequency support mode A so that the difference between the base in high frequency support mode B is smaller than the difference between the base in low frequency support mode.

According to this embodiment, if a special miss occurs in the first normal gaming state, or if the number of play times during the first normal gaming state reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game will transition to the fourth normal gaming state, which is compatible with high frequency support mode A. In this way, by setting the trigger for transition to the fourth normal gaming state to a judgment result that does not correspond to transition to a special gaming state or reaching the ceiling, and by providing relief to the player through the fourth normal gaming state, it is possible to contribute to curbing excessive investment. In particular, by setting the termination reference number, which is set in response to reaching the ceiling as a relatively high number and the termination reference number, which is set in response to a special miss result as a relatively low number, it is possible to effectively achieve diversification of games and strengthened relief functions.

<Modification 1>
The support mode of high frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special miss or reaching the ceiling, may be favored to be more advantageous to the player than the support mode of high frequency support mode B, which is triggered by a jackpot, i.e., to increase the frequency of winning into the second operating port 92.

<Modification 2>
The base (benefit) of high-frequency support mode A is set to be closer to the latter of the base (benefit) of low-frequency support mode and the base (benefit) of high-frequency support mode B, but this may be changed and set to be closer to the former. Also, the base (benefit) of high-frequency support mode A may be set to be intermediate between the base (benefit) of low-frequency support mode and the base (benefit) of high-frequency support mode B.

<Modification 3>
The variable display time set when the ceiling is reached during the first normal gaming state may be different from the variable display time set when a special miss occurs during the first normal gaming state. For example, a difference may be provided so that the variable display time set when the ceiling is reached during the first normal gaming state is longer than the variable display time set when a special miss occurs during the first normal gaming state, or a difference may be provided so that the variable display time set when the ceiling is reached during the first normal gaming state is shorter than the variable display time set when a special miss occurs during the first normal gaming state.

<Modification 4>
A difference may be provided between the support mode of high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss and the support mode of high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling. For example, a difference may be provided so that the support mode of high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss results in a higher winning frequency into the second actuation port 92 than the support mode of high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling, or a difference may be provided so that the support mode of high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss results in a lower winning frequency into the second actuation port 92 than the support mode of high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling.

<Modification 5>
The termination reference number set in the case of a special miss may be greater than the termination reference number set in the case of reaching the ceiling, or the termination reference numbers may be the same.

<Modification 6>
The configuration may be such that the number of games counter is reset (cleared to 0) when the high frequency support mode A, which is entered upon reaching the ceiling, ends.

<Modification 7>
It is also possible to configure the continuation count counter to be reset (overwritten) if another special miss occurs during high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss. However, it is expected that consecutive special misses will result in the number of times that high-frequency support mode A can actually be continued being less than the number of times that high-frequency support mode A could have been continued, which will reduce the player's satisfaction. Therefore, taking such circumstances into consideration, it is advisable to fix the value set in the continuation count counter to "40" when a special miss occurs during high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss. Specifically, it is advisable to unify the type of special miss to one type, and to set the continuation count counter to "40" when that special miss occurs.

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment, the value of the play count counter is reset (cleared to 0) in the transition process when the special game state ends, but the specific timing of the reset is arbitrary as long as the value of the play count counter is reset in response to a jackpot result. For example, it is also possible to reset the value of the play count counter when the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends, or to reset the value of the play count counter at the start of the special game state or during a round of play.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment, when the value of the play count counter reaches its upper limit (when the ceiling is reached) during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A, the value of the continuation count counter is overwritten with a value triggered by reaching the ceiling (specifically, "400"). When the ceiling is reached, the fourth normal game state is quickly transitioned to, triggered by reaching the ceiling, i.e., the benefit of reaching the ceiling is seamlessly realized without going through other normal game states. In other words, the fourth normal game state related to reaching the ceiling takes priority over the fourth normal game state related to a special miss. In this embodiment, the configuration related to the transition of game states when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state differs from that of the first embodiment. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 49(a), in high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special miss, the background color of the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95 is blue, while in high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the background color of the display screen 95a of the pattern display device 95 is green. In other words, the background color of the display screen 95a can clearly indicate the trigger for transitioning to high-frequency support mode A. In the following description, high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special miss, will be appropriately distinguished as "high-frequency support mode A1," and high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, will be appropriately distinguished as "high-frequency support mode A2." Incidentally, high-frequency support modes A1 and A2 have the same support features, and there is no difference in the base (the ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls fired), which is similar to the first embodiment.

Here, we will provide additional explanation of the flow of notification regarding the start of high frequency support mode A, with reference to the schematic diagrams in Figures 49(b) and (c).

In a game where a special miss occurs and the game transitions to high frequency support mode A1, the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss in that game is displayed as a stopped (confirmed) symbol on the display screen 95a, as shown in Figure 49(b). Specifically, after a reach display, a combination of "1", "3", and "4" symbols is displayed as a stopped (confirmed) symbol on one of the active lines. Then, with the start of the next game, the background color of the display screen 95a changes from white to blue, and the remaining number of games in high frequency support mode A1 is displayed in the corner of the display screen 95a.

In contrast, in a game that transitions to high frequency support mode A2 upon reaching the ceiling, as shown in FIG. 49(c), a symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling may be displayed as a stopped symbol (confirmed symbol) on the display screen 95a in that game. Specifically, if the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, a symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol (confirmed symbol) on one of the active lines via a reach display. In contrast, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to high frequency support mode A, a symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss is displayed as a stopped symbol (confirmed symbol) without a reach display. At this time, the background color of the display screen 95a also remains blue.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 50, we will explain the support mode switching process that constitutes the game play control process executed as part of normal processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162.

(Support mode switching process)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode B. If the determination in step S2001 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S2002. In step S2002, it is determined whether a count limit flag is stored in the various flags storage area 435 of RAM 404. If the determination in step S2002 is negative, the switching process ends. If the determination in step S2002 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1." In the following step S2004, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0." If the determination in step S2004 is negative, the switching process ends. If the determination in step S2004 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S2005, where the high-frequency support mode flag (more specifically, the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the number-limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are cleared, and the switching process is terminated. Clearing the high-frequency support mode flag switches the support mode from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S2001, if a negative determination is made in step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2006, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode A. If a positive determination is made in step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, the continuation count counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1." In the following step S2008, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0." If a positive determination is made in step S2008, the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag) and the number limit flag are cleared in step S2005, and the switching process ends. In other words, if the number of games played in high-frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the process switches to low-frequency support mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S2008, the process proceeds to step S2009, where it is determined whether the value of the number of plays counter has reached its upper limit (whether the ceiling has been reached). If a negative determination is made in step S2009, the switching process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2009, the process proceeds to step S2010, where a preparation flag is set in the various flags storage area 435 of RAM 404, and the switching process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S2006, if a negative determination is made in step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a special miss. If it corresponds to a special miss, a positive determination is made in step S2011 and the process proceeds to step S2012. In step S2012, a high frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. In the following step S2013, a count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in step S2014, the continuation count counter setting process is executed, and the switching process is terminated.

In the continuation counter setting process, if the current game result is a special miss A, the continuation counter is set to "20". This means that high-frequency support mode A1 will continue until 20 games have been played during that high-frequency support mode A1. On the other hand, if the current game result is a special miss B, the continuation counter is set to "40". This means that high-frequency support mode A1 will continue until 40 games have been played during that high-frequency support mode A1.

Returning to the explanation of step S2011, if a negative determination is made in step S2011, i.e., if the result does not correspond to a special miss, the process proceeds to step S2015. In step S2015, it is determined whether the above-mentioned preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If a positive determination is made in step S2015, the preparation flag is cleared in step S2016, and the processes of steps S2012 to S2014 are executed. Note that in this continuation counter setting process in step S2014, the continuation counter is set to "400". As a result, high frequency support mode A2 will continue until the number of games played during high frequency support mode A2 reaches 400.

Incidentally, if the special game mode is entered while the above preparation flag is still stored, the preparation flag will be cleared when the special game mode ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S2015, if a negative determination is made in step S2015, i.e., if a preparation flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, the process proceeds to step S2017. In step S2017, it is determined whether the value of the number of plays counter has reached its upper limit (whether it has reached the ceiling). If a negative determination is made in step S2017, the switching process ends. If a positive determination is made in step S2017, the processes of steps S2012 to S2014 are executed, and then the switching process ends. Note that in this continuation count counter setting process in step S2014, the continuation count counter is set to "400". As a result, high frequency support mode A2 will continue until the number of plays executed during high frequency support mode A2 reaches 400.

According to the configuration detailed above, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1, the game will transition to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2 after one play in the first normal gaming state. In other words, the game will return to the fourth normal gaming state after one play in the first normal gaming state. Here, if the one play increment is prolonged even though a return to the fourth normal gaming state has been confirmed, there is a concern that this may give the player the impression that the transition to an advantageous state is being unnecessarily delayed. Taking such circumstances into consideration, one of the features of this embodiment is that it incorporates measures to ensure a prompt return to the fourth normal gaming state. This measure will be described below with reference to Figures 51 to 54. First, the variable display time setting process (step S714 in Figure 26) executed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 51 and 52.

(Setting process for variable display time)
In the variable display time setting process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether the current gaming state is either the first normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state. If a positive determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102, where the setting process for the first and fourth normal gaming states is executed, and then the variable display time setting process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined in step S2103 whether the current gaming state is the second normal gaming state. If a positive determination is made in step S2103, the setting process for the second normal gaming state is executed in step S2104, and then the variable display time setting process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2103, i.e., if the current gaming state is the third normal gaming state, the setting process for the third normal gaming state is executed in step S2105, and then the variable display time setting process is terminated. Here, the setting process for the first and fourth normal gaming states will be described with reference to FIG. 52.

(Setting process for first and fourth normal gaming states)
In the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to a jackpot. If the determination in step S2201 is affirmative, the setting process for a jackpot is executed in step S2202, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated. In the process of step S2202, the variable display time table for a jackpot stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403 (see FIG. 28) is referenced to determine the variable display time for the current game round.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2203. In step S2203, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a special miss. If a positive judgment is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204, where the setting process for a special miss is executed, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated. In the process of step S2204, the variable display time table for a special miss (see Figure 27) stored in the variable display time table memory area 423 of ROM 403 is referenced to determine the variable display time for the current game round.

If a negative determination is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, it is determined whether the current game round will result in reaching the ceiling. If a positive determination is made in step S2205, the setting process for reaching the ceiling is executed in step S2206, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S2005, if a negative judgment is made in step S2005, the process proceeds to step S2207. In step S2207, it is determined whether a preparation flag is stored in the various flags storage area 435 of RAM 404. If a positive judgment is made in step S2207, a setting process for continuous transition is executed in step S2208, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal gaming states is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S2207, a setting process for complete failure is executed in step S2209, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal gaming states is terminated.

Here, for both steps S2206 and S2208, the variable display time table corresponding to the normal deviation is referenced, but this variable display time table is provided separately depending on whether or not the preparation flag is set. Below, we will provide additional explanation of these variable display time tables with reference to Figures 53 and 54.

If the ceiling is reached during the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode when the preparation flag is not set, the variable display time of the operation port display unit is set to "20 to 30 seconds" corresponding to the reach display. In other words, if the ceiling is reached during the first normal gaming state, the reach display will be followed by a symbol combination indicating the ceiling has been reached (see Figure 49 (c)), which will be displayed as a stopped symbol (confirmed symbol) on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95.

On the other hand, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A1 when the preparation flag is not stored, the variable display time for the actuation port display is set to the same variable display time as in the case of a complete miss (see Figure 27). Then, during this game, symbols other than those corresponding to reaching the ceiling, more specifically, symbol combinations corresponding to a complete miss, are displayed in a stopped state. In other words, the symbols displayed in a stopped state do not include the "CHANCE" symbol. This makes it difficult to tell from the symbol combination or the variable display time of the symbols (variable display mode) that the ceiling has been reached during the fourth normal game state.

When the game transitions to the first normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, while the preparation flag is stored, and the game result is neither a jackpot nor a special miss (a normal miss), the variable display time of the operation port display is set to "3 seconds." This variable display time matches the shortest variable display time that can be set for a game that results in a complete miss in the first normal game state (see Figure 27). In other words, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state and the preparation flag is stored, after the fourth normal game state ends, the game will return to the fourth normal game state via the first normal game state, but the time spent in this first normal game state is kept from being prolonged.

Note that during the fourth normal game state, a game may be repeated with the preparation flag stored. In such cases, the variable display time set will be the same as the variable display time set for a game when the preparation flag is not stored (see Figures 27 and 53).

(Continuous transition flow)
Next, referring to the timing chart of Figure 55, we will explain the behavior when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A1.

At timing tb1 after the transition to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by a special miss, the 299th game turn has begun since the end of the special gaming state. In the fourth normal gaming state triggered by a special miss, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is blue.

At the next timing tb2, the 300th play after the end of the special play state begins, and at timing tb3, the symbol combination corresponding to the 300th play is displayed as confirmed. Since the fourth normal play state is currently in, the symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss (normal miss) is displayed as stopped (confirmed) rather than the symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling. In the example shown in Figure 55, the play that began at timing tb2 has not yet reached the termination reference number (upper limit) for the fourth normal play state, so the fourth normal play state continues and the preparation flag is set.

The game play that started at timing tb4 does not reach the termination reference number (upper limit), so the blue background described above is maintained. However, after the fourth normal game state ends, a message (the word "STANDBY") indicating a return to the fourth normal game state is displayed at the top of the display screen 95a, and the counter indicating the remaining number of plays is hidden.

At time tb5, the final game round in the fourth normal game state, in which the reference number of times for ending the game has been reached, begins. In the example shown in FIG. 55, this game round corresponds to a complete miss (normal miss). At time tb6, when the final display of the images and symbols is complete, the fourth normal game state transitions to the first normal game state, and a new game round begins. Although this game round corresponds to the first normal game state, the background color of the display screen 95a remains blue, and the word "STANDBY" displayed at the top of the display screen 95a also remains displayed. At time tb7, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the display screen 95a goes black. Then, at time tb8, when the final display begins, a symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling is displayed (reduced) in the upper corner of the display screen 95a, and the words "Entering the Super Chance Zone" are displayed in the center of the display screen 95a as a message indicating the transition to the fourth normal game state upon reaching the ceiling.

At timing tb9, after the confirmation display time has elapsed, the game state transitions from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A2. Accordingly, the background color of the display screen 95a changes from blue to green.

According to the second embodiment described above, even if gameplay continues without a transition trigger to the special game state (jackpot result) being established, a transition to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A may occur due to a special miss result or reaching the ceiling. Entering high-frequency support mode A increases the frequency of winnings in the second actuation port 92, thereby reducing investment. This configuration is preferable for improving the soundness of gameplay. However, if a special miss result and reaching the ceiling are used in combination as a transition trigger to the fourth normal game state as described above, the following concern arises. That is, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state and the ceiling is invalidated, or if the fourth normal game state is forcibly terminated due to a special miss result, some of the benefits that the player would have enjoyed would be lost, and there is a concern that player satisfaction would be significantly reduced. In this regard, in this embodiment, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state, the transition to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by the ceiling being reached is delayed until at least the number of plays in the fourth normal gaming state reaches the termination reference number. This alleviates the above concerns and contributes to improving player satisfaction.

As described above, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state and a transition to the fourth normal gaming state is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the behavior (switching mode) of the electric device 93 is made uniform, thereby preventing the benefit of reaching the ceiling from being inferior to the previous behavior.

When the above delay function is included, it is expected that if the benefit of reaching the ceiling ends immediately after a large delay, this could be a factor that discourages players from playing. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by setting the termination reference number for special miss results < the second termination reference number for reaching the ceiling, excessive delays can be suppressed and the impression that the benefit after reaching the ceiling is stale can be prevented.

If the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state, the game will transition from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state and then return to the fourth normal gaming state. This adds an accent to the rhythm of the game and helps prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In a configuration in which the game returns to the fourth normal game state via the first normal game state, variations in the operation period of the game-cycle operation executed during the first normal game state can cause the following inconveniences. That is, if the operation period is relatively short, there will be insufficient time to notify the player of the transition to the fourth normal game state, and if the operation period is relatively long, the player may be more likely to get the impression that the transition to the fourth normal game state is being unduly delayed. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, for game cycles during the first normal game state in which the transition to the fourth normal game state is delayed, a predetermined operation period is set regardless of the number of reserved balls, making the operation period constant, thereby eliminating the above concerns.

As shown in this embodiment, if a jackpot occurs while a transition to the fourth normal gaming state is pending due to reaching the ceiling, the transition to the fourth normal gaming state due to reaching the ceiling is invalidated. This type of configuration is preferable in preventing excessive use of the player's rescue function.

If the maximum number of plays is reached (the ceiling is reached) during the first gaming state, a special effect (a static display of a combination of "3", "1", and "4" symbols) is executed in that gaming round, prompting notification that the game will transition to the fourth normal gaming state. In contrast, if the maximum number of plays is reached (the ceiling is reached) during the fourth normal gaming state, the special effect (a static display of a combination of "3", "1", and "4" symbols) is avoided for that gaming round. In this way, by deliberately not executing a special effect when the transition to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling is delayed, it is possible to prevent a decline in attention to the fourth normal gaming state, which was triggered by a special miss result, before the end of the fourth normal gaming state.

<Modification 1>
In the second embodiment, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode A1, the game transitions to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode A2 via the first normal gaming state. In other words, the fourth normal gaming state is continuous, with one game play corresponding to the first normal gaming state sandwiched between them. This is not limited to this, and the following modifications may be made. That is, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode A1, the game transitions immediately to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode A2 after the end of the fourth normal gaming state without passing through the first normal gaming state. In other words, the fourth normal gaming state may be configured to continue without interruption. Even in this case, the high-frequency support mode A1 triggered by a special miss is not forcibly terminated midway (the high-frequency support mode A1 can be completed), so the player's satisfaction level does not decrease.

<Modification 2>
In the second embodiment, the background color of the display screen 95a is different between the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1 and the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to use the same background color in both fourth normal gaming states.

<Modification 3>
In the second embodiment described above, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1, a message suggesting that the fourth normal game state will continue in the next game round is displayed. However, instead of this, it is also possible to configure the display of the message to start in the game round in which the ceiling is reached. Also, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which a message suggesting that the fourth normal game state will continue from the game round in which the ceiling is reached or the next game round, it is also possible to configure the display not to suggest that the fourth normal game state will continue. In other words, it is also possible to not indicate whether or not a transition to the fourth normal game state will occur when the ceiling is reached until the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss ends.

<Modification 4>
When the state transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state while the electric device 93 is in the open state, the electric device 93 may be configured to be switched to the closed state after the opening time of the electric device 93 that was initially set has elapsed, or the electric device 93 may be configured to be quickly switched to the closed state to immediately stop the opening.

<Modification 5>
In the second embodiment described above, when transitioning from the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode A1 to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode A2 via the first normal gaming state, the display time for the varying patterns of the operation port display unit and the pattern display device 95 in the first normal gaming state is set to a time shorter than the display time for the varying patterns of the through gate display unit DS set in the low-frequency support mode (10 to 20 seconds), but this is not limited to this. When transitioning from the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode A1 to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode A2 via the first normal gaming state, the display time for the varying patterns of the operation port display unit and the pattern display device 95 in the first normal gaming state can also be set to a time longer than the display time for the varying patterns of the through gate display unit DS set in the low-frequency support mode (10 to 20 seconds).

<Modification 6>
In the second embodiment, when transitioning from the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1 to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2 via the first normal gaming state, the variable display time of the symbols on the actuation port display unit and the symbol display device 95 in the first normal gaming state is set to "3 seconds," which is the variable display time corresponding to a complete miss, but this is not limited to this. For example, when transitioning from the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1 to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2 via the first normal gaming state, the variable display time of the symbols on the actuation port display unit and the symbol display device 95 in the first normal gaming state can also be set to "30 to 40 seconds," which is the variable display time corresponding to a reach display.

<Modification 7>
In the second embodiment, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state, if the number of times that games are played in the fourth normal gaming state reaches the termination reference number, the game transitions to the first normal gaming state once, and then returns to the fourth normal gaming state. In this case, the number of times that games are played during the first normal gaming state is set to one, but this is not limited to this. It is sufficient that the number of times that games are played during the first gaming state is set so that it is at least equal to or less than the upper limit of the number of reserved games that can be stored (preferably the upper limit of the number of reserved games related to the second actuation port 92).

As shown in this modified example, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the game transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state and then returns to the fourth normal game state. This adds an accent to the rhythm of the game and helps prevent the game from becoming monotonous. Furthermore, in a configuration that involves the first normal game state, repeated rounds of play in the first normal game state are likely to give the player the impression that their enjoyment of benefits is being unduly delayed. This impression is particularly likely to be reinforced when the number of stored special information items becomes zero due to the inclusion of the first normal game state, interrupting the continuous progression of game rounds. In this regard, by limiting the number of rounds of play in the intervening first normal game state to be less than the upper limit of the special information storage capacity, it is possible to avoid interruptions in the continuous progression of game rounds when returning to the fourth normal game state and effectively alleviate the above-mentioned concerns.

<Modification 8>
A special effect execution means may be provided which is capable of executing a special effect indicating a transition to a fourth normal game state when the number of game turns executed after the special game state has ended reaches an upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 turns) without resulting in a jackpot; if the upper limit is reached during the fourth normal game state and the number of game turns executed during the fourth normal game state is more than a predetermined number, the special effect is executed in the game turn in which the upper limit is reached; on the other hand, if the upper limit is reached during the fourth normal game state and the number of game turns executed during the fourth normal game state is less than the predetermined number, the special effect is executed in a game turn executed after the game turn in which the upper limit is reached.

If the maximum number of plays (reaching the ceiling) is reached during the fourth normal game state, which is triggered by a special miss result, the player's impression may differ depending on the timing. For example, if the ceiling is reached immediately after the transition, the player may feel that the special miss result was a wasted draw. Therefore, as shown in this modified example, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the above concerns can be alleviated by varying the timing of the special effect occurrence, i.e., the timing of the notification that the ceiling has been reached, depending on the number of play times during the fourth normal game state (the number of play times executed up to that point).

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, the gameplay using the special miss described above differs from the first and second embodiments. The following describes the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, differences in the basic configuration of the game board unit will be described with reference to Figure 56. Figure 56 is a front view of the game board unit.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a left-right symmetrical gauge (see FIG. 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) is a left-right asymmetrical gauge. The game board 80aA will be described in detail below.

The gaming board 80aA has multiple large and small openings that run through it in its thickness direction (front-to-back direction). Each opening is equipped with a general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83A, a through gate 84A, etc. When gaming balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating opening unit 82A, or the variable winning device 83A, they are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided corresponding to each winning section, and based on the detection results, the player is awarded a prize such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of gaming balls). In addition, an outlet 86 is provided at the bottom of the gaming board 80aA, and gaming balls that do not enter the various winning sections are discharged from the gaming area PE through the outlet 86.

In addition, numerous game pins 87 are planted on the game board 80aA to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills are also arranged. These game pins 87, windmills, and other components differentiate the flow path of the game balls, and are adjusted so that winning the above-mentioned general winning slot 81, etc. occurs with an appropriate probability.

Like the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, the operating port unit 82A is composed of a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A arranged directly below the first operating port 91A. In particular, the second operating port 92A is equipped with an electric device 93A that serves as an opening/closing type ball-scoring assistance device (ball-scoring assistance means) or opening/closing member (opening/closing means).

A center frame 96A is provided on the gaming board 80aA, surrounding the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the gaming board 80aA, and similar to the first embodiment described above, the center frame 96A broadly divides the flow path of gaming balls flowing down the gaming area PE into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that bypasses it from the left side.

However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first actuation port 91A, second actuation port 92A, variable entry device 83A, and through gate 84A has been changed so that game balls launched down the left route can enter the first actuation port 91A and second actuation port 92A but cannot enter the variable entry device 83A or through gate 84A, and game balls launched down the right route can enter the second actuation port 92A, through gate 84A, and variable entry device 83A but cannot enter the first actuation port 91A. It is also possible to configure the system so that game balls launched down the left route cannot enter the second actuation port 92A.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right and left routes depending on the game situation, it is possible to advance the game to an advantage. By encouraging such technical intervention, monotony in the game is prevented.

(Reserved ball storage area)
In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration for storing the reserved information based on winnings in the actuation ports 91A and 92A is different from that in the first embodiment. Below, the configuration for storing the reserved information in this embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 57.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment has a first actuation port reserve area Ra that stores the values of the win random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a win occurs in the first actuation port 91A, and a second actuation port reserve area Rb that stores the values of the win random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a win occurs in the second actuation port 92A.

The first actuation port holding area Ra is made up of areas 1 to 4, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the first actuation port 91A, the numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of area 1 → area 2 → area 3 → area 4. The second actuation port holding area Rb is made up of areas 1 to 4, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the second actuation port 92A, the numerical information (hold information) is stored in chronological order in the order of area 1 → area 2 → area 3 → area 4.

In this embodiment, if reserved information is stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb, the reserved information stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb (more specifically, the first area) is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. If reserved information is not stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb but reserved information is stored in the first actuation port reserve area Ra, the reserved information stored in the first actuation port reserve area Ra (more specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, a special loss can occur in either the lottery based on winning the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92. However, in this embodiment, a special loss can occur in only one of the lotteries based on winning the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92, which is different from the first embodiment. Below, the win/loss table for the actuation port in this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figures 58 and 59.

(Actuator port pass/fail table)
As shown in Figure 58, the hit/fail table for the first operating port is set to a hit/fail table for low probability mode (a group of hit/fail information for low probability) and a hit/fail table for high probability mode (a group of hit/fail information for high probability).

When the low-probability mode hit/miss table (Figure 58(a)) is referenced in the lottery based on the winning of the first actuation port 91A, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are six: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, of the hit random number counter C1 values from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, when the high-probability mode hit/miss table (Figure 58(b)) is referenced in the lottery, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107", ... "597". In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values from 0 to 599, "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107", ... "597" correspond to a jackpot result. All random number values that do not correspond to a jackpot correspond to a losing result (a normal losing result). In other words, in a lottery based on winning through the first actuation port 91A, the "special losing" shown in the first embodiment does not occur.

As shown in Figure 59, the hit/fail table for the second operating port is set to a hit/fail table for low probability mode (a group of hit/fail information for low probability) and a hit/fail table for high probability mode (a group of hit/fail information for high probability).

When the low-probability mode hit/miss table (Figure 59(a)) is referenced in the lottery based on the entry into the second actuation port 92A, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are six: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, of the hit random number counter C1 values from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, when the high-probability mode hit/miss table (Figure 59(b)) is referenced in the lottery, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107", ... "597". In other words, out of the values of the winning random number counter C1 ranging from "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107", ... "597" correspond to jackpot results.

Furthermore, in a situation where the low probability mode win/lose table and the high probability mode win/lose table are referenced when drawing a lottery based on a win at the second operating port 92A, the random number values that result in a special miss (i.e., special miss information) are all "2", "4", "6", "12", "14", ... "596", a total of 150. In other words, of the values of the win random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "2", "4", "6", "12", "14", ... "596" correspond to special miss results. Furthermore, all random number values that do not correspond to either a jackpot or a special miss correspond to miss results (normal miss results).

(Game flow)
Here, the game flow will be explained with reference to Fig. 60. Fig. 60 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state.

The first normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, is composed of a main stage and a special stage (mission stage). The main stage is the stage where the player stays when a game round based on a win at the first actuation port 91A is executed, and the special stage is the stage where the player stays when a game round based on a win at the second actuation port 92A is executed.

The special stage is a stage that the player temporarily stays in when transitioning from another normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, specifically the third normal game state corresponding to the low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode B, or the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode A, to the first normal game state, and the upper limit of the number of play times that can be executed matches the upper limit of the number of reserved information stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb. In other words, immediately after transitioning from the third normal game state or the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the player will transition to the special stage provided that reserved information related to the second actuation port 92A is stored. If there is no jackpot or special miss in this special stage, the player will transition from the special stage to the main stage.

As described above, the first normal gaming state corresponds to the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, even if a gaming ball is fired down the right route and a support win occurs, it will essentially be prevented from entering the second actuation port 92A. Furthermore, since gaming balls fired down the right route cannot enter the first actuation port 91A, it will be difficult to participate in a lottery based on winning through actuation ports 91A and 92A. On the other hand, gaming balls fired down the left route will be prevented from entering the second actuation port 92A, but may enter the first actuation port 91A. For these reasons, in the first normal gaming state, the game can be played in a way that gives the player an advantage by aiming for the left route rather than the right route. If a gaming ball is fired down the right route during the first gaming state, a warning is issued urging the player to return the launch destination to the left route.

If a 6R jackpot is drawn during the first normal game state, the game will transition through a special game state to the second normal game state, which corresponds to a high probability mode and high frequency support mode B. The second normal game state corresponds to high frequency support mode B, and by firing game balls along the right route, the player can play while minimizing investment (loss of balls). During the second normal game state, game balls fired along the right route enter the second actuation port 92A, and gameplay progresses mainly around the play times related to the second actuation port 92A. As described above, in the lottery based on a ball entering the second actuation port 92A, there is approximately a 1/4 probability of a special miss, but a special miss during the second normal game state is invalid and treated as a normal miss. In other words, even if a special miss occurs during the second normal game state, the special miss will not trigger a transition to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to a low probability mode and high frequency support mode A.

If a 6R normal jackpot is achieved in the lottery during the first normal game state or the second normal game state, the game will transition through a special game state to the third normal game state, which is a low probability mode and corresponds to high frequency support mode B. The third normal game state corresponds to high frequency support mode B, and by firing game balls along the right route, the player can play while minimizing investment (loss of balls in hand).

During the third normal gaming state, a gaming ball launched along the right route will enter the second actuation port 92A, and the game will progress mainly around the play times related to the second actuation port 92A. As mentioned above, in the lottery based on the entry into the second actuation port 92A, there is approximately a 1/4 probability of a special miss, but a special miss during the third normal gaming state is invalid and treated as a normal miss. In other words, even if a special miss occurs during the third normal gaming state, the special miss will not trigger a transition to the fourth normal gaming state, which is a low probability mode and corresponds to high frequency support mode A.

If play progresses without a jackpot during the third normal game state and the number of plays executed (more specifically, the number of plays related to the second actuation port 92A) reaches the reference number of times to end (20 plays), the game will transition to the first normal game state. More specifically, if the number of reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A is "0", the game will transition to the main stage, and if the number of reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A is other than "0", the game will transition to the special stage.

In the special stage, a lottery based on winning the second actuation port 92A is held for the number of reserved balls. If the lottery based on winning the second actuation port 92A results in a special miss, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A. During the fourth normal game state, the player can play while minimizing investment (loss of balls) by firing game balls along the right route. During the fourth normal game state, game balls fired along the right route will enter the second actuation port 92A, and gameplay progresses mainly with play times related to the second actuation port 92A. As described above, there is approximately a 1/4 probability of a special miss in the lottery based on winning the second actuation port 92A, but special misses during the fourth normal game state are invalid and treated as normal misses.

If play progresses without a jackpot during the fourth normal game state and the number of plays executed (more specifically, the number of plays related to the second actuation port 92A) reaches the reference number of plays to end (20 plays), the game will transition to the first normal game state. More specifically, if the number of reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A is "0", the game will transition to the main stage, and if the number of reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A is other than "0", the game will transition to the special stage. In this way, if the fourth normal game state and the special stage can be looped, the player can progress through the game to an advantage.

When transitioning from the third or fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the degree of advantage will vary greatly depending on the number of reserved balls associated with the second actuation port 92A. In this embodiment, by making the display time of the changing image in the second actuation port display section D2 longer during the final play in the third or fourth normal gaming state than during other play in the third or fourth normal gaming state, a configuration is realized that makes it easier to accumulate reserved balls associated with the second actuation port 92A up to the upper limit during that final play.

(Fluctuation display time table for operating ports)
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61(a), the variable display time table for the second actuation port referenced in the 20th play in the third normal game state is configured to set the variable display time to "40 seconds" regardless of the number of reserved balls. In contrast, the variable display time table for the second actuation port referenced in each of the 1st to 19th play in the third normal game state is configured to set a shorter variable display time than that of the 20th play in any case. For example, as shown in FIG. 61(b), in the case of a miss that does not correspond to the reach display (a special miss or a normal miss), "12 to 14 seconds" or "1 to 2 seconds" is set depending on the number of reserved balls, and in the case of a miss that does not correspond to the reach display (a special miss or a normal miss), "20 to 30 seconds" is set. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, "20 to 30 seconds" is set regardless of the number of reserved balls, as shown in FIG. 61(c).

In this way, by configuring the variable display time to be extended in the 20th and final game play compared to the first through 19th game plays, it is possible to reduce the chances of transitioning (demotion) from the third normal game state to the first normal game state without the reserved number related to the second actuation port 92A reaching the storage upper limit.

The variable display time table for the second operating port referenced during the first normal game state is broadly divided into a variable display time table referenced in the event of a special miss or normal miss, and a variable display time table referenced in the event of a jackpot. In the variable display time table for special misses and normal misses referenced during the first normal game state, the variable display time is set to "10 seconds" when the number of reserved balls is "0," and to "0.5 seconds" when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "4." In the variable display time table for jackpots referenced during the first normal game state, the variable display time is set to "20 to 30 seconds" for all play times, regardless of the number of reserved balls or game results.

Next, referring to Figure 62, the flow of presentation when transitioning to the fourth normal gaming state will be explained. Figure 62 illustrates an example in which the termination reference number of times is reached without a jackpot during the third normal gaming state, and the remaining reserve related to the second actuation port 92A includes a special miss.

In the third normal game state, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 turns blue, and the number of remaining games until the high frequency support mode continues is displayed in the upper corner of the display screen 95a. At time tc1, when the 19th game involving the second actuation port 92A begins, the number of reserved balls decreases from "4" to "3," and at time tc2, when the 20th game (final game) begins, the number of reserved balls decreases from "3" to "2."

When the final play begins, a video with a loop branching effect is displayed on the display screen 95a. At the beginning of this video, "Mission: Catch the Fairy" is displayed, and then a fairy character and a girl character are displayed on the display screen. As described above, the variable display time for the final play is longer than the variable display times for play times 1 through 19. This makes it easier for a winning combination to occur in the second actuation port 92A during the final play. In the example of Figure 62, winning combinations occur consecutively in the second actuation port 92A at times tc3 and tc4, and the number of reserved combinations related to the second actuation port 92A reaches the upper limit of storage before the end of the final play.

The loop branching effect in this embodiment is a series of effects that are executed across the final play in the third normal play state and the play times executed during the special stage in the first normal play state. If the final play time corresponds to a jackpot, and if the play times executed during the special stage correspond to a special miss or a jackpot, an effect of successfully capturing a fairy is executed. If the final play time corresponds to a special miss or a normal miss and all play times executed during the special stage correspond to normal misses, an effect of failing to capture a fairy is executed.

In the example shown in Figure 62, in the final play in the third normal game state, an effect is executed in which the fairy is successfully captured at timing tc5 when the image on the second operating port display section D2 is confirmed, and thereafter the word "STANDBY" is displayed on the display screen 95a as a message indicating a transition to a normal game state compatible with the high frequency support mode (fourth normal game state) until the special stage is completed. During this time, the game state transitions from the third normal game state to the first normal game state.

If the electric device 93A is in the open state when transitioning from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the electric device 93A will be forcibly switched to the closed state, preventing a winning entry into the second operating port 92A after transitioning to the first normal gaming state.

At timing tc7, the game round corresponding to the special miss begins, and at timing tc8, the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss is displayed as confirmed. Then, at timing tc9, the first normal game state transitions to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high frequency support mode A. In this fourth normal game state, the background color of the display screen 95a turns blue, and the number of loops in the high frequency support mode and the number of remaining games are displayed at the top of the display screen 95a.

If the final play in the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A is reached without a jackpot, the game will transition to the first normal game state corresponding to low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode. More specifically, the game will transition to the special stage on the condition that a hold related to second actuation port 92A is stored. Even when transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the above-mentioned loop branching effect (more specifically, a video in which part of the chase between the fairy and the girl is omitted) will be executed across the final play in the fourth normal game state and each play executed in the special stage of the first normal game state.

According to the third embodiment described above, if a normal jackpot is achieved in the first normal gaming state, the game transitions through the special gaming state to the third normal gaming state, which is a low-probability mode and corresponds to high-frequency support mode B. In the third normal gaming state, the electric device 93A frequently switches to the open state, increasing the chances of winning through the second operating port 92A and suppressing the loss of balls. A limit is placed on the number of times the third normal gaming state can be played, and when the number of times the game has been played in the third normal gaming state reaches the first termination reference number (20 times), the game transitions to the first normal gaming state, which corresponds to the low-frequency support mode. This makes it more difficult to win through the second operating port 92A.

Here, the reserved information obtained based on a winning entry into the second actuation port 92A is stored in the second actuation port reserved area Rb, and after transitioning from the third normal game state to the first normal game state, game turns are executed based on this stored reserved information. The remaining game turns related to the second actuation port 92A may result in a special miss. If a special miss occurs in one of these remaining game turns, the game will transition to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A, without passing through the special game state, and the high frequency switching mode will be looped. This loop makes it possible to aim for a jackpot while minimizing the loss of balls. By realizing game diversification in this way, it can contribute to increasing attention to the game.

As described above, when transitioning from the third or fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, game turns related to the second actuation port 92A are executed up to the number of reserved information stored in the second actuation port reserved area Rb. In the lottery based on winning at the second actuation port 92A, the probability of a special miss result (1/4) is higher than the probability of a jackpot result (1/100), making it possible to aim for a jackpot by looping through the high-frequency support mode. This configuration contributes to increased interest in the game without unnecessarily increasing the probability of a jackpot result.

If a special miss occurs during the third normal game state or the fourth normal game state, that result is invalidated. On the other hand, if a special miss occurs during the remaining play times related to the second actuation port 92A when transitioning from the third normal game state or the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, that special miss will trigger a transition to the fourth normal game state or a loop of the fourth normal game state. With this configuration, whether or not a loop occurs depends on the upper limit of the number of reserved information items that can be stored related to the second actuation port 92A. Therefore, when adjusting the degree of advantage by increasing or decreasing the termination threshold number in the third normal game state or the fourth normal game state, the effect on the loop probability can be avoided, and the degree of freedom in setting the termination threshold number can be suitably improved.

The opening and closing mode of the electric role device 93A in high-frequency support mode A is closer to the opening and closing mode of the electric role device 93A in high-frequency support mode B than to the opening and closing mode of the electric role device 93A in low-frequency support mode. This configuration is preferable in that it encourages the player to recognize that the game states before and after the first normal game state are the same when the third normal game state is changed to the first normal game state and then to the fourth normal game state. In particular, the reference number of times for ending the fourth normal game state (20 times) is the same as the reference number of times for ending the third normal game state (20 times). This configuration can effectively encourage the player to recognize this.

Immediately after transitioning from the third or fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the remaining reserved play times related to the second actuation port 92A are executed. If a special miss occurs in these play times, the game will transition from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state. As shown in this embodiment, in the third and fourth normal gaming states, it is determined in advance whether or not the remaining reserved play times will result in a special miss, and a continuation presentation is performed based on that result, thereby increasing attention to whether or not the above-mentioned loop will occur.

The above-mentioned advance specification (pre-specification) is performed in the final play in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state when transitioning from the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state. In this way, if the specification is performed in the final play in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the continuation effect will be executed when the number of reserved information stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb has reached the storage limit, and the function of suggesting the continuation of the above-mentioned loop can be effectively exerted by the continuation effect.

Furthermore, by configuring the continuation effect to start before the above-mentioned pre-specified time in the final play of the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, restrictions on the execution period of the continuation effect can be relaxed, and the continuation effect can be prevented from becoming stale.

<Modification 1>
In the third embodiment, when a special miss occurs in a certain game state (for example, the second normal game state, etc.), the special miss is invalidated and treated as a normal miss, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the game so that the lottery for the special miss is not conducted by referring to a win/loss table that does not include special misses in the game results.

<Modification 2>
In the third embodiment described above, the standard number of times to end the third game state (20 times) is the same as the standard number of times to end the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss (20 times), but this is not limited to this, and the standard number of times to end the third game state and the standard number of times to end the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss may be configured to be different.

For example, a difference may be set so that the reference number of times to end the third gaming state (40 times) is greater than the reference number of times to end the fourth normal gaming state (20 times) triggered by a special miss, or a difference may be set so that the reference number of times to end the third gaming state (20 times) is less than the reference number of times to end the fourth normal gaming state (40 times) triggered by a special miss.

<Modification 3>
In the third embodiment, the variable display time of the number of games played related to the second actuation port 92A in the first normal gaming state is set to "0.5 seconds" regardless of the number of reserved games or the game result, but this is not limited to this. The variable display time of the number of games played related to the second actuation port 92A in the first normal gaming state may also be set according to the number of reserved games and the game result, similar to the variable display time of the number of games played related to the first actuation port 91A.

<Modification 4>
In the third embodiment described above, the display time for the variation of the final game turn in the third normal game state is extended to prevent the reserved number related to the second actuation port 92A from falling below the upper limit when transitioning to the first normal game state, but instead of or in addition to this, the following configuration is also possible: That is, when transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the display time for the variation of the final game turn in the fourth normal game state is extended to prevent the reserved number related to the second actuation port 92A from falling below the upper limit when transitioning to the first normal game state.

<Modification 5>
In the third embodiment, the loop branching effect is configured to be executed across the third normal gaming state corresponding to high frequency support mode B and the first normal gaming state, but it is also possible to configure the loop branching effect to be executed across the third normal gaming state corresponding to high frequency support mode B, the first normal gaming state, and the third normal gaming state corresponding to high frequency support mode A. By gaining the effect execution time in this way, it is possible to quickly transition to the third normal gaming state corresponding to high frequency support mode A while enhancing the loop branching effect.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when the number of games played at the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) (when the ceiling is reached), the game state transitions to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the ceiling is pseudo-variable. The following describes the configuration related to the pseudo-variable function in this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, with reference to Figure 63, the allocation table for special misses in this embodiment will be described.

(Special miss sorting table)
In the allocation table for special losses in this embodiment, the allocation destinations of game results are set to special loss result A, special loss result B, and special loss result C. Specifically, of the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29,""0 to 23" correspond to special loss result A, "24 to 28" correspond to special loss result B, and "29" corresponds to special loss result C.

None of Special Miss Results A through C trigger a change to Lottery Mode, but rather function as a change to Support Mode.

Specifically, special miss result A triggers the support mode to switch to high-frequency support mode A after the end of the game that resulted in special miss result A, i.e., the transition to the fourth normal game state. This high-frequency support mode A ends when the number of games played during high-frequency support mode A reaches the termination reference number, or when a jackpot result occurs before the termination reference number is reached (more specifically, when a transition to the special game state occurs), and the mode switches to low-frequency support mode (transition to the first normal game state). In this embodiment, the termination reference number is set to "20 times."

Special miss result B also triggers the support mode to switch to high-frequency support mode A after the end of the play that resulted in special miss result B, i.e., the transition to the fourth normal play state. This high-frequency support mode A ends when the number of plays executed during high-frequency support mode A reaches the termination reference number, or when a jackpot result occurs before the termination reference number is reached (more specifically, when a transition to the special play state occurs), and the mode switches to low-frequency support mode (transition to the first normal play state). In this embodiment, the termination reference number is set to "40 times."

Special miss result C also triggers the support mode to switch to high-frequency support mode A after the end of the play that resulted in special miss result C, i.e., the transition to the fourth normal play state. This high-frequency support mode A ends when the number of plays executed during high-frequency support mode A reaches the termination reference number, or when a jackpot result occurs before the termination reference number is reached (more specifically, when a transition to the special play state occurs), and the mode switches to low-frequency support mode (transition to the first normal play state). In this embodiment, the termination reference number is set to "260 plays."

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the ceiling is 300 times, and the upper limit of the number of plays in the third normal game state is 40 times. In other words, the termination reference number set for special miss result A and the termination reference number set for special miss result B are both less than the maximum number of plays that can be played in the first normal game state before the ceiling is reached, whereas the termination reference number set for special miss result C is the same as the maximum number of plays that can be played in the first normal game state before the ceiling is reached.

The reference number of times for ending the special miss result C can also be set to be greater than the maximum number of times that can be played in the first normal gaming state before the ceiling is reached.

In other words, in this embodiment, if special miss result C occurs during the first normal gaming state, support in high frequency support mode A is confirmed until the ceiling is reached; and if special miss result A or special miss result B occurs and the number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached is less than the termination reference number for special miss results A and B, support in high frequency support mode A is confirmed until the ceiling is reached.

In this embodiment, when a special failure occurs, the behavior of the symbol display device 95 and the like is different depending on whether or not the termination reference number of times exceeds the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling. Specifically, as with the first embodiment, when a special failure occurs, the player is notified (made clear) that a symbol combination corresponding to the special failure result is displayed in a frozen state. However, if the termination reference number of times exceeds the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling, no notification is made. Below, the specific configuration for achieving this behavior, i.e., the first variation start processing executed as part of periodic processing by the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140, is described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 64.

(First fluctuation start processing)
In the first fluctuation start process, first, in step S2301, the currently received fluctuation start command is read, and information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time are identified from the command. Also, as already explained, when a fluctuation start command is sent from the main control device 162, a type command is also sent together. In step S2301, the type command received along with the currently received fluctuation start command is read, and various information related to the game result, such as information on the probability variable jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, information on the special miss result, information on the normal miss result, and information on reaching the ceiling, is identified from the identified information. Then, in step S2301, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the jackpot type if a jackpot has been won, information on the special miss if a special miss, information on the type of special miss if a special miss, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if a jackpot has not been won and there is no special miss, information on whether or not the ceiling has been reached, information on the fluctuation display time, etc. are grasped from the above-identified information, and the grasped information is stored in a register of the MPU 442.

The following step S2302 updates various counters used to determine the number of plays. Specifically, the remaining number counter, which is provided in the various counter area 465 of RAM 444 and is used to determine the number of plays remaining until the ceiling is reached, is updated (subtracted by "1"). Note that this remaining number counter is configured to be set to "300" when the special play state ends.

In the following step S2303, it is determined whether the result of the current game is a jackpot result based on the information obtained in step S2301. If the result of this game is a jackpot result (6R special jackpot result or 6R regular jackpot result), the following step S2304 executes a jackpot effect setting process. The jackpot effect setting process is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the jackpot symbol combination to be stopped and the active line on which that symbol combination will be stopped, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the jackpot symbols.

In the stop result determination process for a jackpot, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the stop result where the same symbol combination is formed on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the following symbol combinations are defined as symbol combinations corresponding to a jackpot: "1", "1", "1" symbol combination, "2", "2", "2" symbol combination, "3", "3", "3" symbol combination, "4", "4", "4" symbol combination, "5", "5", "5" symbol combination, "6", "6", "6" symbol combination, "7", "7", "7" symbol combination, "8", "8", "8" symbol combination, "9", "9" symbol combination, and "9" symbol combination.

As already explained, when a jackpot result is reached, the result is notified via a reach display. The process for determining the variable display mode for a jackpot retrieves the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, and determines the presentation pattern for a normal reach display or super reach display that corresponds to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. Additionally, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If it is determined in step S2303 that the result is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S2305. In step S2305, based on the information obtained in step S2301, it is determined whether the result of the current game is a special miss. If the result of the current game is a special miss, a positive determination is made in step S2305 and the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2306, a count comparison process is performed.

In the number comparison process, the remaining number counter described above is referenced to determine whether the termination reference number set for the current special miss is less than the remaining number of plays until the ceiling is reached. If the termination reference number set for the current special miss is less than the remaining number of plays until the ceiling is reached, a positive determination is made in step S2307 and the process proceeds to step S2308. In step S2308, the first special effect setting process, which is the effect setting process for special misses, is executed.

The first special effect setting process is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the special miss symbol combination to be stopped and the valid line on which that symbol combination will be stopped, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the special miss symbol.

In the stop result determination process, which constitutes the first special effect setting process, a stop result in which a combination of symbols corresponding to a special miss is formed on one of the active lines L1-L5 is determined as the stop result for this game round. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1-L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the combination of the "1" symbol, the "3" symbol, and the "4" symbol is defined as the symbol combination that corresponds to a special miss.

The variable display mode determination process, which constitutes the first special effect setting process, determines the variable display mode so that the player is notified of a special miss via a reach display. Specifically, it obtains the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, and determines the normal reach display or super reach display effect pattern that corresponds to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variation start command. It also executes a process to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

Here, we will provide additional explanation about the first special effect set by the first special effect setting process, with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 65(a).

In a game corresponding to the first special effect, the display screen 95a will transition to reach display a predetermined time after the display of all the symbol rows that are statically displayed on the display screen 95a has begun. At a predetermined time after the transition to reach display, the display screen 95a will display a symbol combination that corresponds to a special miss (a combination of "1," "3," and "4") statically. After that, the display screen 95a will display a message indicating a switch to high frequency support mode A (for example, "Chance time has begun"), and the background color of the display screen 95a will change to blue.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 64, if a negative judgment is made in step S2307, i.e., if the termination reference number set for this special miss matches or is greater than the number of times remaining until the ceiling is reached, the process proceeds to step S2309. In step S2309, the second special effect setting process, which is the effect setting process for special misses, is executed.

The second special effect setting process is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the special miss symbol combination to be stopped and the valid line on which that symbol combination will be stopped, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the special miss symbol.

In the stop result determination process, which constitutes the second special effect setting process, a stop result in which a combination of symbols corresponding to a special miss is formed on one of the active lines L1-L5 is determined as the stop result for this game round. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1-L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address memory area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address memory area. The symbol combination determined in this stop result determination process includes the "CHANCE" symbol. In other words, in the second special effect, the "CHANCE" symbol will be stopped and displayed on one of the active lines.

The variable display mode determination process, which constitutes the second special effect setting process, determines the variable display mode so that the player is notified of a special miss via a reach display. Specifically, it obtains the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, and determines the normal reach display or super reach display effect pattern that corresponds to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variation start command. It also executes a process to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

Here, we will provide additional explanation about the second special effect set by the second special effect setting process, with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 65(b).

In a game corresponding to the second special effect, the display screen 95a will transition to a reach display a predetermined time after the display of all the symbol rows that are statically displayed on the display screen 95a has begun to change. At a predetermined time after the transition to reach display, a symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol will be statically displayed on the display screen 95a. After that, a message indicating a switch to high frequency support mode A (for example, "Rescue activated") will be displayed on the display screen 95a, and the background color of the display screen 95a will change to green.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 64, if a negative judgment is made in step S2305, i.e., if the current round of play does not correspond to a special miss result, the process proceeds to step S2310. In step S2310, it is determined whether the ceiling will be reached in the current round of play. If the ceiling will be reached, a positive judgment is made in step S2310 and the process proceeds to step S2311. In step S2311, the effect setting process for reaching the ceiling is executed. Details of this effect setting process for reaching the ceiling will be described later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2310, the effect setting process for a complete miss is executed in step S2312. In the effect setting process for a complete miss, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. If a reach will occur, the effect setting process for a reach occurrence is executed, and if a reach will not occur, the effect setting process for a reach not occurring is executed.

The effect setting process for reaching a win can be broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination to be displayed when a win is reached and a valid line on which that symbol combination will be displayed, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the symbol when a win is reached and a complete miss.

In the stop result determination process for reach-compatible complete misses, the stop symbols are determined so that they do not result in any of the symbol combinations corresponding to a jackpot result, a symbol combination corresponding to a special miss result, or a symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1-L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

The process for determining the variable display mode for reach-compatible complete misses retrieves the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, and determines the presentation pattern for normal reach display or super reach display that corresponds to the game result for the variable display time and type command of the currently received variation start command. In addition, the process executes a process for storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

The effect setting process for when a reach does not occur can be broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination to be displayed as a complete miss and not a reach and the effective line on which that symbol combination will be displayed as a complete miss, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the symbol for a complete miss and not a reach.

In the stop result determination process for non-reach complete misses, the stop symbols are determined so that they do not result in any of the symbol combinations corresponding to a jackpot result, special miss results, or ceiling hit results. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each active line L1-L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

The process for determining the variable display mode for a complete miss that does not correspond to a reach is to obtain the variable display pattern table for a miss that does not correspond to a reach stored in various table areas of ROM 443, and determine the presentation pattern that corresponds to the game result for the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

After executing any of steps S2304, S2308, S2309, S2311, and S2312, the process proceeds to step S2313. In step S2313, commands containing information on the stop result and presentation pattern determined in steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908 are output to the display control device 410 as stop result commands and pattern commands, respectively. Based on the received stop result commands and pattern commands, the MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the display of the symbol display device 95 to execute presentations for the current game round.

After executing the processing of step S1909, the processing to start the effect for the game round is executed in the following step S1910, and then this fluctuation start processing is terminated. Specifically, drive control of the speaker unit 29 and lamp unit 26 is started based on the effect pattern determined in the above steps S2304, S2308, S2309, S2311, and S2312, and the effect for the game round is started.

Here, we will explain the effect setting process for reaching the ceiling in step S2311. The effect setting process for reaching the ceiling consists of a normal setting process that is executed when the current gaming state is the first normal gaming state, and a special setting process that is executed when the current gaming state is a normal gaming state other than the first normal gaming state (for example, the fourth normal gaming state).

The normal setting process that constitutes step S2311 is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination to be displayed when reaching the ceiling and the active line on which that symbol combination will be displayed when it is stopped, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the symbol to be displayed when reaching the ceiling.

In the stop result determination process in the normal setting process described above, a stop result in which a combination of symbols for reaching the ceiling is formed on one of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result for this game round. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address memory area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address memory area. In this embodiment, a symbol combination including a "CHANCE" symbol is defined as a symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling.

When the ceiling is reached, the result is notified via a reach display. The variable display mode determination process obtains the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, and determines the presentation pattern for a normal reach display or super reach display that corresponds to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

Here, we will provide additional explanation about the effects that are executed in a game where the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 65(b).

In a game in which the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, the display screen 95a will transition to reach display a predetermined time after the display of all the symbol rows that are statically displayed on the display screen 95a has begun to change. At a predetermined time after the transition to reach display, the display screen 95a will display a static symbol combination that includes the "CHANCE" symbol. After that, a message indicating a switch to high frequency support mode A (for example, "Rescue activated") will be displayed on the display screen 95a, and the background color of the display screen 95a will change to green.

In other words, the effect when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state is the same as the second special effect set in step S2309 above, and is configured so that the effect mode and the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed are the same as when the termination reference number of times, which is set in response to a special miss, matches or exceeds the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling. In other words, when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, the second special effect will be executed in both cases when the termination reference number of times, which is set in response to a special miss, matches or exceeds the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling, and the player will not be able to tell whether the trigger for that effect (the effect mode and the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed) was a special miss or reaching the ceiling.

The special setting process that constitutes step S2311 is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination to be stopped and the active line on which that symbol combination will be stopped, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the symbols.

In this stop result determination process, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the stop result that results in a combination of symbols that normally corresponds to a miss. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1-L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

The result is notified via a reach display. The variable display mode determination process obtains the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, and determines a non-reach presentation pattern that corresponds to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. Also, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

In other words, if the ceiling is reached during a normal gaming state other than the first normal gaming state (specifically, the fourth normal gaming state), the same effect as in the case of a complete miss that does not correspond to a reach is executed. This makes it difficult to tell from the content of the effect that the ceiling has been reached. In other words, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state or there is a complete miss (which does not correspond to a jackpot, special miss, or ceiling reach), an effect corresponding to a complete miss will be executed, and the player will not be able to tell from the effect (the mode of effect and the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed) whether the trigger was a ceiling reach or a complete miss.

Next, the flow of the game will be explained with reference to Figure 66. Figure 66(a) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when the ceiling is reached after the end of the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss, and Figure 66(b) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss.

In the example shown in Figure 66(a), a special miss occurs at timing td1 during the first normal gaming state. This special miss is special miss result A, and the termination reference number is set to "20". The remaining number of times until the ceiling is reached is greater than the currently set termination reference number. In other words, in the example shown in Figure 66(a), the ceiling will not be reached during the fourth normal gaming state, which is triggered by a special miss.

When a special miss occurs, the first special effect (see Figure 65(a)) is executed, and it is clearly indicated that the special miss will trigger a transition to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to high frequency support mode A. Then, with the transition to the fourth normal game state, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 changes from white to blue. In addition, a countdown display of the remaining number of plays in the fourth normal game state begins in the upper corner of the display screen 95a, and the remaining number of plays is clearly indicated.

At time td2, when the number of plays executed during this fourth normal gaming state reaches the termination reference number, the fourth normal gaming state transitions to the first normal gaming state. In conjunction with this, the background color of the display screen 95a changes from blue to white.

After that, play continues without a jackpot, and at td3, the number of plays executed after the special play state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling), triggering a transition from the first normal play state to the fourth normal play state. In the final play where the ceiling is reached, the second special effect described above (see Figure 65 (b)) is executed, and the player is notified that the ceiling has been reached. The background color of the display screen 95a changes to green to coincide with the transition to the fourth normal play state at td3.

In contrast, in the example shown in Figure 66(b), a special miss occurs at timing te1 during the first normal game state. This special miss is special miss result B, and the termination reference number is set to "40." The remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is greater than the currently set termination reference number. In other words, in the example shown in Figure 66(b), the ceiling can be reached during the fourth normal game state, which is triggered by the special miss. At timing te1, the second special effect is executed, and the background color of the display screen 95a is changed from white to green. However, the countdown display of the remaining number of plays is not executed on this display screen 95a, and the remaining number of plays is not displayed.

At timing te2 during the fourth normal game state, the number of play times executed after the special game state ended reaches the upper limit (ceiling). In this play time, a normal miss (complete miss) effect that does not correspond to a reach is executed, and a symbol combination corresponding to a normal miss (complete miss) is displayed frozen.

At the subsequent timing te3, the number of play times executed during this fourth normal game state reaches the termination reference number, and the game state transitions from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state. During the first play time after transition to the first normal game state, a normal miss (complete miss) effect that does not correspond to a reach is executed, and a symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss is displayed statically, and at the timing te4 when that play time ends, the game state quickly returns to the fourth normal game state. In this way, the background color on the display screen 95a remains green even during the successive transitions from the fourth normal game state → the first normal game state → the fourth normal game state.

According to the fourth embodiment described above, if the number of play times (number of play times) after the special play state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a jackpot, the game transitions to the fourth normal play state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. In high-frequency support mode A, frequent wins into the second actuation port 92 reduce investment associated with game progress. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable for rescuing players. In the configuration shown in this embodiment, a transition to the fourth normal play state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A may occur even if a special miss occurs. In this case, a special effect is executed. If a special miss occurs and the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal play state, which is triggered by the special miss, the same effect as the special effect executed when the ceiling is reached during the first normal play state is executed. This configuration makes it appear as if the ceiling is variable. Furthermore, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal play state, the above-mentioned ceiling-reaching effect is not executed, and the fact that the ceiling has been reached is not made clear, thereby further enhancing the mimetic effect described above. Furthermore, when a special miss occurs and the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, if the set termination reference number of times is less than the number of times the game is played until the ceiling is reached, a different effect will be executed. This is preferable for achieving the mimicry effect described above.

When the mode changes from high frequency support mode A to low frequency support mode to high frequency support mode A, the above-mentioned mimicry effect can be more effectively achieved by continuing to display a series of mode suggestions from at least the previous high frequency support mode A to the low frequency support mode.

<Modification 1>
In the fourth embodiment, if the termination reference number set in the event of a special miss matches or is greater than the remaining number of times until the ceiling is reached, the same effect (second special effect) as when the ceiling is reached during the first normal gaming state is executed, but this is not limited to this.The same effect (second special effect) as when the ceiling is reached during the first normal gaming state may be executed only when the termination reference number set in the event of a special miss is greater than the remaining number of times until the ceiling is reached.

<Modification 2>
In the fourth embodiment, when the termination reference number set in the event of a special miss matches the number of times remaining until the ceiling is reached or is greater than the remaining number of times, an effect similar to that when the ceiling is reached during the first normal gaming state (second special effect) is executed, but it is not necessary to make the two effects completely the same. When the termination reference number set in the event of a special miss matches the number of times remaining until the ceiling is reached or is greater than the remaining number of times, it is sufficient that an effect is executed that is recognized by the player as being the same as the effect executed when a special miss occurs during the first normal gaming state or the effect executed when the ceiling is reached during the first normal gaming state.

<Modification 3>
In the fourth embodiment, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state, the fact is not indicated, but it is also possible to indicate that the ceiling has been reached. For example, the fact that the ceiling has been reached may be indicated by displaying a message on the display screen 95a or by changing the background music output from the speaker unit 29.

<Modification 4>
In the fourth embodiment, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state triggered by a special miss, the game returns to the fourth normal gaming state via the first normal gaming state, but it is also possible to set the variable display time of the image on the actuation port display unit in this first normal gaming state to a variable display time corresponding to a reach display. In this way, ensuring the variable display time for a game round in the first normal gaming state is preferable for executing a continuation effect (promotion effect) of the fourth normal gaming state in that game round.

<Modification 5>
In the fourth embodiment, the game play counter is reset (cleared to 0) when the special game state ends, but this is not limited to this. For example, the game play counter may be reset when the special game state is entered, or may be reset during the special game state. It is also possible to reset the game play counter when the high frequency support mode ends.

<Modification 6>
The termination reference number of times (20 times) set when special failure result A occurs is specified to be less than the number of games executed from the end of high-frequency support mode B until the ceiling is reached, and the termination reference number of times (260 times) set when special failure result C occurs is specified to be greater than the number of games executed from the end of high-frequency support mode B until the ceiling is reached. In other words, when special failure result A occurs, whether or not high-frequency support mode A can be continued until the ceiling is reached depends on the timing, while when special failure result C occurs, high-frequency support mode A can be continued until the ceiling is reached. This may be modified so that the termination reference number of times (20 times) set when special failure result A occurs is less than the number of games (300 times) until the ceiling is reached, and the termination reference number of times (e.g., 310 times) set when special failure result C occurs is specified to be greater than the number of games (300 times) until the ceiling is reached.

Fifth Embodiment
In the first embodiment described above, when the number of games played after the special game state ends reaches a ceiling, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode A, suppressing excessive investment by the player. In this configuration, even if the transition to the fourth normal game state aims to rescue the player, the time it takes for the player to enjoy the benefits of rescue (such as balls released from a jackpot) can be long, which can give the impression that the game is dragging on. In the fourth normal game state, the variable display time is likely to be shortened by the frequent winning of the second actuation port 92 and the number of reserved balls increasing, but since this fourth normal game state corresponds to the low-probability mode, and the probability of winning a jackpot based on the winning of the actuation ports 91 and 92 is not changed, it is expected that it will be difficult to completely eliminate the above-mentioned concerns.

One of the features of this embodiment is that it addresses the above-mentioned concerns by configuring the game to transition to a limited-time chance zone (special game state, described below) where the probability of winning a jackpot effectively increases when the number of games played after the special game state (in this embodiment, the jackpot game state or V jackpot game state, described below) has ended reaches an upper limit (ceiling). Below, we will explain the specific configuration for achieving this function, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment described above, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) was a left-right symmetrical gauge (see Figure 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80B (game board 80aB) is a left-right asymmetrical gauge, and the arrangement of the various game components provided in the play area PE has been changed. Below, with reference to Figure 67, the game board unit 80B in this embodiment will be described in detail. Figure 67 is a front view of the game board unit 80B.

(Game board unit 80B)
The game board 80aB has a plurality of large and small openings formed therethrough in its thickness direction (front-to-back direction). Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 81, an actuation opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83B, a through gate 84A, etc. When game balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the actuation opening unit 82A, or the variable winning device 83B, the game balls are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided corresponding to each ball entry section, and a bonus such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) is awarded to the player based on the detection results.

In addition, numerous game pins 87 are planted on the game board 80aB to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills are also arranged. These game pins 87, windmills, and other components differentiate the flow path of the game balls, and are adjusted so that winning the above-mentioned general winning hole 81, etc. occurs with an appropriate probability. In addition, an outlet 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80aB, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entry sections, etc. are discharged from the game area PE through the outlet 86.

Like the actuation port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, the actuation port unit 82A has a first actuation port 91A and a second actuation port 92A located directly below the first actuation port 91A. The latter of the first and second actuation ports 91A and 92A is equipped with an electric device 93A that functions as an open/close ball entry assist device (ball entry assist means) or an open/close member (opening/closing means). When the support mode of the electric device 93A is in low-frequency support mode, winning at the second actuation port 92A is effectively impossible; however, switching to high-frequency support mode allows winning at the second actuation port 92A.

A center frame 96A is provided on the gaming board 80aB, surrounding the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the gaming board 80aB, and similar to the first embodiment described above, the center frame 96A divides the flow path of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area PE into two routes: one that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side, and one that bypasses it from the left side. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first actuation port 91A, second actuation port 92A, variable entry device 83B, and through gate 84A has been changed so that game balls launched down the left route can enter the first actuation port 91A and second actuation port 92A, but cannot enter the variable entry device 83B or through gate 84A, and game balls launched down the right route can enter the second actuation port 92A, through gate 84A, and variable entry device 83B, but cannot enter the first actuation port 91A. Note that it may also be configured so that game balls launched down the left route cannot enter the second actuation port 92A.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right and left routes depending on the game situation, it is possible to advance the game to an advantage. By encouraging such technical intervention, monotony in the game is prevented.

In this embodiment, the configuration of the variable winning device 83B differs from that of the variable winning device 83 shown in the first embodiment. Below, we will provide additional information about the specific configuration of the variable winning device 83B with reference to Figure 68. Figure 68 is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the variable winning device 83B.

(Variable winning device 83B)
A ball passage 332B is formed inside the variable prize-winning device 83B, through which game balls that flow into the entrance (large prize opening 331B) of the variable prize-winning device 83B pass. The ball passage 332B branches into a first branch passage 334B and a second branch passage 335B at a midpoint, and a flow path switching member 336B is disposed at this branching point, capable of switching the flow destination of game balls between the first branch passage 334B and the second branch passage 335B. The drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid) for the flow path switching member 336B is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. When no drive signal is input from the main control device 162 (de-energized state), the flow path switching member 336B waits in a protruding position protruding into the ball passage 332B. When a drive signal is input from the main control device 162 (energized state), the flow path switching member 336B waits in a retracted position avoiding protrusion into the ball passage 332B.

When the flow path switching member 336B is positioned in the protruding position, the flow path switching member 336B blocks the entrance portion of the first branch passage 334B. In this state, game balls that reach the branch portion are prevented from flowing into the first branch passage 334B, and instead flow into the second branch passage 335B.

When the main control unit 162 outputs a drive unit drive signal for the flow path switching member 336B and the drive unit enters an excited state, the flow path switching member 336B moves to a retracted position that prevents it from protruding into the ball passage 332B, and the entrance to the first branch passage 334B is opened. This changes the destination of the game balls. In this state, game balls that reach the branch portion are prevented from flowing into the second branch passage 335B, and instead flow into the first branch passage 334B. The movement of the flow path switching member 336B is predetermined by the results of a lottery based on winning entries into the operating ports 91A and 92A.

Upstream detection sensor 391d is located upstream of the branch point in ball passage 332B, and downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B are located downstream of the branch point, specifically in first branch passage 334B and second branch passage 335B. Upstream detection sensor 391d and downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B are connected to main control unit 162, which determines whether or not a win has occurred in variable winning device 83B based on detection information (detection signal) from upstream detection sensor 391d, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls if a win occurs. Furthermore, the remaining game balls are monitored based on detection information (detection signal) from upstream detection sensor 391d and downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B.

In the main control device 162 shown in this embodiment, if detection information (detection signal) from the downstream detection sensor 338B attached to the first branch passage 334B determines that a ball has entered the first branch passage 334B, the support mode after the end of the special game state (more specifically, the V jackpot game state described below) is switched to high-frequency support mode (more specifically, high-frequency support mode B). In this embodiment, the first branch passage 334B corresponds to the "favorable ball entry section" or "V," and a ball entering the first branch passage 334B is also referred to as a "V entry."

(Reserved ball storage area)
Next, in this embodiment, the configuration for storing the reserved information based on winnings in the actuation ports 91A and 92A is different from that in the first embodiment. Below, the configuration for storing the reserved information in this embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 69.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment has a first actuation port reserve area Ra that stores the values of the win random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a win occurs in the first actuation port 91A, and a second actuation port reserve area Rb that stores the values of the win random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a win occurs in the second actuation port 92A.

The first actuation port holding area Ra is made up of areas 1 to 4, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the first actuation port 91A, the numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of area 1 → area 2 → area 3 → area 4. The second actuation port holding area Rb is made up of areas 1 to 4, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the second actuation port 92A, the numerical information (hold information) is stored in chronological order in the order of area 1 → area 2 → area 3 → area 4.

In this embodiment, if reserved information is stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb, the reserved information stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb (more specifically, the first area) is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. If reserved information is not stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb but reserved information is stored in the first actuation port reserve area Ra, the reserved information stored in the first actuation port reserve area Ra (more specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, a low probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low and a high probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high were provided as lottery modes for conducting lotteries based on winning entries into the first actuation port 91 and the second actuation port 92. In other words, the win/loss table for the actuation port to be referenced is switched depending on the lottery mode. In contrast, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the win/loss lottery for the actuation port is conducted by referencing the same win/loss table in any game state. It also differs from the first embodiment in that a different win/loss table is referenced depending on the winning destination of the gaming ball. Below, the win/loss table for the actuation port in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 70.

(Actuator port pass/fail table)
As shown in Figure 70(a), in the win/lose table referenced in the lottery based on winning the first actuation port 91A, the random number values that result in a jackpot win (i.e., winning information) are "7,""307," and "507," a total of three. In other words, of the values of the win random number counter C1, which range from "0 to 599,""7,""307," and "507" correspond to a jackpot. And, all random number values that do not correspond to a jackpot correspond to a miss (normal miss). This makes the jackpot probability 1/200.

As shown in Figure 70(b), in the hit/miss table referenced in the lottery based on winning the second actuation port 92A, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are three: "7", "307", and "507". In other words, of the hit random number counter C1 values from "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to a jackpot. Also, in this hit/miss table, a total of 60 values correspond to special wins: "5", "15", "25", "35", "45", ... "575", "585", and "595". Furthermore, all random number values that do not correspond to either a jackpot or a special win correspond to a miss (normal miss). As a result, the probability of a jackpot is 1/200 and the probability of a special win is 1/10.

In this embodiment, the lottery results based on winning at the first actuation port 91A and the second actuation port 92A do not include the special loss shown in the first embodiment. However, this is not limited to this, and the lottery results based on winning at the first actuation port 91A may be configured to result in a special loss, or the lottery results based on winning at the second actuation port 92A may be configured to result in a special loss, or the lottery results based on winning at both the first actuation port 91A and the second actuation port 92A may be configured to result in a special loss.

Next, referring to Figure 71, we will explain the allocation tables for each operating port 91A, 92A.

(Distribution table for operating ports)
In the distribution table for the first operating port 91A, of the values of the type counter C2 from "0" to "30," a total of 27 values from "0" to "26" correspond to 6R jackpots, and a total of 3 values from "27" to "29" correspond to 10R jackpots. In other words, when a jackpot is won, approximately 90% of the time it will be a 6R jackpot, and the remaining 10% will be a 10R jackpot.

In contrast, in the allocation table for the second actuation port 92A, of the type counter C2 values between "0" and "30," a total of 15 values between "0" and "14" correspond to a 6R jackpot, and a total of 15 values between "15" and "29" correspond to a 10R jackpot. In other words, when a jackpot is won, the probability of a 6R jackpot and a 10R jackpot are both 50%.

There is a difference in the number of rounds during the open/close execution mode between the 6R jackpot and the 10R jackpot. The number of rounds for the former is "6", while the number of rounds for the latter is "10". In other words, if you win a 10R jackpot, it's your chance to increase your ball collection all at once.

In addition, in the event of a 6R jackpot or 10R jackpot, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the game state transitions to a gaming state (first special gaming state or second special gaming state) in which the support mode provided by the electric device 93A becomes high-frequency support mode B. This gaming state corresponding to high-frequency support mode B continues until the number of games executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, more specifically the number of games related to the second operating port 92A, reaches the reference number of times to end, and when this reference number of times is reached, support provided by high-frequency support mode B ends. In the event of a 6R jackpot, the reference number of times to end is set to "6 times," and in the event of a 10R jackpot, the reference number of times to end is set to "100 times."

If the special win is determined by the lottery based on a win in the second operating port 92A, the game transitions to the special win game state, the variable win device 83B is opened for a predetermined time, and the flow path switching member 336B of the variable win device 83B moves from the protruding position to the retracted position. This allows a win in the favorable ball entry section 334B (V win). When this favorable ball entry section 334B (V win) occurs, a 5RV jackpot occurs, and the game transitions to the V jackpot game state after the special win game state ends (see Figure 72 (a)).

After the V jackpot gaming state ends, the game will transition to a gaming state compatible with high frequency support mode B. This gaming state compatible with high frequency support mode B will continue until the number of games played after the V jackpot gaming state ends, more specifically the number of games played related to second operating port 92A, reaches the standard number of times to end the game, and when this standard number of times is reached, support by high frequency support mode B will end. In the case of a 5RV jackpot, the standard number of times to end the game will be set to "6 times."

In this embodiment, during a gaming state corresponding to high frequency support mode B (first special gaming state or second special gaming state), gameplay progresses with the main number of game plays being based on winnings at the second actuation port 92A, and even after the termination reference number of times is reached and the state transitions to a gaming state corresponding to low frequency support mode, the remaining reserved game plays related to the second actuation port 92A will be executed.

In this embodiment, among the game states in which game turns are executed based on winning at the operating port, game states that are compatible with the low-frequency support mode and exclude the special game states described below are referred to as "normal game states." Furthermore, the special win game state, V jackpot game state, and jackpot game state are referred to as "special game states."

In other words, if a 5RV or 6R jackpot occurs, the winning probability will be increased for a total of 10 times, which is the standard number of times to end (6 times) plus the upper limit of the number of reserved balls stored for second operating port 92A (4 times). The probability of winning a jackpot or special ball during this time is approximately 65%. Furthermore, if a 10R jackpot occurs, the winning probability will be increased for a total of 10 times, which is the standard number of times to end (100 times) plus the upper limit of the number of reserved balls stored for second operating port 92A (4 times). The probability of winning a jackpot or special ball during this time is nearly 100% (see Figure 72 (b)).

In this embodiment, the configuration is similar to that of the first embodiment in that when the number of games executed after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game state transitions to a game state compatible with high-frequency support mode A (third special game state). This game state compatible with high-frequency support mode A continues until the number of games executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends, more specifically the number of games related to the second actuation port 92A, reaches the termination reference number (time-saving number: 1 in this embodiment), and when this termination reference number is reached, the game state transitions to a game state compatible with low-frequency support mode (normal game state).

In the normal game state that corresponds to high frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the game enters a high probability state (chance zone) with increased winning probability for a total of five times: the standard number of times to end (1 time) plus the upper limit of the number of reserved balls stored for second operating port 92A (4 times). During this time, the probability of winning a jackpot or special prize is approximately 40%, and the winning probability is temporarily increased when the ceiling is reached.

In this embodiment, the number of plays required to reach the ceiling is set to "200 plays." If the ceiling is reached and a transition to a gaming state compatible with high frequency support mode A occurs, the ceiling is reset when that gaming state ends (the play count counter is cleared to 0). In other words, the system is configured to transition to the chance zone every 200 plays.

The high-frequency support mode in this embodiment is also broadly divided into high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, and high-frequency support mode B, which is triggered by a jackpot or V win. High-frequency support mode B is differentiated so that support from the electric device 93A is more favorable than high-frequency support mode A. However, for high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the termination reference number is one, and once the number of reserved balls related to the second operating port 92A reaches the upper limit, no further game balls need to be released. This prevents investment from becoming too large when the rescue function is being activated by reaching the ceiling.

Next, with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 73 and 74, we will explain the periodic processing (timer interrupt processing, normal processing) executed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Timer interrupt processing)
As shown in Fig. 73, the timer interrupt process in this embodiment is the same as the timer interrupt process shown in the first embodiment (see Fig. 20) except that a V winning process in step S2406 has been added. Details will be described later, but this V winning process monitors whether or not a winning ball has been won (V winning) in the advantageous winning portion 334B of the variable winning device 83B.

(Normal processing)
As shown in Figure 74, in normal processing, first, external signal output processing is executed in step S2501. In the following step S2502, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated, and in step S2503, game number control processing is executed. A part of the game number control processing in step S2503 (support mode switching processing) has been changed from the first embodiment. Details of the support mode switching processing in this embodiment will be described later.

After that, in step S2504, the process for transitioning to the special win game state is executed, in step S2505, the V allocation setting process is executed, and in step S2506, the process for transitioning to the big win game state is executed. Details of each process in steps S2504 to S2506 will be described later.

In the following step S2507, through gate control processing is executed, and in step S2508, electric role support processing is executed. Then, in step S2509, game ball launch control processing is executed. The processing of steps S2507 to S2509 is the same as in the first embodiment, so explanations will be omitted.

In step S2510, it is determined whether the timing for the next normal processing has arrived, i.e., whether one cycle (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, during the remaining time until the timing for the next normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated (steps S2511 to S2512).

Here, we will explain the support mode switching process executed as part of the game play control process in step S2503, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 75.

(Support mode switching process)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether the current support mode is high frequency support mode A or B. If a positive determination is made in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2602. In step S2602, it is determined whether the current game round is a game round related to the second actuation port 92A. If a negative determination is made in step S2602, the support mode switching process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2602, the process proceeds to step S2603.

In step S2603, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S2604, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2604, the switching process ends. If a positive determination is made in step S2604, the process proceeds to step S2605, where the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag or high-frequency support mode B flag) stored in the various flag storage area 435 is cleared, and the switching process ends. Clearing the high-frequency support mode flag switches the support mode of the electric role object 93A from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S2601, if a negative determination is made in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2606. In step S2606, it is determined whether the value of the number of games played counter stored in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 has reached its upper limit (equivalent to 200 games). If a negative determination is made in step S2606, the switching process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2606, the process proceeds to step S2607.

In step S2607, the continuation counter is set to "1". Then, in the following step S2608, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flags storage area 435 of RAM 404, and this switching process ends. In other words, when the ceiling is reached, the support mode is quickly switched from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A without going through the special game state.

Next, we will explain the process of transitioning to the special win game state in step S2504, with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 76 and 77.

(Transition process to special winning game state)
76, in the process of transitioning to the special win game state, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. The jackpot game flag is a flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed, and is stored when the jackpot game starts and is erased when the jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that a jackpot game is not currently being played (the jackpot game flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S2702, where it is determined whether a special jackpot game is currently being played. Specifically, it is determined whether a special jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435. The special jackpot game flag is a flag that indicates that a special jackpot game is currently being played.

If it is determined that a special win game is not currently being played (the special win game flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S2703, where it is determined whether a special win flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435. In other words, it is determined whether a special win has occurred. The special win flag is a flag that is stored in the various flag storage area 435 when a special win is determined in the win/loss lottery in the game number control process described above.

If it is determined that the special win flag has been stored, step S2704 determines whether it is time for the game to end. If it is not time for the game to end, the process of transitioning to the special win game state is terminated. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step S2701 (a jackpot game is being executed) or a negative judgment is made in step S2703 (a special win flag is not stored), the process of transitioning to the special win game state is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game has ended, step S2705 executes the process to start the special winning game. This process includes storing a special winning game flag in the various flag storage area 435 and checking that the variable winning device 83B is closed before the special winning game starts. This process also executes the process to set an opening period during which the variable winning device 83B waits without opening when the special winning game starts. In the process of setting the opening period, a value corresponding to the opening period is set in the opening timer counter provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404. This set value (counter value) is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is initiated, i.e., every 2 msec.

In the following step S2706, the number of rounds to be played in the special winning game is set by setting the round counter RC1 in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 to "1".

In the following step S2707, an opening command is set. This set opening command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 during external output processing in normal processing (Figure 74). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the performance content corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined performance content is executed.

In the following step S2708, the external signal setting process is executed, and then the process for transitioning to the special win game state is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the special win signal provided on the external output terminal board 213 is set to the special win signal output state. As a result, if the output terminal for the special win signal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, a special win signal is output to the management control device, and the management control device can determine that a special win has occurred on the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S2702 (it is determined that a special winning game is being played), the process proceeds to step S2709, where it is determined whether the opening waiting time has elapsed. If the opening waiting time has not elapsed, the process of transitioning to the special winning game state is terminated.

If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, proceed to step S2710 and execute the special win opening/closing process to open and close the large prize opening 331B of the variable prize device 83B. The special win opening/closing process will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 77.

(Special opening and closing process)
In the special win opening/closing process, first in step S2801, it is determined whether the large prize opening 331B of the variable prize winning device 83B is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the drive unit (variable prize driving unit) for the shutter 333B of the variable prize winning device 83B. If the large prize opening 331B is not open, it is determined in step S2802 whether the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", and in step S2803 it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter TC1 in RAM 404 is "0".

If the value of the round counter RC1 is "0" or the value of the first timer counter TC1 is not "0", the opening/closing process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" and the value of the first timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S2804, where the drive unit for the shutter 333B is driven to open the variable winning device 83B.

In the following step S2805, the first timer counter TC1 is set to "5000" (equivalent to 10 seconds) as the opening time of the variable winning device 83B. Then, in step S2806, the upper limit on the number of winnings that can be entered into the variable winning device 83B during the special winning game is set. Specifically, the first winning counter PC1 provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set to "10."

Then, in step S2807, an opening command is set and the special winning opening/closing process is terminated. This set opening command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in the external output process of the normal process (Figure 74).

Returning to the explanation of step S2801, if it is determined in step S2801 that the large winning opening 331B is open, the process proceeds to step S2808, where it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter TC1 is "0." If the value of the first timer counter TC1 is not "0," it is determined in step S2809 whether a win has occurred in the variable winning device 83B. If a win has not occurred, the special winning opening/closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a win has occurred, a win command is set in step S2810. This win command is sent to the notification/effect control device 140 in the external output process of the normal processing (Figure 74). In the following step S2811, the value of the first win counter PC1 is decremented by "1". Then, in step S2812, it is determined whether the value of the first win counter PC1 is "0", and if it is not "0", the special win opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2812 or step S2808 above, this means that the conditions for closing the special prize opening 331B have been met. In this case, in step S2813, the drive unit for the shutter 333B is set to a non-driven state in order to close the special prize opening 331B.

In the following step S2814, the value of the round counter RC1 is decremented by "1", and in step S2815, the ending start process is executed. In this start process, an ending wait time is set for the ending of a special winning game, during which the next game round is not started before the game begins. Specifically, the ending wait time pre-stored in ROM 403 is set in the ending timer counter provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404. The value of the ending timer counter is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

Then, in step S2816, an ending command is set and the opening/closing process is terminated. This set ending command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 during the external output process in the normal process (Figure 74).

Returning to the explanation of the transition process to the special win game state in Figure 76, after executing the special win opening/closing process in step S2710, it is determined in step S2711 whether the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". Furthermore, in step S2712 it is determined whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" or if the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the transition process to the special win game state is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the round counter RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the special win game termination process is executed in step S2713, and then the transition process to the special win game state is terminated. Here, the special win game termination process in step S2713 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 78.

(Ending process of special winning game)
In the process of ending the special winning game, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not a V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. This V winning flag is stored in the V winning process in step S2406 in the timer interrupt process of FIG.

Here, we will explain the V prize processing in step S2406 and the V allocation setting processing in step S2505 during normal processing, which is processing related to V prizes. First, we will explain the V allocation setting processing in step S307 with reference to the flowchart in Figure 79.

(V allocation setting process)
In the V allocation setting process, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a special winning game. If it is the start timing, in step S3002, "500" (corresponding to 0.1 sec), which corresponds to 1 sec, is set to the second timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404. The value set in the second timer counter TC2 (counter value) is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, i.e., every 2 msec.

In the following step S3003, the sorting count counter area HC provided in the various counter areas 434 is set to "1." The data value (counter value) stored in the sorting count counter area HC is used by the MPU 402 to identify the number of times the flow path switching member 336B has operated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3001, or after the processing of step S3003 has been performed, the process proceeds to step S3004. In step S3004, the drive state of the drive unit for the distribution member is determined to determine whether the flow path switching member 336B is located in the retracted position, which is the side that distributes to the favorable ball entry section 334B (the V winning side). If the flow path switching member 336B is not located in the retracted position, i.e., if it is located in the protruding position, the process proceeds to step S3005, where it determines whether the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0". If the value of the third timer counter TC3 is not "0", the distribution setting process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0", the process proceeds to step S3006, where it determines whether the value of the distribution number counter area HC is "0".

If a negative judgment is made in step S3006, i.e., if the value in the allocation count counter area HC is "1", then in step S3007, the flow path switching member 336B is displaced to the retracted position (V winning side). In the following step S3008, the third timer counter TC3 is set to "4000" (equivalent to 8 seconds). After step S3008 is executed, or if a positive judgment is made in step S3006, this allocation setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S3004, if a positive judgment is made in step S3004, i.e., if the flow path switching member 336B is located in the retracted position (V winning side), step S3009 determines whether the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0." In other words, it determines whether the period for keeping the flow path switching member 336B in the retracted position (V winning side) has elapsed. If a positive judgment is made in step S3009, step S3010 displaces the flow path switching member 336B to the protruding position, and then step S3011 executes a process of subtracting "1" from the value of the allocation count counter area HC. After step S3011 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S3009, this allocation setting process ends.

Next, we will explain the V winning process with reference to the flowchart in Figure 80.

(Processing for winning V prize)
In the V winning process, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not a V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If a V winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3102, and it is determined whether or not a V winning has occurred (whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the detection area of the detection sensor 338B) based on the detection state of the V winning detection sensor 338B provided in the variable winning device 83B.

If it is determined that a V win has occurred, step S3103 determines whether the V win is currently in its valid period. This valid period is a predetermined period, and is set, for example, to the period during which a special winning game is being played or the V-side allocation period of the flow path switching member 336B. If it is determined that the valid period is not currently in effect, proceed to step S3104, set an error command to be sent to the notification/effect control device 140, and then terminate this V win processing. The set error command is sent to the notification/effect control device 140 during the external output processing of the normal processing (Figure 74), and the notification/effect control device 140 controls the display control device 410, lamp unit 26, and speaker unit 29 to issue the specified error notification.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the valid period has expired, the process proceeds to step S3105, where a V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. In the following step S3106, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is a command for notifying the notification/performance control device 140 that a V winning has occurred, and the set V winning command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in the external output processing of the normal processing (Figure 74). When the notification/performance control device 140 receives a V winning command, it controls the display control device 410, etc., so that the pattern display device 95, lamp unit 26, and speaker unit 29 notify the occurrence of a V winning, or perform a performance such as celebrating the V winning.

After executing step S3106, if a positive judgment is made in step S3101 or a negative judgment is made in step S3102, the V winning process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the special winning game termination process in Figure 78, if it is determined in step S2901 that a V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, the process proceeds to step S2902, where a V winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. The V winning flag is a flag that allows the MPU 402 to determine that a V jackpot game should be started.

In the following step S2903, a process is executed to erase the V winning flag, special win flag, and special win game flag stored in the various flag storage area 435. In the following step S2904, a V winning command is set, and then the process to end this special win game is terminated. The V winning command is a command for notifying the notification/effect control device 140 that a V jackpot game has started and the type of V jackpot game, and the set V winning command is sent to the notification/effect control device 140 in the external output process of the normal process (Figure 74). When the notification/effect control device 140 receives a V winning command, it controls the display control device 410, etc. so that an effect announcing that a V jackpot game has started is executed on the pattern display device 95, etc.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S2901 (it is determined that the V winning flag is not stored), in step S2905, the special win flag and special win game flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and then the process of ending this special win game is terminated.

Next, the transition process to the jackpot gaming state in step S2506 during normal processing (Figure 74) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 81. Note that among the various processes included in this transition process, those that are similar to those included in the transition process to the special jackpot gaming state described above will be explained briefly as appropriate.

(Transition process to jackpot game state)
In the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not a special win game is being executed. If it is determined that a special win game is being executed, the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state is terminated, whereas if it is determined that a special win game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S3202, where it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is being executed.

If it is determined that a jackpot game is not currently being played, step S3203 determines whether a V hit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. That is, it determines whether a V hit game should be started. If it is determined that a V hit flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3204, where it determines whether various jackpot flags are stored in the various flag storage area 435. That is, it determines whether a normal jackpot game, other than a V hit game, should be started.

If it is determined that no jackpot flags are stored, the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that various jackpot flags are stored, the process proceeds to step S3205, where it is determined whether or not it is time to end the game round. If it is determined that it is not time to end the game round, the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3205 that the game has ended, or if it is determined in step S3203 that the V hit flag has been stored, the process proceeds to step S3206, where the jackpot game start process is executed. This start process includes storing the jackpot game flag in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404, and executing the opening period setting process.

In the following step S3207, a round setting process is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether a 6R jackpot flag, a 10R jackpot flag, or a 5RV jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435. If it is determined that one of these flags is stored, the process proceeds to step S3208, where the round counter RC1 provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set. Specifically, if a 6R jackpot flag is stored, the round counter RC1 is set to "6." If a 10R jackpot flag is stored, the round counter RC1 is set to "10." If a 5RV jackpot flag is stored, the round counter RC1 is set to "5."

After step S3207 is executed, an opening command is set in step S3208, and then an external signal setting process is executed in step S3209, after which the process of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state is terminated.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S3202 above that a jackpot game is being played, the process proceeds to step S3210, where it is determined whether the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3211, where a jackpot opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the large prize opening 331B of the variable prize winning device 83B. In the jackpot opening/closing process, if the large prize opening 331B of the variable prize winning device 83B is closed, the drive unit for the shutter 333B is driven to open the large prize opening 331B, provided that the round counter RC1 is "1" or greater. Furthermore, if the large prize opening 331B is open, the drive unit for the shutter 333B is stopped and the large prize opening 331B is closed, provided that a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the large prize opening 331B was opened, or a predetermined number (10) of game balls have entered the large prize opening 331B.

After executing the jackpot opening/closing process in step S3211, step S3212 determines whether the value of the round counter RC1 is "0." Furthermore, step S3213 determines whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" or if the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the process of transitioning to the jackpot game state is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the round counter RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, in step S3214, the transition process at the end of the jackpot game is executed, and then the transition process to the main jackpot game state is terminated. The transition process at the end of the jackpot game in step S3214 will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 82.

(Transition process at the end of a jackpot game)
In the transition process at the end of a big win game, first, in step S3301, the high frequency support mode B flag is set in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404. As a result, the support mode of the electric accessory 93A is switched to the high frequency support mode B.

In the following step S3302, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a 6R jackpot or a 5RV jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether a 6R jackpot flag or a 5RV jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3302, the process proceeds to step S3303, where the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 is set to "6." This causes high-frequency support mode B to continue until the number of games played since the end of the jackpot game (more specifically, the number of games played related to the second operating port 92A) reaches six.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S3302, i.e., if the current jackpot game was triggered by a 10R jackpot, the process proceeds to step S3304, where the continuation counter is set to "100." This causes high-frequency support mode B to continue until the number of games played since the end of the jackpot game (more specifically, the number of games played related to second actuation port 92A) reaches 100.

After executing the processes of steps S3303 and S3304, the process proceeds to step S3305. In step S3305, the number of plays counter in the various counter area 434 is reset (cleared to 0). After that, the process proceeds to step S3306, where the various flags for the jackpot game state stored in the various flag storage area 435 are cleared, and the transition process at the end of the jackpot is completed.

(Basic gameplay flow)
Next, the basic game flow of the present pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to Fig. 83. Fig. 83 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state.

As already explained, in normal gameplay, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, there is no chance of the ball winning through the second actuation port 92A. For this reason, the player will shoot the game ball down the left route (a so-called left-handed shot) and play with the aim of winning through the first actuation port 91A.

If a win occurs in the first operating port 91A, a lottery is held based on that win. If the lottery results in a 6R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, the game transitions to a jackpot gaming state in which the variable winning device 83B opens and closes over multiple rounds. Because only game balls that flow down the right route can win in the variable winning device 83B, the player increases the amount of rotation of the game ball launch handle 41 to launch the game ball down the right route (so-called right-hand hit). After the jackpot gaming state ends, the game transitions to the chance zone (hereinafter referred to as the special gaming state), which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

The special gaming states include a first special gaming state in which the support mode of the electric device 93A becomes high-frequency support mode B and the reference number of game turns related to the second operating port 92A to end is 6, and a second special gaming state in which the support mode of the electric device 93A becomes high-frequency support mode B and the reference number of game turns related to the second operating port 92A to end is 100. After the jackpot gaming state triggered by a 6R jackpot ends, the game transitions to the first special gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state triggered by a 10R jackpot ends, the game transitions to the second special gaming state.

In the first special game state, the support mode changes to high-frequency support mode B, making it easier for a winning ball to be generated in the second actuation port 92A. Only game balls that flow down the right route can enter the second actuation port 92A. Therefore, when transitioning to the first special game state, a notification is issued urging the player to continue hitting the ball to the right even after the jackpot game has ended.

The first special game state and the second special game state will continue until the number of play times related to the second actuation port 92A reaches the above-mentioned termination reference number (6 or 100 times). However, as already explained, the lottery based on a win through the second actuation port 92A is favored to have a higher probability of a special win than the lottery based on a win through the first actuation port 91A, and the actual probability of winning, including a special win, will increase significantly from 1/200 to 1/10.

The special game states also include a fourth special game state in which the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode while a game turn related to the second actuation port 92A is executed in response to a hold related to the second actuation port 92A acquired during the first or second special game state. If none of the game turns in the first or second special game state result in a jackpot or special win (if all of the wins result in a miss), the game state will transition to the fourth special game state.

In this embodiment, the second actuation port 92A has a hold function that stores a maximum of four reserved items. Therefore, if four reserved items related to the second actuation port 92A are stored at the end of high-frequency support mode B, it will be possible to participate in four win/loss lotteries based on winning entries into the second actuation port 92A even after high-frequency support mode B ends. In other words, even if the support mode transitions to low-frequency support mode and normal play is in progress internally, the special play state is extended (continued) by the number of reserved items related to the second actuation port 92A at the end of high-frequency support mode B. Incidentally, the probability (continuation rate) of winning a special or jackpot during four win/loss lotteries related to the second actuation port 92A is approximately 35%. The total continuation rate, including the number of play times executed during the first special play state, is approximately 65%, and the total continuation rate, including the number of play times executed during the second special play state, is nearly 100%.

If all four spins during the fourth special gaming state result in a normal miss and all reserved balls related to the second operating port 92A are consumed, the game will return to the normal gaming state. In other words, if the reserved balls related to the second operating port 92A are used up without a special win or jackpot occurring, the game will be demoted from the special gaming state to the normal gaming state. In other words, the effective probability of winning will decrease from 1/10 to 1/200. In this case, the player will return to the left-handed launch mode of the gaming ball and play again, aiming for a jackpot based on the ball landing in the first operating port 91A.

In contrast, if a special win occurs in any of the first, second, or fourth special game states, the game will transition to a special win game state. In the special win game state, a special win game is executed in which the variable winning device 83B opens and closes in the high-frequency winning mode described above. Since only game balls that flow down the right route can win the variable winning device 83B, when a special win occurs, the player will play by hitting to the right. Then, if a V win occurs during the special win game, after the special win game ends, the game will transition to a V jackpot game state in which the variable winning device 83B opens and closes over multiple rounds (5 rounds).

Incidentally, when a special win game is played in a high-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the variable winning device 83B and the period during which a V win is permitted are longer than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 seconds), so as long as game balls continue to be fired toward the right route, a V win can easily occur.

After the V jackpot gaming state ends, the game will transition to the first special gaming state. Furthermore, if a jackpot occurs in any of the first, second, or fourth special gaming states, the game will transition to the jackpot gaming state. After the jackpot gaming state ends, if the jackpot gaming state was triggered by a 6R jackpot, the game will transition to the first special gaming state, and if the jackpot gaming state was triggered by a 10R jackpot, the game will transition to the second special gaming state. In this way, by repeatedly hitting jackpots and special jackpots during the special gaming states, the player has the opportunity to significantly increase their ball collection.

The special game states shown in this embodiment include a third special game state in which the support mode of the electric device 93A becomes high-frequency support mode A and the reference number of game turns for the second actuation port 92A becomes "1." In the third special game state, the support mode becomes high-frequency support mode A, making it easier for a winning ball to occur in the second actuation port 92A. Only game balls that flow down the right route can win in the second actuation port 92A. Therefore, when transitioning to the third special game state, a notification is issued urging the player to make a right hit.

When the V jackpot game state or the jackpot game state ends, the play count counter is reset, resetting the ceiling. In the first normal game state, if the number of plays reaches the ceiling, the game transitions to the third special game state.

The third special game state will continue until the number of play times related to the second actuation port 92A reaches the above-mentioned termination reference number (1 time). However, as already explained, the lottery based on a win through the second actuation port 92A is favored to have a higher probability of a special win than the lottery based on a win through the first actuation port 91A, and the actual probability of winning, including a special win, will increase significantly from 1/200 to 1/10.

If a special win occurs during the third special game state, the game will transition to the special win game state described above, and if a V win occurs during this special win game state, the game will transition to the V jackpot game state. After the V jackpot game state ends, the game will transition to the first special game state. Furthermore, if a jackpot occurs during the third special game state, the game will transition to the jackpot game state described above, and after the jackpot game state ends, the game will transition to the first or second special game state.

In contrast, if no play in the third special game state results in a jackpot or special win (all play results are losses), the game transitions to the fourth special game state. As already explained, this embodiment has a reserve function that stores a maximum of four reserved items for the second actuation port 92A. Therefore, if four reserved items related to the second actuation port 92A are stored at the end of high-frequency support mode A, it becomes possible to participate in four win/loss lotteries based on winnings in the second actuation port 92A even after high-frequency support mode A ends. In other words, even if the support mode transitions to low-frequency support mode and the game is in normal play internally, the special game state is extended (continued) by the number of reserved items related to the second actuation port 92A at the end of high-frequency support mode A. Incidentally, the probability (continuation rate) of winning a special win or jackpot during four win/loss lotteries related to the second actuation port 92A is approximately 35%. The total continuation rate, including the number of plays played during the third special game state, is approximately 40%.

If all four spins during the fourth special gaming state end in a miss and all reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A are consumed, the game will return to the normal gaming state. In other words, if the reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A are used up without a special win or jackpot occurring, the game will be demoted from the special gaming state to the normal gaming state. In this case, the player will return the game ball launch mode to left-handed shots and once again play, aiming for a jackpot based on the ball landing in the first actuation port 91A.

Note that if the game ball is launched toward the right route, winning through the first actuation port 91A is avoided. However, immediately after the transition to the special game mode, the reserved information related to the first actuation port 91A acquired during the normal game mode may remain, and the reserved information related to the second actuation port 92A may not have been acquired. Although the reserved information related to the second actuation port 92A is consumed preferentially over the reserved information related to the first actuation port 91A, if the reserved information related to the second actuation port 92A has not been acquired, a game round related to the first actuation port 91A may be executed in the special game mode. Although the degree of advantage for the lottery related to the second actuation port 92A is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery related to the first actuation port 91A, there is concern that ending the high-frequency support mode without executing a game round related to the second actuation port 92A or with an insufficient number of executions would be a significant disadvantage to the player. In this regard, in this embodiment, as already explained, the reference number of times for terminating the high frequency support mode is set for each actuation port, and even if a play round related to the first actuation port 91A is executed during the special game state, this prevents the high frequency support mode from ending before a play round related to the second actuation port 92A is executed.

In this embodiment, the chance zone (special game state) is configured to execute a special effect for the chance zone that is executed over multiple game rounds. Here, the underlying configuration for the special effect for the chance zone, specifically the pre-confirmation process executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as part of the winning process for the activation port (see step S2403 in Figure 73), will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 84.

(Pre-confirmation process)
In the preliminary confirmation process, first, in step S3401, the win/loss confirmation process is performed by referring to the win/loss determination table for the operating port and the value of the win random number counter C1 acquired in step S2403. Specifically, it is determined whether the reserved information acquired this time corresponds to a jackpot or a special win.

If it corresponds to a jackpot, a positive judgment is made in step S3402 and the process proceeds to step S3403, where information indicating a jackpot is stored in RAM 404 and the information indicating a jackpot is stored in a pending command to be sent to the notification/performance control device 140.

If it corresponds to a special win, a negative determination is made in step S3402 and a positive determination is made in step S3404, and the process proceeds to step S3405. In step S3405, information indicating a special win is stored in RAM 404, and the information indicating a special win is stored in a pending command to be sent to the notification/performance control device 140.

If the result corresponds to a miss, a negative determination is made in steps S3402 and S3404, and the pre-check process is terminated.

The MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 is able to determine in advance whether a jackpot or special win will occur from the information contained in the hold command received from the main control device 162.

As already explained, in this embodiment, if the number of plays executed after the special game state (more specifically, the jackpot game state or the V jackpot game state) ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game will transition to the third special game state. This third special game state corresponds to high frequency support mode A, and by acquiring hold information related to the second actuation port 92A during the third special game state, the special effects for the chance zone can be executed across the third special game state, the fourth special game state, and so on.

The special effects for the chance zone are composed of three parts: an opening part that encourages the player to fire a game ball toward the second operating port 92A; a main part in which the effect content is determined based on the results of all game turns executed in the third special game state and the fourth special game state to which it immediately transitions; and an ending part that functions as a transition to the special game state after the win/loss result is revealed. The opening part begins when the turn in which the ceiling is reached ends, transitions to the main part when the first turn in the third special game state begins, and transitions to the ending part when that turn ends. The ending part then ends when the fourth special game state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state.

In this embodiment, a design is made to ensure sufficient execution time for the main part of the special effect for the chance zone, while avoiding an excessively long ending part. Specifically, for a game involving second actuation port 92A that is executed after the number of games executed after the special game state has ended reaches the ceiling, a special variable display time table is referenced as a table for determining the variable display time. In more detail, the variable display time table for determining the variable display time for a game involving second actuation port 92A that is executed immediately after the ceiling is reached is provided separately from the variable display time table referenced when determining the variable display time in other cases.

As shown in the schematic diagram of Figure 85, the variable display time is set to "60 seconds" for the game involving the second actuation port 92A that is executed immediately after the ceiling is reached (e.g., the 201st game). The variable display time is set to "0.5 seconds" for the four game plays (the same number as the reserved upper limit for the second actuation port 92A) that are executed thereafter (e.g., the 202nd to 205th game plays). In other words, the variable display time for the game involving the second actuation port 92A that is executed immediately after the ceiling is reached is longer than the sum of the variable display times for the four game plays that are executed thereafter. This is a design that ensures video playback time, reduces the data volume for special effects for the chance zone, and avoids insufficient reserved balls for the second actuation port 92A, while also preventing the ending part from dragging on.

Next, we will provide additional information about the flow of play when entering the chance zone, with reference to Figure 86. Figure 86 is a timing chart showing the flow of play when entering the chance zone, and illustrates an example of a special win in the chance zone.

(Game flow when entering the chance zone)
At timing tf1 during the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the 199th game round begins after the special game state ends, and at timing tf2, the 200th game round begins after the special game state ends, i.e., the game round in which the ceiling is reached. Both of these game rounds correspond to miss results. In the game round in which the ceiling is reached, the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling being reached (the "1,""3," and "4" symbols) is displayed frozen on the display screen 95a (on the pay line) of the symbol display device 95, and the player is informed that reaching the ceiling will trigger a transition to the chance zone.

At tf3, when the number of play times that reach the ceiling has ended, the support mode switches to high-frequency support mode A, and an opening part of the special effect for the chance zone corresponding to the chance zone (third special game state) begins on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95. Specifically, at tf3, the number of reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A is "0," and play in the chance zone enters a waiting state until a winning ball is entered into the second actuation port 92A. In the opening part, the display screen 95a displays the message "If you can catch the fairy, you'll get a bonus," indicating the start of the chance zone, and the background music switches to that corresponding to the chance zone. Then, at tf3, a message (right-hit notification) urging the player to fire the game ball toward the right route begins.

After that, at timing tf4 when a win occurs in the second actuation port 92A, the special effect for the chance zone transitions from the opening part to the main part. As a result, a fairy character and a girl character chasing the fairy character are displayed on the display screen 95a. In this embodiment, after the transition to the main part, a predetermined waiting time elapses before the final display (result display) in the main part is determined. In other words, it is determined at a predetermined timing during the main part whether the result display will indicate that the fairy has been successfully captured, or that the fairy has not been captured.

In the example shown in Figure 86, the number of reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A reaches its upper limit at tf5 during the main part, more specifically, at a timing before the above-mentioned specified timing, and the fourth of these reserved balls corresponds to a special win. Therefore, at the end of the main part, a result display is executed indicating that the fairy has been successfully captured, clearly informing the player that they have won. The right-hit notification described above ends at tf5, when the number of reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A reaches its upper limit.

After that, at timing tf6 when the game in the third special game state ends, the support mode switches from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode, and the special effect for the chance zone transitions to the ending part. If the electric device 93A is in the open state at timing tf6, it will be forcibly switched to the closed state, preventing further winnings into the second operating port 92A.

After the transition from the third special game state to the fourth special game state, any remaining reserves related to the second actuation port 92A are quickly consumed at times tf6, tf7, tf8, and tf9. In the example shown in Figure 86, the last play associated with the second actuation port 92A corresponds to a special win, and the transition to the special win game state occurs at time tf10 when that play ends. At time tf10, the special effect for the chance zone (more specifically, the ending part) ends, and the effect for the special win game state is executed.

According to the fifth embodiment described above, if the number of play times (play count) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a winning result, the game transitions to a third special game state corresponding to high frequency support mode A. In high frequency support mode A, winning is possible through the second actuation port 92A, and the determination (lottery) based on winning through the second actuation port 92A can result in not only a jackpot result but also a special win result. This significantly increases the advantage in the determination (probability of winning). In other words, reaching the ceiling transitions to a chance zone, which has a higher advantage than the previous game state. A configuration in which transition to the chance zone occurs when the ceiling is reached in this way can effectively stimulate the player's desire to play. This is advantageous for preventing the game from becoming monotonous and increasing attention to the game.

When the ceiling is reached, a winning entry into the second operating port 92A not only prevents the loss of balls, but also increases the probability of transitioning to a special game state (jackpot game state or special win game state). With this configuration, the benefits of high frequency support mode A can be effectively utilized even if the stay period in mode A is shortened, thereby effectively preventing gameplay from dragging on after the ceiling is reached.

The number of plays required to reach the ceiling is reset when High Frequency Support Mode A, which was triggered by reaching the ceiling, ends. This configuration is preferable because it makes the ceiling shallow and reduces the benefit of the ceiling, thereby realizing a configuration in which a weaker ceiling function is exerted in short cycles. In other words, it is preferable for preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

The number of plays related to the termination reference number is counted when a play related to the second actuation port 92A is executed. This configuration prevents the benefits of reaching the ceiling from being fully enjoyed.

The probability of a special winning result in the lottery based on winning through the second actuation port 92A is 1/10, and is set to a number equal to the sum of the maximum number of reserved information items that can be stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb and the above-mentioned termination reference number, plus the reciprocal of the above-mentioned probability. By setting the maximum number of reserved information items and the termination reference number in this way, the effect of generating the above-mentioned chance zones in short cycles and preventing the game from becoming monotonous can be more effectively achieved.

<Modification 1>
In the fifth embodiment, the reference number of times to terminate the third special game state, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, is set to be smaller (1 time) than the reference number of times to terminate the first special game state, which is triggered by a special win (6 times), but this is not limited to this.The reference number of times to terminate the third special game state, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, may be set to be larger than the reference number of times to terminate the first special game state, which is triggered by a special win, or the reference number of times to terminate the first special game state, which is triggered by a special win, and the reference number of times to terminate the third special game state, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, may be set to be the same.

<Modification 2>
In the fifth embodiment, the reference number of times for ending the third special game state, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, is set to be smaller (1 time) than the reference number of times for ending the first special game state, which is triggered by a jackpot (6 times), and the reference number of times for ending the second special game state, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling (100 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The reference number of times for ending the third special game state, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, may be set to be larger than the reference number of times for ending the first special game state, which is triggered by a jackpot, and the reference number of times for ending the second special game state. Alternatively, the reference number of times for ending the first special game state, which is triggered by a jackpot, and the reference number of times for ending the second special game state may be set to be the same as the reference number of times for ending the third special game state, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling.

<Modification 3>
In the fifth embodiment described above, when a special win occurs, the variable winning device 83B is opened in a high frequency winning mode, which essentially confirms a V win. However, it is also possible to provide a first special win in which the variable winning device 83B is opened in a high frequency winning mode, which essentially confirms a V win, and a second special win in which the variable winning device 83B is opened in a low frequency winning mode, which essentially makes a V win impossible.

<Modification 4>
In the fifth embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery based on winning the first actuation port is 1/200, and the number of games required to reach the ceiling is 200. In other words, the number of games required to reach the ceiling is set to the reciprocal of the winning probability. However, it is also possible to change this and set the number of games required to reach the ceiling to an integer smaller than the reciprocal of the winning probability (for example, 50, 100, or 150).

<Modification 5>
In the normal game mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the game progresses based on the winning of the first actuation port 91A. In this case, the probability of a jackpot result is 1/200, and the number of plays required to reach the ceiling is set to the reciprocal of that probability. This can be changed to set the number of plays required to reach the ceiling to a number less than the reciprocal of that probability. Setting the number of plays required to reach the ceiling in this way can more effectively generate the chance zones in short cycles, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

Sixth Embodiment
In the fifth embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot or special prize during the special game state (chance zone) triggered by reaching the ceiling is set to approximately 40%, and even if a transition to the chance zone is triggered by reaching the ceiling, approximately half of the time the chance zone will end without winning either a jackpot or a special prize. In other words, by setting a low ceiling, the frequency of transition to the chance zone triggered by reaching the ceiling is increased, while the advantage in the chance zone is prevented from becoming excessively high, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous. This embodiment differs from the fifth embodiment in that the ceiling is raised while the player's rescue function is enhanced by increasing the benefit upon reaching the ceiling. Below, we will explain the distinctive features of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the fifth embodiment. First, we will explain the win/loss table for the operating port with reference to Figure 87.

(Actuator port pass/fail table)
As shown in Figure 87(a), in the win/lose table that is referenced in the lottery based on winning the first actuation port 91A, the random number values that result in a jackpot (i.e., winning information) are "7,""307," and "507," a total of three. In other words, of the values of the win random number counter C1, which range from "0 to 599,""7,""307," and "507" correspond to a jackpot. And, all random number values that do not correspond to a jackpot correspond to a miss (normal miss). This makes the probability of a jackpot 1/200.

As shown in Figure 87(b), in the win/loss table referenced in the lottery based on winning at the second actuation port 92A, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are three: "7", "307", and "507". In other words, of the values of the win random number counter C1 ranging from "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to a jackpot. Furthermore, in this win/loss table, a total of 120 values correspond to special wins: "3", "5", "13", "15", "23", "25", ... "583", "585", "593", and "595". Furthermore, all random number values that do not correspond to either a jackpot or a special win correspond to a miss (normal miss). As a result, the probability of a jackpot is 1/200 and the probability of a special win is 1/5.

In this embodiment, the lottery results based on winning at the first actuation port 91A and the second actuation port 92A do not include the special loss shown in the first embodiment. However, this is not limited to this, and the lottery results based on winning at the first actuation port 91A may be configured to result in a special loss, or the lottery results based on winning at the second actuation port 92A may be configured to result in a special loss, or the lottery results based on winning at both the first actuation port 91A and the second actuation port 92A may be configured to result in a special loss.

In the case of a 6R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, after the special game state (jackpot game state) ends, the game state transitions to a game state (first special game state or second special game state) in which the support mode of the electric device 93A becomes high frequency support mode B, similar to the fifth embodiment. However, as shown in FIG. 88, in the case of a 6R jackpot, the termination reference number is set to "1 time," and in the case of a 10R jackpot, the termination reference number is set to "3 times."

Furthermore, similar to the fifth embodiment, if the sequence goes from special win → special win gaming state → V win → 5RV jackpot, after the special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) ends, the game state transitions to a gaming state (first special gaming state) in which the support mode provided by the electric device 93A becomes high-frequency support mode B. However, if a 5RV jackpot occurs, the above-mentioned termination reference number is set to "1 time."

In other words, in the case of a 5RV jackpot or 6R jackpot, the winning probability will be increased for a total of five times, which is the standard number of times to end (1 time) plus the upper limit of the number of reserved balls stored for second operating port 92A (4 times). The probability of winning a jackpot or special ball during this time is approximately 67%. Furthermore, in the case of a 10R jackpot, the winning probability will be increased for a total of seven times, which is the standard number of times to end (3 times) plus the upper limit of the number of reserved balls stored for second operating port 92A (4 times). The probability of winning a jackpot or special ball during this time is approximately 80%.

In this embodiment, similar to the first embodiment, if the number of games executed after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game state transitions to a game state compatible with high-frequency support mode A (third special game state). This game state compatible with high-frequency support mode A continues until the number of games executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends, more specifically the number of games related to the second actuation port 92A, reaches the termination reference number (time-saving number: 100 in this embodiment), and when the termination reference number is reached, the game state transitions to a game state compatible with low-frequency support mode (normal game state).

In the normal game state for High Frequency Support Mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the winning probability is increased for a total of 104 times, which is the standard number of times to end (100 times) plus the upper limit of the number of reserved balls stored for second operating port 92A (4 times). During this time, the probability of winning a jackpot or special prize is nearly 100%, and as the winning probability is increased by reaching the ceiling, the chance of winning a jackpot or special prize in the chance zone is high.

In this embodiment, the number of plays required to reach the ceiling is set to 600, and if the ceiling is reached and a transition to a gaming state compatible with high frequency support mode A occurs, the ceiling is reset when that gaming state ends (the play count counter is cleared to 0). In other words, the system is configured to transition to the chance zone every 600 plays.

(Basic gameplay flow)
Next, the basic game flow of the present pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to Fig. 89. Fig. 89 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state.

In normal gameplay, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, there is no chance of the ball winning through the second actuation port 92A. Therefore, the player will shoot the game ball down the left route (a so-called left-handed shot) and play with the aim of winning through the first actuation port 91A.

If a win occurs in the first operating port 91A, a lottery is held based on that win. If the lottery results in a 6R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, the game transitions to a jackpot gaming state in which the variable winning device 83B opens and closes over multiple rounds. Because only game balls that flow down the right route can win in the variable winning device 83B, the player increases the amount of rotation of the game ball launch handle 41 to launch the game ball down the right route (so-called right-hand hit). After the jackpot gaming state ends, the game transitions to the chance zone (special gaming state) described above, which is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state.

The special game states include a first special game state in which the support mode of the electric device 93A becomes high-frequency support mode B and the reference number of game turns related to the second actuation port 92A to end is 1; a second special game state in which the support mode of the electric device 93A becomes high-frequency support mode B and the reference number of game turns related to the second actuation port 92A to end is 3; a third special game state in which the support mode of the electric device 93A becomes high-frequency support mode A and the reference number of game turns related to the second actuation port 92A to end is 100; and a fourth special game state in which a game turn related to the second actuation port 92A is executed based on a hold related to the second actuation port 92A obtained during the first to third special game states.

After the jackpot game state triggered by a 6R jackpot ends, the system transitions to the first special game state. After the jackpot game state triggered by a 10R jackpot ends, the system transitions to the second special game state. After a V win occurs during the special jackpot game state triggered by a special win and the 5RV jackpot game state ends, the system transitions to the first special game state. If the number of plays executed after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling: 600 plays), the system transitions to the third special game state. If the number of plays executed in the first to third special game states reaches the above-mentioned termination threshold number without winning either a jackpot or a special win (all plays result in misses), the system transitions to the fourth special game state.

The first to third special game states will continue until the number of play times related to the second actuation port 92A reaches the aforementioned termination reference number (1 time, 3 times, 100 times). However, the lottery based on winning through the second actuation port 92A is favored to have a higher probability of winning a special prize than the lottery based on winning through the first actuation port 91A, and the actual probability of winning, including a special prize, will increase significantly from 1/200 to 1/5.

By the way, the probability (continuation rate) of winning a special or big win during the four draws related to the second operating port 92A is approximately 60%. The total continuation rate, including the number of plays played during the first special game state, is approximately 67%, the total continuation rate, including the number of plays played during the second special game state, is approximately 80%, and the total continuation rate, including the number of plays played during the third special game state, is nearly 100%.

According to the sixth embodiment described above, if the number of play times (play count) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a winning result, the game transitions to a third special game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. Even if high-frequency support mode A is entered, if the probability of a winning result remains low, the following inconveniences may occur. That is, even if the ceiling is reached, the period until the player receives the full benefit expected by the player (transition to the special game state) may be extended, or the chance zone including high-frequency support mode A may end before the full benefit is obtained (a rush-through occurs). This is undesirable because it significantly reduces the player's motivation to play. In this regard, with the configuration shown in this embodiment, switching from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode enables a win in the second actuation port 92A, and the determination (lottery) based on the win in the second actuation port 92A may result in not only a jackpot but also a special win. In other words, the probability of winning (the probability of transitioning to the special game state) is significantly increased by reaching the ceiling. Furthermore, the sum (e.g., 104) of the maximum number of reserved information items that can be stored in the second actuation port reserved area Rb (e.g., 4) and the reference number of times to end the game (e.g., 100) is set to be equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability of a winning result, thereby effectively realizing a configuration in which a transition to a special game state is highly likely or virtually guaranteed when the ceiling is reached. This effectively prevents the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences.

Furthermore, if there is a limit on the number of plays that can be played in high-frequency support mode A, triggered by reaching the ceiling, for example, there is a greater concern about the above-mentioned rushing. In this regard, the above configuration can mitigate the impact of the limit on the number of plays when the ceiling is reached. In other words, even when high-frequency support mode A, which has a limit on the number of plays when the ceiling is reached, is adopted, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be effectively prevented.

When switching from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A, the probability of winning can be significantly increased. This is advantageous in that it allows for the relief function when the ceiling is reached as described above to be utilized, shortening the duration of stay in high-frequency support mode A and preventing the delay until the sufficient benefit is granted.

If a jackpot result is achieved in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the game will transition through the special gaming state and then to the first or second special gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode B. In this characteristic configuration, the reference number of times for terminating high-frequency support mode B, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, is greater than the reference number of times for terminating high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special win result, and transitioning to the special gaming state when the ceiling is reached is favored. With this configuration, the effectiveness of the rescue function described above can be optimally demonstrated.

In a configuration in which high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, and high-frequency support mode B, which is triggered by a winning result, are both executed based on a winning entry into second actuation port 92A, the same bonus will be awarded if a winning result is achieved during high-frequency support mode. To increase player satisfaction, it is preferable to increase the bonus awarded when a winning result is achieved. However, there is a concern that this will increase the benefits expected when the ceiling is reached, making the relief function of reaching the ceiling overly powerful. This concern is particularly likely to be exacerbated in a configuration in which reaching the ceiling highly likely or virtually guarantees a transition to a special game state, as described above. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, by setting the upper limit number of plays (ceiling) greater than the reciprocal of the probability of a jackpot result (1/200), the benefits expected from reaching the ceiling can be increased while reducing the number of opportunities to reach the ceiling, thereby eliminating the above-mentioned concerns.

<Modification 1>
According to the sixth embodiment, the reference number of times to end the third special game state, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, is set so that the probability of winning a jackpot or special win during the special game state is nearly 100%, but this is not limited to this. The reference number of times to end the third special game state, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, may be set so that the probability of winning a jackpot or special win during the special game state is 95% or more (preferably 99% or more).

<Modification 2>
In order to realize a configuration in which the next jackpot is highly likely when the ceiling is reached, the following configuration is also possible: That is, the game count counter may be reset when the ceiling is reached, and the number of games required to reach the ceiling may be the same as the reference number of times to end the third special game state to which the game state transitions upon reaching the ceiling, or the reference number of times to end the third special game state to which the game state transitions upon reaching the ceiling may be greater than the number of games required to reach the ceiling.

<Modification 3>
When a special win occurs in the third special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A, which is entered upon reaching the ceiling, the display time of the variable image on the second actuation port display unit D2 may be shortened compared to when a special win occurs under other circumstances. By shortening the display time when a special win occurs during the fourth special game state and shortening the time required to enter the special game state, the player can quickly enjoy the benefits he or she expects.

<Modification 4>
Compared to the special game state (first or second special game state) corresponding to high-frequency support mode B, which is triggered by a jackpot or special win, the special game state (third special game state) corresponding to high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, may be configured to provide stronger support from the electric device 93A (e.g., a longer period of time in the open state). With this configuration, in high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the frequency of winning entries into the second actuation port 92A increases, and the number of reserved information items stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb increases. Therefore, the display time of the image variation on the actuation port display unit D2 in the game round after reaching the ceiling (the operating period of the game round operation) is shortened, which effectively prevents the period from reaching the ceiling until the above-mentioned benefits can be enjoyed from being extended.

Seventh Embodiment
One of the features of this embodiment is that it is designed to prevent the game from becoming monotonous when a 6R normal jackpot occurs and the game transitions to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode B. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a left-right symmetrical gauge (see FIG. 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) is a left-right asymmetrical gauge. The game board unit 80A will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a front view of the game board unit 80A.

The gaming board 80aA has multiple large and small openings that run through it in its thickness direction (front-to-back direction). Each opening is equipped with a general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83A, a through gate 84A, etc. When gaming balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating opening unit 82A, or the variable winning device 83A, they are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided corresponding to each winning section, and based on the detection results, the player is awarded a prize such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of gaming balls). In addition, an outlet 86 is provided at the bottom of the gaming board 80aA, and gaming balls that do not enter the various winning sections are discharged from the gaming area PE through the outlet 86.

In addition, numerous game pins 87 are planted on the game board 80aA to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills are also arranged. These game pins 87, windmills, and other components differentiate the flow path of the game balls, and are adjusted so that winning the above-mentioned general winning slot 81, etc. occurs with an appropriate probability.

Like the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, the operating port unit 82A is composed of a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A arranged directly below the first operating port 91A. In particular, the second operating port 92A is equipped with an electric device 93A that functions as an opening/closing type ball-scoring assistance device (ball-scoring assistance means) or opening/closing member (opening/closing means).

A center frame 96A is provided on the gaming board 80aA, surrounding the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the gaming board 80aA, and similar to the first embodiment, the center frame 96A broadly divides the flow path of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area PE into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that bypasses it from the left side. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first actuation port 91A, second actuation port 92A, variable entry device 83A, and through gate 84A has been changed so that game balls launched down the left route can enter the first actuation port 91A and second actuation port 92A but cannot enter the variable entry device 83A or through gate 84A, and game balls launched down the right route can enter the second actuation port 92A, through gate 84A, and variable entry device 83A but cannot enter the first actuation port 91A. Note that it may also be configured so that game balls launched down the left route cannot enter the second actuation port 92A.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right and left routes depending on the game situation, it is possible to advance the game to an advantage. By encouraging such technical intervention, monotony in the game is prevented.

(Reserved ball storage area)
Here, in this embodiment, the configuration for storing the reserved information based on winnings in the actuation ports 91A and 92A is different from that in the first embodiment. Below, the configuration for storing the reserved information in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 91.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment has a first actuation port reserve area Ra that stores the values of the win random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a win occurs in the first actuation port 91A, and a second actuation port reserve area Rb that stores the values of the win random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a win occurs in the second actuation port 92A.

The first actuation port holding area Ra is made up of areas 1 to 4, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the first actuation port 91A, the numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of area 1 → area 2 → area 3 → area 4. The second actuation port holding area Rb is made up of areas 1 to 4, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the second actuation port 92A, the numerical information (hold information) is stored in chronological order in the order of area 1 → area 2 → area 3 → area 4.

In this embodiment, if reserved information is stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb, the reserved information stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb (more specifically, the first area) is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. If reserved information is not stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb but reserved information is stored in the first actuation port reserve area Ra, the reserved information stored in the first actuation port reserve area Ra (more specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, a special loss can occur in either the lottery based on winning the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92. However, in this embodiment, a special loss can occur in only one of the lotteries based on winning the first actuation port 91 or the second actuation port 92, which is different from the first embodiment. Below, the win/loss table for the actuation port in this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figures 92 and 93.

(Actuator port pass/fail table)
As shown in Figure 92, the hit/fail tables for the first operating port include a hit/fail table for low probability mode (a group of hit/fail information for low probability) and a hit/fail table for high probability mode (a group of hit/fail information for high probability).

When the low-probability mode hit/miss table (Figure 92(a)) is referenced in the lottery based on the winning of the first actuation port 91A, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are six: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, of the hit random number counter C1 values from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, when the high-probability mode hit/miss table (Figure 92(b)) is referenced in the lottery, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107", ... "597". In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values from "0 to 599," "7," "37," "57," "77," "97," "107," ... "597" correspond to jackpot results. All random number values that do not correspond to jackpot results correspond to losing results (specifically, normal losing results). In other words, in a lottery based on winning through the first actuation port 91A, the "special losing" results shown in the first embodiment do not occur.

As shown in Figure 93, the hit/fail tables for the second operating port include a hit/fail table for low probability mode (a group of hit/fail information for low probability) and a hit/fail table for high probability mode (a group of hit/fail information for high probability).

When the low-probability mode hit/miss table (Figure 93(a)) is referenced in the lottery based on the entry into the second actuation port 92A, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are six: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, of the hit random number counter C1 values from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, when the high-probability mode hit/miss table (Figure 93(b)) is referenced in the lottery, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107", ... "597". In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values from 0 to 599, "7," "37," "57," "77," "97," "107," ... "597" correspond to a jackpot result. Furthermore, in a situation where the low-probability mode winning/losing table and the high-probability mode winning/losing table are referenced during the lottery based on winning through the second operating port 92A, the random number values resulting in a special loss (i.e., special loss information) are all 60, including "5," "15," "25," "35," ... "585," and "595." In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values from 0 to 599, "5," "15," "25," "35," ... "585," and "595" correspond to a special loss result. Furthermore, all random number values that do not correspond to either a jackpot or a special loss correspond to a loss result (specifically, a normal loss result).

In this way, in this embodiment, a lottery based on a win at the first operating port 91A does not result in a special loss, and the winning destination corresponding to a special loss is limited to the second operating port 92A, which is equipped with the electric device 93A.

The allocation tables provided are an allocation table for the first actuation port (see Figure 94(a)) and an allocation table for the second actuation port (see Figure 94(b)). For the allocation table for the first actuation port, of the type counter C2 values of "0-29", "0-14" corresponds to a 6R normal jackpot A, and "15-29" corresponds to a 6R special jackpot. For the allocation table for the second actuation port, of the type counter C2 values of "0-29", "0-14" corresponds to a 6R normal jackpot B, and "15-29" corresponds to a 6R special jackpot.

Here, we will compare various types of jackpots with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 95. When a 6R probability jackpot occurs, after the special gaming state ends, the game transitions to a second normal gaming state in which the lottery mode corresponds to the high probability mode and the support mode corresponds to the high frequency support mode B. This second normal gaming state continues until the next jackpot occurs.

If a 6R normal jackpot A or 6R normal jackpot B occurs, the game will transition to the third normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode B, after the special game state ends. As already explained, after transitioning to the third normal game state, if the number of plays executed during the third normal game state reaches the termination reference number, the game will transition to the first normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. In other words, a limit is placed on the number of plays in the third normal game state. In this embodiment, the count of the number of plays during the third normal game state is limited to the number of plays executed based on a win in the second actuation port 92A.

In the case of a 6R normal jackpot A, the termination reference number is set to "10 times," and in the case of a 6R normal jackpot B, the termination reference number is set to "20 times." As already explained, the storage limit for the number of reserved items related to second actuation port 92A is "4." In other words, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot A, the number of plays related to second actuation port 92A will be executed a maximum of 14 times, which is the termination reference number of "10 times" plus the reserved limit of "4 times." In the case of a 6R normal jackpot B, the number of plays related to second actuation port 92A will be executed a maximum of 24 times, which is the termination reference number of "20 times" plus the reserved limit of "4 times."

One of the features of this embodiment is that if a special miss occurs during a limited-time high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode termination criteria count is overwritten (reset), effectively extending the high-frequency support mode. Below, with reference to Figure 96, we will explain the processing required to achieve this function, specifically the support mode switching processing, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Support mode switching process)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S3501, it is determined whether the current support mode is high frequency support mode A or high frequency support mode B. If the determination in step S3501 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S3502. In step S3502, it is determined whether a number limit flag is stored in the various flags storage area 435 of RAM 404. If the determination in step S3502 is negative, the switching process is terminated. If the determination in step S3502 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S3503.

In step S3503, it is determined whether the lottery result for this game is a special miss. If a negative determination is made in step S3503, the process proceeds to step S3506. In step S3506, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1." In the following step S3507, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0." If a negative determination is made in step S3507, the switching process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S3507, the process proceeds to step S3508, where the high-frequency support mode flag (more specifically, the high-frequency support mode A flag and the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the number-limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are cleared, and the switching process is terminated. By clearing the high-frequency support mode flag, the support mode is switched from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S3503, if a positive judgment is made in step S3503, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flags storage area 435 of RAM 404. At this time, if the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flags storage area 435 of RAM 404, the high-frequency support mode B flag is erased. Note that the number-limit flag stored in the various flags storage area 435 of RAM 404 is retained as is. As a result, the support mode provided by the electric role device 93A becomes high-frequency support mode A.

In the following step S3505, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is overwritten (reset), and the switching process ends. Specifically, the continuation count counter is set to "20." This effectively extends the high frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S3501, if a negative judgment is made in step S3501, the process proceeds to step S3509. In step S3509, it is determined whether the lottery result for this game is a special miss. If a negative judgment is made in step S3509, the switching process ends. If a positive judgment is made in step S3509, the process proceeds to step S3510. In step S3510, a high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. This switches the support mode provided by the electric device 93A to high-frequency support mode A. In the next step S3511, a count limit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in step S3512, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set, and the switching process ends. Specifically, the continuation count counter is set to "20". As a result, high-frequency support mode A will continue until 20 games related to second actuation port 92A have been played.

(Game flow)
Here, the game flow will be explained with reference to Fig. 97. Fig. 97 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state.

The first normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, is composed of a main stage and a special stage (mission stage). The main stage is the stage where the player stays when a game round based on a win at the first actuation port 91A is executed, and the special stage is the stage where the player stays when a game round based on a win at the second actuation port 92A is executed.

More specifically, the special stage is a stage where the player temporarily stays when transitioning from the third normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and high frequency support mode B or the fourth normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and high frequency support mode A to the first normal game state, and the upper limit of the number of play times executed matches the upper limit of the number of reserved information stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb. In other words, immediately after transitioning from the third normal game state or the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the player will transition to the special stage provided that reserved information related to the second actuation port 92A is stored. If there is no jackpot or special miss in this special stage, i.e., if all reserved information related to the second actuation port 92A ends up being normal misses, the player will transition from the special stage to the main stage.

As described above, the first normal game state corresponds to the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, even if a game ball is fired down the right route and a support win occurs, it will effectively be prevented from entering the second actuation port 92A. Furthermore, game balls fired down the right route cannot enter the first actuation port 91A, making it difficult to participate in a lottery based on winning through actuation ports 91A and 92A. On the other hand, game balls fired down the left route will be prevented from entering the second actuation port 92A, but may enter the first actuation port 91A. For these reasons, the game can be played in a way that gives the player an advantage by aiming for the left route rather than the right route. If a game ball is fired down the right route during the first game state, a warning is issued urging the player to return the ball to the left route.

If a 6R jackpot is drawn during the first normal game state, the game will transition through a special game state to the second normal game state, which corresponds to a high probability mode and high frequency support mode B. The second normal game state corresponds to high frequency support mode B, and by firing game balls along the right route, the player can play while minimizing investment (loss of balls). During the second normal game state, game balls fired along the right route enter the second actuation port 92A, and gameplay progresses mainly around the play times related to the second actuation port 92A. As described above, in the lottery based on a ball entering the second actuation port 92A, there is an approximately 1/10 probability of a special miss, but a special miss during the second normal game state is invalid and treated as a normal miss. In other words, even if a special miss occurs during the second normal game state, the special miss does not trigger a transition to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to a low probability mode and high frequency support mode A.

If a 6R normal jackpot is achieved in the lottery during the first normal game state or the second normal game state, the game will transition through a special game state to the third normal game state, which is a low probability mode and corresponds to high frequency support mode B. The third normal game state corresponds to high frequency support mode B, and by firing game balls along the right route, the player can play while minimizing investment (loss of balls in hand).

During the third normal game state, a game ball launched along the right route will enter the second actuation port 92A, and gameplay will progress mainly around the play times associated with the second actuation port 92A. As described above, in the lottery based on a ball entering the second actuation port 92A, there is approximately a 1 in 10 chance of a special miss. If a special miss occurs during the third normal game state, the support mode switches from high frequency support mode B to high frequency support mode A, and the termination threshold number is set to "20." In other words, the game will transition from the third normal game state to the fourth normal game state.

If a 6R jackpot occurs during the fourth normal game state, the game will transition through a special game state to the second normal game state, which is compatible with high probability mode and high frequency support mode B. On the other hand, if a special miss occurs during the fourth normal game state, the termination reference number of times is reset to "20," and the fourth normal game state is extended. In this way, if the fourth normal game state can be looped, the player can play while minimizing the loss of balls (investment).

If play progresses during the fourth normal game state without resulting in either a jackpot or a special miss, and the number of plays executed (more specifically, the number of plays related to the second actuation port 92A) reaches the reference number of times to end (20 plays), the game will transition to the first normal game state. More specifically, if the number of reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A is "0", the game will transition to the main stage, and if the number of reserved balls related to the second actuation port 92A is other than "0", the game will transition to the special stage.

In the special stage, a lottery based on winning at the second actuation port 92A will be held for the number of reserved balls. If the lottery based on winning at the second actuation port 92A results in a special miss, the game will transition to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A.

According to the seventh embodiment described above, if a normal jackpot result is achieved in the first normal gaming state, the game transitions to the third normal gaming state via the special gaming state. The third normal gaming state corresponds to the high-frequency support mode B, and the decrease in balls is suppressed by increasing the number of winning balls entering the second actuation port 92A. A limit is set for the number of times the third normal gaming state can be played, and if the number of play times in the third normal gaming state reaches the termination reference number (first termination reference number), the game transitions to the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. This makes it difficult for balls to enter the second actuation port 92A. Here, in the lottery based on winning balls entering the second actuation port 92A, a special miss result may occur. If a special miss result is achieved in the third normal gaming state, the game transitions to the fourth normal gaming state without passing through the special gaming state. The fourth normal gaming state corresponds to high frequency support mode A, and like the third normal gaming state, the game rounds associated with the second actuation port 92A are executed, and this state continues until the number of executed game rounds reaches the termination reference number (second termination reference number). Here, when transitioning from the third normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state, the game rounds associated with the second actuation port 92A continue to progress. This makes it possible to aim for a jackpot while minimizing the loss of balls. By realizing game diversification in this way, it can contribute to increasing attention to the game.

If a special miss occurs during the fourth normal game state, the termination reference number of times (second termination reference number of times) is reset. In other words, the fourth normal game state loops. This loop does not go through the special game state, so gameplay progresses smoothly even if the loop is repeated.

The second termination reference number is set to be the same as the first termination reference number. This prevents the player from suffering a substantial loss when the third normal game state transitions to the fourth normal game state, depending on the timing of the special miss result (the number of times the result is determined). This is preferable for diversifying the game using the loop function described above and effectively increasing the game's attention.

In the fourth normal gaming state, the probability of a special miss result (1/10) is set higher than the probability of a jackpot result (1/100). This configuration makes it less likely that the loop function described above will not function properly due to frequent jackpots, etc.

<Modification 1>
In the seventh embodiment, when a special miss occurs during the limited-time high-frequency support mode B, the game switches to the high-frequency support mode A and the termination reference number is reset. However, this is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which a lottery for a special miss is not conducted during the high-frequency support mode B, or the special miss may be invalidated (treated the same as a normal miss). In other words, when a special miss occurs during the high-frequency support mode A, the high-frequency support mode A is maintained and the termination reference number is overwritten (reset). On the other hand, when a special miss occurs during the high-frequency support mode B, the high-frequency support mode B is maintained and the termination reference number is not overwritten (reset). In such a configuration, when a transition to the third normal game state occurs, a transition to the fourth normal game state occurs if a special miss occurs during the game number related to the remaining reservation of the second actuation port 92A, which is executed after the third normal game state ends.

<Modification 2>
In the seventh embodiment, the termination reference number of times (20 times) set in the case of a special miss is greater than the termination reference number of times (10 times) set in the case of a 6R normal jackpot A (first hit), but this is not limited to this. For example, the termination reference number of times set in the case of a 6R normal jackpot A (first hit) and the termination reference number of times set in the case of a special miss may be the same number. Also, the termination reference number of times set in the case of a special miss may be less than the termination reference number of times set in the case of a 6R normal jackpot A (first hit).

<Modification 3>
In the seventh embodiment, the reference number of times to end the game (20 times) when a 6R normal jackpot B (in consecutive wins) is set to be the same as the reference number of times to end the game (20 times) when a special miss occurs, but this is not limited to this. For example, the reference number of times to end the game when a special miss occurs may be greater than the reference number of times to end the game when a 6R normal jackpot B is set.

<Modification 4>
In the seventh embodiment, the termination reference number set for a special miss is a uniform number (20 times), but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the termination reference number to be different depending on the type of special miss. For example, as special misses, there may be provided a first special miss in which the termination reference number is set to a first termination reference number (e.g., "20 times"), and a second special miss in which the termination reference number is set to a second termination reference number (e.g., "40 times").

<Modification 5>
In the seventh embodiment, the lottery based on winning the first actuation port 91A is configured not to result in a special loss, but the present invention is not limited to this.The lottery based on winning the first actuation port 91A may also be configured to result in a special loss.

<Modification 6>
If a normal jackpot result is obtained in a game involving the second actuation port 92A, the termination reference number may be set to be higher than if a normal jackpot result is obtained in a game involving the first actuation port 91A or if a special miss result is obtained in a game involving the second actuation port 92A. With this configuration, if a normal jackpot result is obtained during the above-mentioned loop, the player's advantage increases, and an accent can be added to the game during the loop.

Eighth Embodiment
In this embodiment, one of the features is that a transition to a normal gaming state (a fifth normal gaming state described later) corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode is triggered by some of the probability variable jackpots, and when the number of games executed in this normal gaming state reaches an upper limit (ceiling), the support mode by the electric device is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a left-right symmetrical gauge (see FIG. 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) is a left-right asymmetrical gauge. The game board unit 80A will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board unit 80A.

The gaming board 80aA has multiple large and small openings that run through it in its thickness direction (front-to-back direction). Each opening is equipped with a general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83A, a through gate 84A, etc. When gaming balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating opening unit 82A, or the variable winning device 83A, they are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided corresponding to each winning section, and based on the detection results, the player is awarded a prize such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of gaming balls). In addition, an outlet 86 is provided at the bottom of the gaming board 80aA, and gaming balls that do not enter the various winning sections are discharged from the gaming area PE through the outlet 86.

In addition, numerous game pins 87 are planted on the game board 80aA to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills are also arranged. These game pins 87, windmills, and other components differentiate the flow path of the game balls, and are adjusted so that winning the above-mentioned general winning slot 81, etc. occurs with an appropriate probability.

Like the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, the operating port unit 82A is composed of a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A arranged directly below the first operating port 91A. In particular, the second operating port 92A is equipped with an electric device 93A that functions as an opening/closing type ball-scoring assistance device (ball-scoring assistance means) or opening/closing member (opening/closing means).

A center frame 96A is provided on the gaming board 80aA, surrounding the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the gaming board 80aA, and similar to the first embodiment described above, the center frame 96A divides the flow path of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area PE into two routes: one that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side, and one that bypasses it from the left side. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first actuation port 91A, second actuation port 92A, variable entry device 83A, and through gate 84A has been changed so that game balls launched down the left route can enter the first actuation port 91A and second actuation port 92A but cannot enter the variable entry device 83A or through gate 84A, and game balls launched down the right route can enter the second actuation port 92A, through gate 84A, and variable entry device 83A but cannot enter the first actuation port 91A. Note that it may also be configured so that game balls launched down the left route cannot enter the second actuation port 92A.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right and left routes depending on the game situation, it is possible to advance the game to an advantage. By encouraging such technical intervention, monotony in the game is prevented.

(Reserved ball storage area)
Here, in this embodiment, the configuration for storing the reserved information based on winnings in the actuation ports 91A and 92A is different from that in the first embodiment. Below, the configuration for storing the reserved information in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 99.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment has a first actuation port reserve area Ra that stores the values of the win random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a win occurs in the first actuation port 91A, and a second actuation port reserve area Rb that stores the values of the win random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a win occurs in the second actuation port 92A.

The first actuation port holding area Ra is made up of areas 1 to 4, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the first actuation port 91A, the numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of area 1 → area 2 → area 3 → area 4. The second actuation port holding area Rb is made up of areas 1 to 4, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the second actuation port 92A, the numerical information (hold information) is stored in chronological order in the order of area 1 → area 2 → area 3 → area 4.

In this embodiment, if reserved information is stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb, the reserved information stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb (more specifically, the first area) is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. If reserved information is not stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb but reserved information is stored in the first actuation port reserve area Ra, the reserved information stored in the first actuation port reserve area Ra (more specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, a special loss could be determined by a lottery based on winning entries into actuation ports 91 and 92. However, in this embodiment, the special loss is omitted (excluded) from the lottery results based on winning entries into first actuation port 91 and second actuation port 92, which is a difference from the first embodiment. Below, the win/loss table for actuation ports in this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figure 100.

(Actuator port pass/fail table)
As shown in Figure 100, the hit/fail tables for the operating port include a hit/fail table for low probability mode (a group of hit/fail information for low probability) and a hit/fail table for high probability mode (a group of hit/fail information for high probability).

When the low-probability mode hit/miss table (Figure 100(a)) is referenced in the lottery based on winning through actuation ports 91A and 92A, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are six: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, of the hit random number counter C1 values from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, when the high-probability mode hit/miss table (Figure 100(b)) is referenced in the lottery, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107", ... "597". In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values from "0 to 599," "7," "37," "57," "77," "97," "107," ... "597" correspond to jackpot results. All random number values that do not correspond to jackpot results correspond to miss results (specifically, normal miss results). In other words, in a lottery based on winning through actuation ports 91A and 92A, the "special miss" shown in the first embodiment does not occur.

The distribution table for actuation ports is divided into a distribution table for the first actuation port and a distribution table for the second actuation port. The contents of the distribution table will now be explained using the schematic diagram in Figure 101.

As shown in Figure 101(a), the allocation table for the first operating port sets the allocation destinations for game results as a 6R normal jackpot result (low probability special game result), a 6R special jackpot result (high probability special game result), and a 2R special jackpot result (high probability game result). Specifically, of the value of the type counter C2, which ranges from "0 to 29," "0 to 9" corresponds to a 6R normal jackpot result, "10 to 19" corresponds to a 6R special jackpot result, and "20 to 29" corresponds to a 2R special jackpot result.

As shown in Figure 101(b), the allocation table for the second operating port sets the allocation destinations for game results as a 6R normal jackpot result (low-probability special game result) and a 6R special jackpot result (high-probability special game result). Specifically, of the value of the type counter C2, which ranges from "0 to 29," "0 to 9" corresponds to a 6R normal jackpot result, and "10 to 29" corresponds to a 6R special jackpot result.

Here, we will provide additional explanations about each jackpot, referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 102.

If a 6R normal jackpot result occurs, the game will transition to the third normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode B, after the special game state ends. As explained in the first embodiment, after transitioning to the third normal game state, if the number of plays executed during the third normal game state reaches the reference number of times for termination (specifically, "40 plays"), the game will transition to the first normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. In other words, a limit is placed on the number of plays in the third normal game state. In this embodiment, the count of the number of plays during the third normal game state is limited to the number of plays executed based on a win at the second actuation port 92A.

If a 6R regular jackpot occurs, the ceiling (upper limit) mentioned above is set to "300 plays" when the special game state ends. If the number of plays executed after the special game state ends reaches this ceiling, the support mode of the electric device 93A will switch to high-frequency support mode A, thereby suppressing investment (reduction of available balls).

If a 6R jackpot occurs, the special gaming state ends and the game transitions to a second normal gaming state that corresponds to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B. As explained in the first embodiment, the second normal gaming state will continue until the next jackpot occurs.

If a 6R special jackpot occurs, the ceiling (upper limit) mentioned above is set to "100 times" when the special game state ends. However, even if the number of times played after the special game state ends reaches this ceiling, the support mode provided by the electric device 93A will remain in high-frequency support mode B, i.e., the second normal game state will remain.

In contrast, if a 2R probability jackpot is achieved, the game will transition to the fifth normal game state, which is compatible with high probability mode and low frequency support mode, after the special game state ends. Furthermore, if a 2R probability jackpot is achieved, the ceiling (upper limit) mentioned above will be set to "100 times" when the special game state ends. If the number of times played after the special game state ends reaches this ceiling, the support mode provided by the electric device 93A will switch to high frequency support mode A, thereby suppressing investment (reduction of balls).

When a 2R jackpot occurs, the system switches to a high-probability mode, lowering the barrier to the next jackpot. However, if too many rounds are played in this game mode (the fifth normal game mode), the increased investment can discourage the player's desire to play. In this regard, the fifth normal game mode prevents this inconvenience by reaching the ceiling early and limiting additional investment. Furthermore, by switching to high-frequency support mode A upon reaching the ceiling, gameplay progresses primarily through rounds related to the second actuation port 92A. A jackpot during a round related to the second actuation port 92A does not result in a 2R jackpot (a configuration in which a certain amount of payout can be expected), thereby effectively preventing a decline in player satisfaction. Below, with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 103 and 104, the processing required to achieve this function—specifically, the transition processing upon completion of the open/close execution mode and the support mode switching processing—will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Transition process when closing/opening execution mode ends)
103, in the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether the current opening and closing execution mode (special game state) is triggered by a 6R probability variable jackpot. If the determination in step S3601 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S3602, where a high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode B flag thus set, the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode B is referenced in the support lottery in the subsequent electric role support process, and the variable display time table for high-frequency support mode B is referenced as the variable display time table for determining the variable display time of the image on the through-gate display unit DS.

In the following step S3603, a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Based on the high probability mode flag thus set, the win/loss table for the high probability mode will be referenced in the win/loss lottery for subsequent game rounds.

Then, in step S3604, the number of plays that will serve as the criterion for determining the ceiling is set to "100 plays." Then, in step S3605, the number of plays counter provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is reset (cleared to 0), and in step S3606, the various flags for the opening and closing execution mode (such as the jackpot flag) stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the opening and closing execution mode is stopped.

The value of the continuation counter is decremented by "1" each time a game is played, and high-frequency support mode B ends when the value of the continuation counter reaches "0." In other words, the value of the continuation counter determines the upper limit of the number of games that can be played during high-frequency support mode B (the above-mentioned termination reference number).

Returning to the explanation of step S3601, if a negative determination is made in step S3601, i.e., if the current jackpot is not a 6R variable probability jackpot, proceed to step S3607. In step S3607, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a 2R variable probability jackpot. If a positive determination is made in step S3607, the processes of steps S3603 to S3606 described above are executed, and then this transition process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3607, i.e., if the current jackpot is a 6R normal jackpot, a count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 in step S3608, and a high frequency support mode B flag is set in step S3609. After that, the continuation count counter is set to "40" in step S3610, and the number of plays that will serve as the ceiling determination criterion is set to "300 times" in the following step S3611.

Then, in step S3605, the number of plays counter is reset, and in step S3606, the various flags for the opening and closing execution mode (such as the jackpot flag) stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the opening and closing execution mode is stopped.

Next, we will explain the support mode switching process with reference to Figure 104.

(Support mode switching process)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S3701, it is determined whether the current support mode is high frequency support mode A or high frequency support mode B. If the determination in step S3701 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S3702. In step S3702, it is determined whether a number limit flag is stored in the various flags storage area 435 of RAM 404. If the determination in step S3702 is negative, the switching process is terminated. If the determination in step S3702 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S3703.

In step S3703, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1." In the following step S3704, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0." If the determination in step S3704 is negative, the switching process is terminated. If the determination in step S3704 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3705, where the high-frequency support mode flag (more specifically, the high-frequency support mode A flag and the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the number limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are cleared, and the switching process is terminated. Clearing the high-frequency support mode flag switches the support mode from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S3701, if a negative determination is made in step S3701, i.e., if the game is in low frequency support mode, the program proceeds to step S3706. In step S3706, it is determined whether the value of the number of games played counter in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 has reached its upper limit, i.e., the value set in step S3604 or step S3611 above. If a negative determination is made in step S3706, the switching process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S3706, the program proceeds to step S3707.

In step S3707, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various counter areas 434 of RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode A flag set in this way, the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode A is referenced in the support lottery during the subsequent electric role support processing, and the variable display time table for high-frequency support mode A is referenced as the variable display time table for determining the variable display time of the image on the through gate display unit DS. Furthermore, when a support win results and the electric role device 93A switches to the open state, the opening time corresponds to high-frequency support mode A.

In the following step S3708, a count limit flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in step S3709, the continuation count counter is set to "400" and the switching process ends. This means that high frequency support mode A will continue until the number of plays reaches "400" or a jackpot is reached.

The eighth embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If the number of play times (play count) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information, the game will transition to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A. By forcibly changing the game rhythm in this way, monotony in the game can be effectively prevented. Here, the upper limit number of times that will result in the ceiling being reached is configured to be fewer (shortened) in the case of a special jackpot result (more specifically, a jackpot result corresponding to high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode) than in the case of a normal jackpot result. Here, because the transition to the special game state occurs earlier in high-probability mode than in low-probability mode, setting the upper limit number to a low number allows the effect of the above-mentioned ceiling function to be effectively exerted. This can effectively contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Furthermore, in normal gameplay that supports high probability mode and low frequency support mode, even though the mode is set to high probability mode, gameplay may proceed without resulting in a jackpot, resulting in a large investment contrary to the player's expectations. This is expected to be a factor that significantly reduces the player's motivation to play. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, in normal gameplay that supports high probability mode and low frequency support mode, the above-mentioned upper limit number of times can be lowered and the system can be configured to switch to high frequency switching mode at an early timing, thereby suppressing investment, thereby making it possible to optimally achieve the effect of diversifying games (the effect of increasing attention to games).

If the rescue function for reaching the ceiling described above were to be too effective, the technical significance (diversification of gameplay) of providing a normal game mode compatible with a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode could be diminished. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by setting the upper limit number of times in each game mode so that it is equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability of a jackpot result, it is possible to optimally combine the diversification of gameplay with the rescue function described above.

Increasing the number of stored pending information items shortens the display time for the changing images on the operation port display (the operating period for the game play operation). This is desirable for smooth game progress. However, assuming this configuration, applying the configuration related to the rescue function described above can cause the following inconvenience. That is, if the ceiling is reached in a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and low frequency support mode, and the game state transitions to a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, the game play in the normal game state may progress too quickly, resulting in the benefit of reaching the ceiling ending before the benefit can be fully experienced. This is a concern as it could significantly reduce the player's attention to the rescue function. In this regard, setting the termination threshold number of times to be greater than the upper limit number of times, as shown in this embodiment, can help alleviate the above concern.

The lottery based on winning the second actuation port 92A is favored over the lottery based on winning the first actuation port 91A to give the player an advantage. When the ceiling is reached in normal gameplay that supports high probability mode and low frequency support mode, not only is investment suppressed, but the lottery is also favored, thereby doubling the player's rescue function. If a player gets stuck in normal gameplay that supports high probability mode and low frequency support mode, expectations of reaching the ceiling increase. This can contribute to further increasing attention to the game.

The lottery based on winning the first operating port 91A includes a lottery result that triggers a transition to a normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode, while the lottery based on winning the second operating port 92A does not include a lottery result that triggers a transition to a normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode. This configuration prevents an event in which the ceiling is reached during a normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode and the rescue function is activated, resulting in a lottery result that triggers a transition back to a normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode, effectively eliminating the benefit of the ceiling (a wasted draw).

<Modification 1>
In the eighth embodiment, the ceiling (upper limit) is set differently depending on the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variable jackpot), but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the ceiling (upper limit) to be the same regardless of the type of jackpot.

<Modification 2>
As 2R probability variable jackpots (so-called potential probability), 2R probability variable jackpot A and 2R probability variable jackpot B can be provided, and the ceiling (upper limit) for 2R probability variable jackpot A can be set to be different from the ceiling (upper limit) for 2R probability variable jackpot B.

<Modification 3>
In the eighth embodiment, the ceiling (upper limit) is set according to the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, special jackpot), but this may be modified as follows. That is, the ceiling (upper limit) may be set according to the actuation port that triggered the jackpot. For example, if a jackpot is achieved based on a win in the first actuation port 91A, a first ceiling may be set as the ceiling (upper limit), and if a jackpot is achieved based on a win in the second actuation port 92A, a second ceiling may be set as the ceiling (upper limit). In this case, if the first ceiling is set lower than the second ceiling, excessive investment by the player can be prevented, and if the second ceiling is set lower than the first ceiling, the excitement of the game can be enhanced.

<Modification 4>
In the eighth embodiment, the ceiling (upper limit) is set lower in the case of a probability variable jackpot (specifically, a 2R probability variable jackpot) than in the case of a normal jackpot (specifically, a 6R normal jackpot), but this is not limited to this. In the case of a 2R probability variable jackpot, the ceiling (upper limit) may be set higher than in the case of a 6R normal jackpot.

<Modification 5>
In a normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A, which is shifted upon reaching the ceiling in a normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, a first termination reference number is set as the termination reference number, and in a normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, which is shifted upon reaching the ceiling in a normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, a second termination reference number is set as the termination reference number, and it is also possible to specify the second termination reference number to be less than the first termination reference number. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the rescue function from becoming a factor that encourages gambling.

<Modification 6>
As in the first embodiment described above, the first actuation port 91A and the second actuation port 92A may be arranged together on a predetermined flow path in the play area PE, and when reserved information is stored in both the first actuation port reserve area Ra and the second actuation port reserve area Rb, the reserved information stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb may be given priority as the target for executing the play round.

With the configuration shown in this modified example, even if the ceiling is reached in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode and the game transitions to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, there is no need to change the destination of the game balls to enjoy the benefits of the rescue function. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the rescue function is suddenly activated without going through the special game state, it is possible to prevent the unnecessary consumption of game balls and appropriately improve satisfaction with the rescue function.

Ninth Embodiment
In the first embodiment, when the game state shifts to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode, the game state is maintained in the high probability mode until the next jackpot (a so-called variable probability machine). In contrast, in this embodiment, the game state is different from the first embodiment in that there is an upper limit to the number of games that the high probability mode can be maintained in after the game state shifts to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode (a so-called ST machine).

When the lottery mode switches to the high probability mode, it is assumed that players will play in the hope of hitting a jackpot early. If the game continues without hitting a jackpot despite high expectations for a jackpot, this can give the player the impression that their investment is increasing unnecessarily, and there is concern that the player's motivation to play will decrease as the game progresses and the player approaches the upper limit. It is assumed that this phenomenon will be more pronounced in gaming machines with lower winning probabilities in the high probability mode. One of the features of this embodiment is that it has been designed to take such circumstances into consideration. Below, we will explain the distinctive configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

The configuration of the game board unit in this embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment, and the holding function (holding ball storage area) related to the actuation port is the same as that of the eighth embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. The configuration is also the same as that of the eighth embodiment in that a play cycle related to the second actuation port 92 is executed with priority over a play cycle related to the first actuation port 91.

(Actuator port pass/fail table)
As shown in Figure 100, the hit/fail tables for the operating port include a hit/fail table for low probability mode (a group of hit/fail information for low probability) and a hit/fail table for high probability mode (a group of hit/fail information for high probability).

When the low-probability mode hit/miss table (Figure 105(a)) is referenced in the lottery based on winning entries into the actuation ports 91 and 92, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are two: "7" and "307." In other words, of the hit random number counter C1 values from "0 to 599," "7" and "307" correspond to the jackpot result. On the other hand, when the high-probability mode hit/miss table (Figure 105(b)) is referenced in the lottery, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are six: "7," "107," "207," "307," "407," and "507." In other words, of the hit random number counter C1 values from "0 to 599," "7," "107," "207," "307," "407," and "507" correspond to the jackpot result. All random number values that do not correspond to a jackpot correspond to a miss result (specifically, a normal miss result). In other words, in a lottery based on winning through actuation ports 91 and 92, the "special miss" shown in the first embodiment does not occur.

(Distribution table for operating ports)
106(a), in the allocation table for the actuation ports 91 and 92, a 10R variable probability jackpot A (a special game result corresponding to a high probability) and a 10R variable probability jackpot B (a special game result corresponding to a high probability) are set as allocation destinations for game results. Specifically, of the value of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the 10R variable probability jackpot A, and "10 to 29" corresponds to the 10R variable probability jackpot B.

If a 10R jackpot A occurs, the game will transition to the fifth normal game state, which corresponds to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode, after the special game state ends. This high probability mode will end when the number of games played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (high probability upper limit: 100 games), and the game will switch to the low probability mode.

If a 10R special jackpot B is achieved, the special gaming state will end and the game will transition to a second normal gaming state that is compatible with high probability mode and high frequency support mode. This high probability mode will end when the number of games played after the special gaming state ends reaches the upper limit (high probability upper limit: 100 games), and the game will switch to low probability mode. Furthermore, the high frequency support mode will end when the number of games played after the special gaming state ends reaches the upper limit (high support upper limit: 50 games). In this embodiment, when the high support upper limit is reached, the ceiling described above is reached, and the game will switch from high frequency support mode B to high frequency support mode A. There is also an upper limit on the number of times this high frequency support mode A can continue (50 games in this embodiment), and the game will switch to low frequency support mode when the high probability mode ends.

In the first embodiment described above, a difference was provided so that the base (the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls fired) was higher in high frequency support mode B than in high frequency support mode A, but in this embodiment, a difference is provided so that the base is higher in high frequency support mode A than in high frequency support mode B. Below, with reference to Figure 107, the specific configuration for creating such a difference will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

In low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is 1/2, and if a support win occurs, the number of times the electric device 93 is switched to the open state is set to "1 time" and the opening time is set to "0.1 seconds." The variable display time of the image (normal image) on the through gate display unit DS is set to "10-20 seconds," and the fixed display time of the image is set to "0.5 seconds."

In high-frequency support mode B, the probability of winning the support lottery is 1/1.1, and if a support win occurs, the number of times the electric device 93 is switched to the open state is set to "1 time" and the opening time is set to "2 seconds." The variable display time of the image (normal image) on the through gate display unit DS is set to "0.5 seconds," and the fixed display time of the image is set to "0.5 seconds."

In high-frequency support mode A, the probability of winning the support lottery is 1/2, and if a support win occurs, the number of times the electric device 93 is switched to the open state is set to "2 times," the opening time is set to "3 seconds," and the interval time when switching to the open state is set to "0.2 seconds." The variable display time of the pattern (normal pattern) on the through gate display unit DS is set to "0.5 seconds," and the fixed display time of the pattern is set to "0.5 seconds."

In general, the base values mentioned above increase in the following order: Low Frequency Support Mode < High Frequency Support Mode B < High Frequency Support Mode A. In High Frequency Support Mode B, players can play while minimizing the loss of balls compared to Low Frequency Support Mode, and in High Frequency Support Mode A, players can play while minimizing the loss of balls even more than in High Frequency Support Mode B.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 108, we will explain the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed as part of the game state transition process in normal processing (see step S404 in Figure 23), focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Transition process when closing/opening execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode (special game state), first, in step S3801, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode corresponds to a 10R probability variable jackpot. If the determination in step S3801 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S3802. In step S3802, the high frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. This switches the support mode of the electric device 93A to high frequency support mode B.

In the following step S3803, the high support continuation counter provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set to "50." The high support continuation counter is a counter that determines the number of continuations of play corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and is decremented by "1" each time a play is executed during the high frequency support mode.

After executing the setting process in step S3803, or if a negative judgment is made in step S3801, the process proceeds to step S3804. In step S3804, a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. This switches the lottery mode for the lottery based on winning the actuation ports 91 and 92 to the high probability mode.

In the following step S3805, the high probability continuation counter provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set to "100." The high probability continuation counter is a counter that determines the number of continuation rounds corresponding to the high probability mode, and is decremented by "1" each time a round is played during that high probability mode.

In step S3806, the number of plays counter provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is reset (cleared to 0). Then, in step S3807, the various flags for the special play state stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 are erased, and this transition process is terminated.

Next, with reference to Figure 109, we will explain the lottery mode and support mode switching process (equivalent to the support mode switching process in Figure 39) that is executed as part of the normal game play control process (step S403 in Figure 23).

(Lottery mode and support mode switching process)
In the process for switching between the lottery mode and the support mode, first, in step S3901, it is determined whether the current lottery mode is the high probability mode. If the determination in step S3901 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S3902. In step S3902, an update process is executed for the high probability continuation count counter provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404. Specifically, the value of the high probability continuation count counter is decremented by "1."

In the following step S3903, it is determined whether the value of the high probability continuation counter is "0." If a positive determination is made in step S3903, the process proceeds to step S3904, in which the high probability mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 is erased. This switches the lottery mode based on winning the actuation ports 91, 92 from high probability mode to low probability mode.

After executing the processing of step S3904, or if a negative judgment is made in either step S3901 or S3903, the process proceeds to step S3905. In step S3905, it is determined whether the current support mode is high frequency support mode A or high frequency support mode B. If a positive judgment is made in step S3905, the process proceeds to step S3906. In step S3906, an update process is performed on the high support continuation count counter provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404. Specifically, the value of the high support continuation count counter is decremented by "1".

In the following step S3907, it is determined whether the value of the high support continuation counter is "0." If a positive determination is made in step S3907, the process proceeds to step S3908, where the high frequency support mode flag A or high frequency support mode B flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 is erased. This causes the support mode provided by the electric role device 93 to switch from high frequency support mode A or B to low frequency support mode.

After executing the processing of step S3908, or if a negative judgment is made in either step S3905 or S3907, the process proceeds to step S3909. In step S3909, it is determined whether the value of the number of games counter provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 has reached its upper limit ("50" in this embodiment). If a negative judgment is made in step S3909, the switching process ends. If a positive judgment is made in step S3909, the process proceeds to step S3910. In step S3910, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. This switches the support mode provided by the electric device 93 to high-frequency support mode A. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3911, where the high-support continuation number counter provided in the various counter area 434 of RAM 404 is set to "50" and the switching process ends.

(Changes in balls held as the game progresses)
Next, a supplementary explanation of the change in the number of balls held as the game progresses will be given with reference to Figure 110. Figure 110(a) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when a 10R probability variable jackpot A is achieved, and Figure 110(b) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when a 10R probability variable jackpot B is achieved.

In the example shown in Figure 110(a), at timing tg1, a transition occurs to a special gaming state corresponding to a 10R guaranteed jackpot A. At timing tg2 when this special gaming state ends, the lottery mode switches to high probability mode, and the jackpot probability increases from 1/300 to 1/100. From then on, high probability mode is maintained until the number of plays executed reaches 100.

Immediately after the special game state ends, the support mode becomes low-frequency support mode. At time tg3, when 50 games have been played since the special game state ended, the support mode switches from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode A. This accelerates game progress and reduces the loss of balls to almost zero. In other words, after the special game state ends, the state becomes advantageous to the player, and if the game continues without a jackpot, the state will become even more advantageous to the player.

Then, at timing tg4, when the number of plays executed after the special game state ends reaches 100, the support mode switches to low-frequency support mode and the lottery mode switches to low-probability mode. This restores the jackpot probability from 1/100 to 1/300.

In the example shown in Figure 110(b), at timing th1, a transition to a special gaming state corresponding to a 10R guaranteed jackpot B occurs. At timing th2 when this special gaming state ends, the lottery mode switches to high probability mode, and the jackpot probability increases from 1/300 to 1/100. From then on, high probability mode is maintained until the number of plays executed reaches 100.

Immediately after the special game state ends, the support mode becomes high-frequency support mode B. At timing th3, when 50 games have been played since the special game state ended, the support mode switches from high-frequency support mode B to high-frequency support mode A. This further accelerates game progress and suppresses the loss of balls to almost zero. In other words, after the special game state ends, the state becomes advantageous to the player, and if the game continues without a jackpot, the state will become even more advantageous to the player.

Then, at timing th4, when the number of games played after the special game state ends reaches 100, the support mode switches to the low-frequency support mode and the lottery mode switches to the low-probability mode.

In this embodiment, after transitioning to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B, if the number of plays reaches 50 without resulting in a jackpot, the support mode changes to high frequency support mode A. This increases the frequency of winning at the second actuation port 92. Thereafter, if the number of plays reaches 100 after the special game state ends, the lottery mode changes to low probability mode and the support mode changes to low frequency support mode. This configuration ensures the player's advantage during the high probability mode while effectively preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

In gaming machines (so-called ST machines) that have a limit on the number of play times in normal game mode that supports high probability mode, the likelihood of a jackpot result decreases as the number of play times approaches the limit, which can significantly reduce the player's expectations. This is undesirable in terms of increasing attention to the game. In this regard, with the configuration shown in this embodiment, reaching the ceiling triggers the switch to high frequency support mode A, which increases the frequency of winning at the second actuation port 92 and reduces investment.

Furthermore, as in the first embodiment, the first actuation port 91 and the second actuation port 92 are arranged together in a predetermined flow path in the play area PE, but the game rounds related to the second actuation port 92 are executed with priority over the game rounds related to the first actuation port 91. Reaching the ceiling triggers a transition from the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, thereby increasing the opportunities for game rounds related to the second actuation port 92 to be executed. As a result, reaching the ceiling significantly increases the player's advantage, and it is possible to favorably increase attention to the game after the ceiling is reached.

In high-frequency support mode A, when game balls are continuously fired toward the actuation port 92, the average number of reserved balls stored in the reserved ball storage area (second actuation port reserved area Rb) shifts to "3.5." In high-frequency support mode B, when game balls are continuously fired toward the actuation port 92, the average number of reserved balls stored in the reserved ball storage area (second actuation port reserved area Rb) shifts to "2.5." When the number of reserved balls stored in the second actuation port reserved area Rb is "3," the display time of the changing images in the actuation port display unit D2 is shorter than when it is "2." This configuration allows the speed of game progress to be changed by transitioning from the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high-frequency support mode B to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high-frequency support mode A upon reaching the ceiling. This further reduces monotony in gameplay.

<Modification 1>
In the above ninth embodiment, the high frequency support mode A, which is switched to after the special game state triggered by the 10R special jackpot A ends, is configured to end (switch to low frequency support mode) in conjunction with the switching of the lottery mode to the low probability mode, but this is not limited to this.

It may also be configured to switch from high-frequency support mode A to low-frequency support mode before switching from high-probability mode to low-probability mode. In other words, the transition may be in the following order: special gaming state → normal gaming state corresponding to high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (fifth normal gaming state) → normal gaming state corresponding to high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode A (sixth normal gaming state) → normal gaming state corresponding to high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (fifth normal gaming state) → normal gaming state corresponding to low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (first normal gaming state).

Also, the configuration may be such that after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, the high frequency support mode A switches to the low frequency support mode. In other words, the configuration may be such that the transition occurs in the following order: special gaming state → normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode (fifth normal gaming state) → normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A (sixth normal gaming state) → normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A (fourth normal gaming state) → normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode (first normal gaming state).

<Modification 2>
It is also possible to provide 10R probability variable jackpot A1 and 10R probability variable jackpot A2 as the 10R probability variable jackpot A shown in the ninth embodiment, and set the ceiling for the 10R probability variable jackpot A1 to 50 times, and for the 10R probability variable jackpot A2 to 20 times. With this configuration, when a 10R probability variable jackpot A is achieved, the timing of the promotion (the timing of the above tg3) can be changed depending on the type, thereby suitably realizing diversification of games.

<Modification 3>
As the 10R probability variable jackpot B shown in the ninth embodiment, a 10R probability variable jackpot B1 and a 10R probability variable jackpot B2 may be provided, and when a 10R probability variable jackpot B1 is achieved, the ceiling may be set to 50 times and the number of times that high frequency support mode B continues may be 50 times, and when a 10R probability variable jackpot B2 is achieved, the ceiling may be set to 20 times and the number of times that high frequency support mode B continues may be 20 times. With this configuration, when a 10R probability variable jackpot B is achieved, the timing of the promotion (the timing of the above th3) can be changed depending on the type of 10R probability variable jackpot B, and diversification of games can be suitably achieved.

<Modification 4>
In the above ninth embodiment, the number of times (50 times) that the player can stay in the normal game state (fifth normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode after the special game state triggered by the 10R special jackpot A ends is the same as the number of times (50 times) that the player can stay in the normal game state (sixth normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, but this is not limited to this.

It is also possible to configure the game so that the number of times that a player can remain in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode (fifth normal game state) after the special game state triggered by a 10R special jackpot A ends is greater than the number of times that a player can remain in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A (sixth normal game state).

It is also possible to configure the system so that the number of times a player can remain in the normal gaming state (fifth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode after the special gaming state triggered by a 10R special jackpot A ends is less than the number of times a player can remain in the normal gaming state (sixth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A.

<Modification 5>
In the above ninth embodiment, the number of times (50 times) that the player can stay in the normal game state (second normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B after the special game state triggered by the 10R special jackpot B ends is the same as the number of times (50 times) that the player can stay in the normal game state (sixth normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, but this is not limited to this.

It is also possible to configure the game so that the number of times that a player can remain in the normal game state (second normal game state) corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B after the special game state triggered by 10R special jackpot B ends is greater than the number of times that a player can remain in the normal game state (sixth normal game state) corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A.

It is also possible to configure the system so that the number of times a player can remain in the normal gaming state (second normal gaming state) corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode B after the special gaming state triggered by 10R special jackpot A ends is less than the number of times a player can remain in the normal gaming state (sixth normal gaming state) corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A.

<Modification 6>
In the above ninth embodiment, a difference was made so that the base of high-frequency support mode A was higher than that of high-frequency support mode B, but this can also be changed to make a difference so that the base of high-frequency support mode B is higher than that of high-frequency support mode A.

<Modification 7>
When transitioning from high frequency support mode A or B to high frequency support mode A, it is optional whether or not to go through low frequency support mode (a game round compatible with low frequency support mode).

<Modification 8>
In the ninth embodiment, when the 10R probability variable jackpot result A is obtained, the game transitions to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A upon execution of 50 games in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and when the number of games executed after the special game state ends reaches 100, the game transitions to the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In other words, the number of games staying in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode and the number of games staying in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A are specified to be the same. This may be modified so that the number of times a player stays in a normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode is greater than the number of times a player stays in a normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, or the number of times a player stays in a normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode may be less than the number of times a player stays in a normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A.

Furthermore, in the event of a 10R probability jackpot result B, 50 plays are played in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B, triggering a transition to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, and when 100 plays are played after the special game state ends, a transition to the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode is made. In other words, the number of plays remaining in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B is set to be the same as the number of plays remaining in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A. This may be modified so that the number of times a player stays in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B is greater than the number of times a player stays in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, or the number of times a player stays in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B may be less than the number of times a player stays in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A.

<Modification 9>
In the ninth embodiment, when the number of games played after the end of the special game state triggered by the 10R probability jackpot result reaches 100, the lottery mode changes to the low probability mode and the support mode changes to the low frequency support mode. However, this is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to configure the high frequency support mode A to continue even after the transition to the low probability mode. According to the configuration shown in this modified example, after the special game state ends, the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B is transitioned to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A is transitioned to the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. This configuration can prevent a rapid decrease in attention to the game when transitioning from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

Tenth Embodiment
In the first embodiment described above, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss result, the value of the continuation number counter that determines the remaining number of games in the fourth normal game state is set (overwritten) to "400", and the fourth normal game state triggered by the special miss result is quickly transitioned to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling without passing through the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, without triggering other game states such as the first normal game state, i.e., the fourth normal game state is quickly extended.

One of the features of this embodiment is the devised behavior when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss result. Below, with reference to Figure 111, the distinctive features of this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 111(a), in high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by a special miss, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is blue, while in high-frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is green. Therefore, by checking the background color of the display screen 95a, a player can easily determine whether the current high-frequency support mode A is triggered by a special miss or reaching the ceiling. In the following description, the high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss will be appropriately distinguished as "high-frequency support mode A1," and the high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling will be appropriately distinguished as "high-frequency support mode A2." Incidentally, the support modes of high-frequency support modes A1 and A2 are the same, and there is no difference in the base (the ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls fired), which is similar to the first embodiment.

Next, we will provide additional explanation of the flow of notification regarding the start of high frequency support mode A, with reference to the schematic diagrams in Figures 111(b) and (c).

In a game where a special miss occurs and the game transitions to high frequency support mode A1, the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss in that game is displayed as a stopped (confirmed) symbol on the display screen 95a, as shown in Figure 111 (b). Specifically, after a reach display, a combination of "1", "3", and "4" symbols is displayed as a stopped (confirmed) symbol on one of the active lines. Then, with the start of the next game, the background color of the display screen 95a changes from white to blue, and the remaining number of games in high frequency support mode A1 is displayed in the corner of the display screen 95a.

In contrast, in a game that transitions to high frequency support mode A2 upon reaching the ceiling, as shown in FIG. 111(c), a symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling may be displayed as a stopped symbol (confirmed symbol) on the display screen 95a in that game. Specifically, if the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, a symbol combination including the "CHANCE" symbol on one of the active lines is displayed as a stopped symbol (confirmed symbol) via a reach display. In contrast, if the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to high frequency support mode A, a symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss is displayed as a stopped symbol (confirmed symbol) without a reach display. At this time, the background color of the display screen 95a also remains blue.

In addition, in a game in which the ceiling is reached during the first normal gaming state, a variable display time (specifically, 20 to 30 seconds) corresponding to a reach display is set, just like in a game in which the result of a jackpot occurs. In contrast, in a game in which the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state, a variable display time that does not correspond to a reach display is set by referring to the variable display time table shown in Figure 27 (a2).

Here, referring to the timing chart in Figure 112, we will provide additional explanation on the flow of play when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result.

At time ti1, the round of play corresponding to the normal miss result begins, and at time ti2, the round of play corresponding to the special miss result begins. At time ti3, when the round of play corresponding to the special miss result ends, the game transitions to the fourth normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A1. Accordingly, the continuation counter is set to "40."

After that, the value of the continuation counter is decremented by "1" and the value of the play count counter is incremented by "1" with each play (see timing ti4, for example). At timing ti5 during the fourth normal play state corresponding to a special miss result, the play round in which the ceiling is reached begins. In other words, in the example shown in Figure 112, the ceiling is reached while the fourth normal play state corresponding to a special miss result is continuing, i.e., before the value of the continuation counter reaches "0". This play round corresponds to a normal miss result that does not support reach display, and thanks to the benefits of the high-frequency support mode, the number of reserved balls related to actuation ports 91 and 92 also fluctuates near the upper limit. Therefore, the time required for the changing patterns to be displayed on the actuation port display unit and the pattern display device is approximately 3 to 5 seconds due to the effects of the time-saving function, and the play round in which the ceiling is reached also progresses quickly.

In a game in which the ceiling is reached, the "CHANCE" symbol is displayed frozen on the display screen 95a at the timing of the confirmation display, clearly indicating to the player that the ceiling has been reached. Then, at timing ti6 when that game in question ends, the value of the continuation counter is overwritten to "400", and the game transitions from the fourth normal game state corresponding to a special miss result to the fourth normal game state corresponding to reaching the ceiling without passing through any other game state. Accordingly, the background color of the display screen 95a changes from blue to green.

Here, during high frequency support mode A, the electric device 93 will frequently switch to the open state. At the timing ti6 when the game round in which the ceiling was reached ends, the electric device 93 is in the open state, but the electric device 93 will remain in the open state until the opening time set when the electric device 93 was switched to the open state has elapsed, and the opening time will not be forcibly shortened. In other words, even if the trigger for the fourth normal game state switches from a special miss result to reaching the ceiling as described above, the behavior of the electric device 93 will not be disrupted. The winning support in this fourth normal game state will end when the value of the continuation counter reaches "0" or if a jackpot result occurs before that.

<Modification 1>
In the tenth embodiment, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result, a symbol combination indicating the ceiling has been reached (a symbol combination including a "CHANCE" symbol) is displayed in a static display in the game turn in which the ceiling is reached, and a background color of the display screen 95a is changed from the game turn after the ceiling has been reached. However, this is not limited to this. The specific structure for indicating the ceiling has been reached is arbitrary, and one of the above two structures may be omitted. In other words, the function of indicating the ceiling has been reached by a symbol combination in the game turn in which the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state may be omitted. It is also possible to unify the background color of the display screen 95a between the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result and the fourth normal game state triggered by the ceiling being reached.

<Modification 2>
In the tenth embodiment, the reference number of times to terminate (20 or 40 times) set when transitioning to the fourth normal gaming state is triggered by a special miss result is less than the reference number of times to terminate (400 times) set when transitioning to the fourth normal gaming state is triggered by reaching the ceiling, but this is not limited to this. The reference number of times to terminate (20 or 40 times) set when transitioning to the fourth normal gaming state is triggered by reaching the ceiling may be greater than the reference number of times to terminate (400 times) when transitioning to the fourth normal gaming state is triggered by reaching the ceiling, or the reference number of times to terminate (20 or 40 times) set when transitioning to the fourth normal gaming state is triggered by a special miss result may be the same as the reference number of times to terminate (400 times) set when transitioning to the fourth normal gaming state is triggered by reaching the ceiling.

<Modification 3>
If the electric device 93 is in the open state when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by a special miss result, it is also possible to configure the electric device 93 to be forcibly switched to the closed state.

Eleventh Embodiment
If a special miss occurs during the high-frequency support mode, the special miss may be invalidated, preventing the player from enjoying the benefits of the special miss. This is undesirable because it reduces the player's motivation to play. In particular, if such an event occurs near the end of the high-frequency support mode and is noticed by the player, the above concerns become even more pronounced. One of the features of this embodiment is that it has been designed to take such circumstances into consideration. Below, we will explain this design, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

The images that are displayed (confirmed) in the operating port display sections D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 (main display section D) are designed to be individual for each lottery result based on winning at the operating ports 91 and 92. In other words, if the lottery result based on winning through operation ports 91, 92 is a 6R normal jackpot result, a picture corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result is displayed in a frozen state on operation port display sections D1, D2, if the lottery result based on winning through operation ports 91, 92 is a 6R special jackpot result, a picture corresponding to the 6R special jackpot result is displayed in a frozen state on operation port display sections D1, D2, if the lottery result based on winning through operation ports 91, 92 is a special miss result A, a picture corresponding to special miss result A is displayed in a frozen state on operation port display sections D1, D2, if the lottery result based on winning through operation ports 91, 92 is a special miss result B, a picture corresponding to special miss result B is displayed in a frozen state on operation port display sections D1, D2, and if the lottery result based on winning through operation ports 91, 92 is a normal miss result, a picture corresponding to a normal miss result is displayed in a frozen state on operation port display sections D1, D2 (see Figure 113 (a)).

As described above in detail, the symbol combinations displayed in the actuation port display sections D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 do not differ depending on the game state. In contrast, the symbol combinations displayed in the actuation port display section 95 (display screen 95a) that correspond to special miss results differ depending on the game state.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 113(b) and (c), if a special miss occurs during a normal game state (first normal game state) corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) will stop and display the symbol combination of "3," "1," and "4," which is a symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result, whereas if a special miss occurs during a normal game state (second normal game state to fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) will stop and display a symbol combination other than the above symbol combination, specifically a symbol combination corresponding to a normal miss result.

Next, we will provide additional explanation about the variable display time table for the operating port in this embodiment, with reference to Figures 114 and 115. Figure 114 is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table corresponding to a normal miss result, and Figure 115 is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time table corresponding to a special miss result.

The variable display time table for normal miss results is the same as in the first embodiment. Specifically, Figure 114 (a1) illustrates the variable display time for a complete miss in the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. For example, if the number of stored pending information is "0" or "1," the variable display time is set to either "12, 13, or 14 seconds." If the number of stored pending information is "2," the variable display time is set to either "7, 8, or 9 seconds." If the number of stored pending information is "3" to "8," the variable display time is set to either "3, 4, or 5 seconds." Note that in the first normal game state, the fixed display time for the symbols on the actuation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time for the symbols on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second."

Figure 114 (a2) illustrates the variable display time for a complete miss in the fourth normal gaming state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A. For example, if the number of stored pending information bits is "0" or "1," the variable display time is set to one of "12, 13, or 14 seconds." If the number of stored pending information bits is "2," the variable display time is set to one of "7, 8, or 9 seconds." If the number of stored pending information bits is "3" to "8," the variable display time is set to one of "3, 4, or 5 seconds." Note that in the fourth normal gaming state, the fixed display time for the symbols on the actuation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time for the symbols on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second." In other words, the setting mode for the variable display time in the fourth normal gaming state is the same as the setting mode for the variable display time in the first normal gaming state.

Figure 114 (a3) shows an example of the variable display time when there is a complete miss in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B. For example, if the number of stored pending information is "0", the variable display time is set to either "12, 13, or 14 seconds", and if the number of stored pending information is "1" to "8", the variable display time is set to either "1 or 2 seconds". Note that in the second normal gaming state, the fixed display time of the patterns on the actuation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the patterns on the pattern display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 seconds".

Figure 114 (a4) shows an example of the variable display time in the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode B when there is a complete miss. For example, if the number of stored pending information is "0," the variable display time is set to either "12, 13, or 14 seconds," and if the number of stored pending information is "1" to "8," the variable display time is set to either "1 or 2 seconds." In other words, the setting mode for the variable display time in the third normal gaming state is the same as the setting mode for the variable display time in the second normal gaming state. Note that in the third normal gaming state, the fixed display time for the symbols on the actuation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time for the symbols on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second."

Incidentally, in any of the first through fourth normal game states, in a game in which a reach display corresponding to a miss result (miss reach) occurs, the variable display time is set to anywhere from 20 to 30 seconds, regardless of the number of pending information stored. This variable display time is within the same range as the variable display time set in a game in which a jackpot result occurs (see Figure 28), and a relatively long time within that range is likely to be set in the case of a jackpot result, while a relatively short time within that range is likely to be set in the case of a miss result. In other words, a difference is set so that a reach display with a long variable display time has a higher likelihood of a jackpot than a reach display with a short variable display time.

In this embodiment, too, in a game where the ceiling is reached, a variable display time (specifically, 20 to 30 seconds) corresponding to the reach display will be set.

Next, we will explain the variable display time table corresponding to special miss results. Figure 115 (a1) shows an example of the variable display time when a special miss occurs in the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. When a special miss occurs in the first normal game state, the variable display time is set to either "20 to 30 seconds" regardless of the number of pending information stored. This variable display time is in the same range as the variable display time set in the game round corresponding to the jackpot result.

Figure 115 (a2) illustrates the variable display time when a special miss occurs in the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0" or "1," the variable display time is set to one of "12, 13, or 14 seconds." When the number of stored pending information is "2," the variable display time is set to one of "7, 8, or 9 seconds." When the number of stored pending information is "3" to "8," the variable display time is set to one of "3, 4, or 5 seconds." In other words, the variable display time setting in the fourth normal game state is the same as in the case of a normal miss (see Figure 114 (a2)). Note that in the fourth normal game state, the fixed display time of the symbols on the actuation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the symbols on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second."

Figure 115 (a3) shows an example of the variable display time when a special miss occurs in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B. For example, if the number of stored pending information is "0," the variable display time is set to either "12, 13, or 14 seconds," and if the number of stored pending information is "1" to "8," the variable display time is set to either "1 or 2 seconds." In other words, the setting of the variable display time in the second normal gaming state is the same as in the case of a normal miss (see Figure 114 (a3)). Note that in the second normal gaming state, the fixed display time of the symbols on the actuation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the symbols on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 seconds."

Figure 115 (a4) shows an example of the variable display time when a special miss occurs in the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode B. For example, if the number of stored pending information is "0," the variable display time is set to either "12, 13, or 14 seconds," and if the number of stored pending information is "1" to "8," the variable display time is set to either "1 or 2 seconds." In other words, the setting of the variable display time in the third normal gaming state is the same as in the case of a normal miss (see Figure 114 (a4)). Note that in the third normal gaming state, the fixed display time of the symbols on the actuation port display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the symbols on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 second."

In addition, for a game in which the ceiling is reached during the first normal gaming state, a variable display time (specifically, 20 to 30 seconds) corresponding to a reach display is set, just like for a game in which the ceiling is reached during a jackpot result. In contrast, for a game in which the ceiling is reached during the second normal gaming state through the fourth normal gaming state, a variable display time that does not correspond to a reach display is set by referring to the variable display time tables shown in Figures 114 (a2) and 115 (a2).

Next, we will explain the changing display patterns for each game round, referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 116.

As shown in Figure 116(a), in a game round that results in a normal loss result (complete loss result) that does not support the reach display, the variable display of each symbol row that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) begins in time with the start of the game round. After that, without transitioning to the reach display, the symbols stop in the order of the upper symbol row → lower symbol row → middle symbol row, and the symbol combination that corresponds to a normal loss result that does not support the reach display is displayed as a fixed display (confirmed display). This variable display mode is the same in the first to fourth normal game states.

As shown in Figure 116 (b), in a game round that results in a special miss in the normal game state (first normal game state) compatible with the low frequency support mode, the variable display of each symbol row that is frozen on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) begins in conjunction with the start of the game round. After that, the upper symbol row and then the lower symbol row stop in that order, transitioning to a reach display. After transitioning to the reach display, the middle symbol row stops so that the symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result (the symbol combination of "3," "1," and "4") is frozen and displayed (confirmed display). This symbol combination clearly informs the player that a special miss result has occurred.

As shown in Figure 116 (c), in a game that results in a special miss in a normal game state (second normal game state to fourth normal game state) that supports the high frequency support mode, the variable display of each symbol row that is frozen and displayed on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) begins in time with the start of the game. After that, without transitioning to a reach display, the symbols freeze in the order of the top symbol row → bottom symbol row → middle symbol row, and a symbol combination that corresponds to a normal miss that does not support a reach display is frozen and displayed (determined display). In other words, it is difficult to determine from the symbol combination whether the current game will result in a special miss.

According to the configuration shown in this embodiment, even if gameplay progresses without a jackpot result, a transition to the fourth normal game state corresponding to high-frequency support mode A can occur if a special miss occurs or the ceiling is reached. Transitioning to the fourth normal game state increases the frequency of winning at the second actuation port 92A, reducing investment. This configuration is desirable for improving the soundness of gameplay. However, if a special miss occurs in a normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode, such as the fourth normal game state, the special miss is invalidated and treated the same as a normal miss. While this is desirable for preventing increased gambling, there is a concern that if a player becomes aware of the special miss, the player may feel as if they have wasted their luck. This could be a factor that reduces motivation to play. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this embodiment, if a special loss occurs during the first normal game state, a symbol combination indicating the special loss is displayed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95. On the other hand, if a special loss occurs during the fourth normal game state (the same applies to the second normal game state and the third normal game state), a symbol combination similar to that of a normal loss is displayed. With this configuration, even if a special loss occurs during the fourth normal game state (the same applies to the second normal game state and the third normal game state), it can be made less noticeable. This prevents the above-mentioned inconveniences from occurring and contributes to improving player satisfaction. This is desirable for increasing attention to the game.

Furthermore, if a special miss occurs during the first normal game state, the variable display time will be the variable display time corresponding to the reach display, and if a special miss occurs during a normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode such as the fourth normal technique state, the variable display time will be the variable display time not corresponding to the reach display. In this way, even if a special miss occurs during a high-frequency support mode, the effect described above can be more effectively achieved by making the game round less noticeable. In particular, if a special miss occurs during a normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode such as the fourth normal technique state, the same variable display time table as when a normal miss occurs (not corresponding to the reach display) during a normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode such as the fourth normal technique state is referenced, and the variable display time is set in a common manner. This makes it possible to confuse a game round resulting in a special miss with a game round resulting in a normal miss, thereby effectively enhancing the effect described above.

<Modification 1>
In the eleventh embodiment, the symbol combination that is displayed as a stopped symbol (confirmed symbol) on the symbol display device 95 when the special failure result A occurs and the symbol combination that is displayed as a stopped symbol (confirmed symbol) on the symbol display device 95 when the special failure result B occurs are unified, but this is not limited to this. The symbol combination that is displayed as a stopped symbol on the symbol display device 95 when the special failure result A occurs (the symbol combination corresponding to the special failure result A) may be different from the symbol combination that is displayed as a stopped symbol on the symbol display device 95 when the special failure result B occurs (the symbol combination corresponding to the special failure result B).

Furthermore, if separate symbol combinations are provided for special failure result A and special failure result B, and the type of special failure result can be identified from the symbol combination, then if the relatively more advantageous special failure result B is obtained, a symbol combination other than that corresponding to special failure result B (a symbol combination corresponding to a normal failure result) may be frozen to conceal the fact that it is a special failure result B, while if the relatively less advantageous special failure result A is obtained, a symbol combination corresponding to special failure result A may be frozen to indicate that it is a special failure result A.Furthermore, if the relatively more advantageous special failure result B is obtained, a symbol combination corresponding to special failure result B may be frozen to indicate that it is a special failure result B, while if the relatively less advantageous special failure result A is obtained, a symbol combination other than that corresponding to special failure result A (a symbol combination corresponding to a normal failure result) may be frozen to indicate that it is a special failure result A.

<Modification 2>
In the eleventh embodiment, when a special failure occurs during a normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode (the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state), the symbol display device 95 displays a symbol combination corresponding to the normal failure result in a static display, but this is not limited to this. When a special failure occurs during a normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode (the third normal game state to the fourth normal game state), the symbol display device 95 displays a symbol combination corresponding to the normal failure result in a static display. On the other hand, when a special failure occurs during a normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B (the fourth normal game state), which is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A to which a transition is made in response to a special failure, the symbol display device 95 can also be configured to display a combination of "3,""1," and "4" symbols corresponding to the special failure result in a static display.

<Modification 3>
If the special failure result is not always revealed, the discrepancy between the probability of the special failure result as perceived by the player and the probability of the special failure result actually occurring will become larger. This is a concern as it could cause the player to have negative impressions such as "I'm not compatible with the gaming machine" or "The flow is bad." In light of this phenomenon, it is preferable to configure the symbol display device 95 to determine whether or not to statically display a symbol combination corresponding to a special failure result depending on the number of remaining plays in the fourth normal game state, specifically, to statically display a symbol combination corresponding to a special failure result when the number of remaining plays is a predetermined number or more, but not to statically display a symbol combination corresponding to a special failure result when the number of remaining plays is less than the predetermined number.

<Modification 4>
It is also possible to configure the system to determine whether the reserved information stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 corresponds to a special miss result before the information is subjected to a win/loss determination, and to execute a preview effect (a so-called pre-read effect) according to the result of the pre-determined result. In the configuration shown in this embodiment, the occurrence of the preview effect during a normal game state compatible with the high-frequency support mode is likely to cause discomfort to the player. Therefore, it is desirable to restrict at least one of the above-mentioned pre-determined result and preview effect in a normal game state compatible with the high-frequency support mode, and to refrain from displaying the preview effect.

Twelfth Embodiment
In a configuration in which a limit (a reference number of times to end) is set for the fourth normal game state, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, as shown in the first embodiment, there is a possibility that the fourth normal game state will end without a jackpot result during the fourth normal game state. In a configuration in which the value of the play count counter that determines the ceiling function is reset (cleared to 0) only upon a jackpot, i.e., in a configuration in which the ceiling is not reset when the above event (hereinafter referred to as a run-through) occurs, the ceiling is not reset until the next jackpot, which can lead to significant investment after the run-through. Here, gaming machines are typically connected to a data display device installed in the amusement hall, and the data display device displays the number of plays after a jackpot. The amusement hall manager can refer to this data display device to determine whether the ceiling has been reached. However, in amusement halls, the power to the gaming machines and data display device is turned off after business hours and turned on in the morning of each business day. Such a power operation (OFF → ON) resets (clears to 0) the number of games played, making it difficult to determine whether the ceiling has been reached after the power operation. This difficulty in grasping the state of the gaming machine is expected to be a factor in reducing convenience for the manager. One of the features of this embodiment is that it has been designed to take such circumstances into consideration. Below, we will explain the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, we will explain the support mode switching process in this embodiment with reference to the flowchart in Figure 117.

(Support mode switching process)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S9001, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode B. If the determination in step S9001 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S9002. In step S9002, it is determined whether a count limit flag is stored in the various flags storage area 435 of RAM 404. If the determination in step S9002 is negative, the switching process ends. If the determination in step S9002 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S9003. In step S9003, the continuation count counter in the various counter area 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1." In the following step S9004, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0." If the determination in step S9004 is negative, the switching process ends. If the determination in step S9004 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S9005, where the high-frequency support mode flag (more specifically, the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the number-limit flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 are cleared, and the switching process is terminated. Clearing the high-frequency support mode flag switches the support mode from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S9001, if a negative determination is made in step S9001, the process proceeds to step S9006. In step S9006, it is determined whether the current support mode is high frequency support mode A. If a positive determination is made in step S9006, the process proceeds to step S9007. In step S9007, it is determined whether the value of the number of plays counter has reached its upper limit. If a negative determination is made in step S9007, the process proceeds to step S9008. In step S9008, the continuation count counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S9009, it is determined whether the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1609, the switching process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S9009, the process proceeds to step S9015. In step S9015, it is determined whether the current high-frequency support mode A was high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling. If a negative judgment is made in step S9015, the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag) and the number-of-plays limit flag are cleared in step S9005, and the switching process ends. In other words, when the number of games played during high-frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the mode switches to low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S9015, the process proceeds to step S9016. In step S9016, a special notification preparation flag is set in the various flags storage area 435 of RAM 404. Thereafter, in step S9005, the high frequency support mode flag (high frequency support mode A flag) and the number of times limit flag are cleared, and the switching process ends. In other words, when the number of times played in high frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the mode switches to low frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S9006, if a negative judgment is made in step S9006, i.e., if the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S9010. In step S9010, it is determined whether the value of the number of plays counter has reached its upper limit. If a negative judgment is made in step S9010, the process proceeds to step S9011. In step S9011, it is determined whether the current play corresponds to a special miss. If it does not correspond to a special miss, a negative judgment is made in step S9011, and this switching process ends. If a positive judgment is made in step S9011 (if it corresponds to a special miss) or if a positive judgment is made in step S9010 (if the ceiling has been reached), the process proceeds to step S9012. In step S9012, a high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flags storage area 435 of RAM 404. Then, in the following step S9013, a number-limit flag is set in the various flags storage area 435 of RAM 404. After that, proceed to step S9014, execute the continuation counter setting process, and then terminate this switching process.

In the continuation counter setting process, if the value of the play count counter reaches the upper limit (ceiling) during the current play, the continuation counter is set to "400". This means that high-frequency support mode A will continue until a jackpot is achieved during that high-frequency support mode A or 400 play counts have been executed during that high-frequency support mode A. If the current play result is a special miss A, the continuation counter is set to "20". This means that high-frequency support mode A will continue until a jackpot is achieved during that high-frequency support mode A or 20 play counts have been executed during that high-frequency support mode A. If the current play result is a special miss B, the continuation counter is set to "40". This means that high-frequency support mode A will continue until a jackpot is achieved during that high-frequency support mode A or 40 play counts have been executed during that high-frequency support mode A.

Returning to the explanation of step S9007, if the value of the play count counter reaches the upper limit (ceiling) during high-frequency support mode A, the continuation count counter is set (overwritten) to "400" in step S9014, and this switching process is terminated. This extends high-frequency support mode A so that it continues until the number of plays executed during high-frequency support mode A reaches 400. In other words, if the ceiling is reached during high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special miss, the number of plays for high-frequency support mode A to continue is reset (overwritten), and the upper limit of the fourth normal game state is raised without going through another normal game state, etc.

Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 118. As described in the first embodiment, the main processing is initiated when the power is turned on, and after the main processing is executed, the system transitions to the normal processing described above (see Figure 23).

(Main processing)
In the main process, first, in step S9101, the startup process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, the process waits for about 500 msec, for example, to wait for the slave control board (dispensing control device 242, etc.) to become operable.

In the following step S9102, it is determined whether 1 second, which is the permission/prohibition period, has elapsed since the start-up process of step S9101. If 1 second has not elapsed, the process of step S9102 is executed again. This time is measured by counting the number of times step S9102 is executed. For example, if the time required from a negative determination in step S9102 to executing the process of step S9102 again is 0.1 msec, it is determined that 1 second has elapsed since the start-up process of step S9101 when the count value reaches 10,000. Note that the specific configuration for measuring time is arbitrary; for example, time may be measured using a real-time clock. If it is determined in step S9102 that 1 second has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S9103.

In step S9103, access to RAM 404 is permitted. Then, in step S9104, it is determined whether the reset switch 166 provided on the power supply/launch control device 243 is ON, and in the following step S9105, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the power outage flag storage area of RAM 404. In addition, in step S9106, a RAM judgment value is calculated, and in the following step S9107, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, i.e., the validity of the stored data. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 404. It is also possible to determine the validity of the stored data by determining whether a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 404 is saved correctly.

In this pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized upon power-on, such as when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the reset switch 166. If the reset switch 166 is pressed (ON), processing proceeds to steps S9108 to S9109. Similarly, if no power-off occurrence information has been set or if an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by a RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), processing proceeds to steps S9108 to S9109. In step S9108, the used area of RAM 404 is cleared to 0, and in step S9109, initialization processing of RAM 404 is performed. In processing of step S9108, the values of the number of games counter and the continuation number counter provided in the various counter area 434 are reset (cleared to 0). Furthermore, if a special notification preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage area, the special notification preparation flag is erased.

On the other hand, if the reset switch 166 has not been pressed, the power outage flag stored in the power outage flag storage area is cleared in step S9115, provided that the power outage flag is stored and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal.

After executing the processing of step S9115 or step S9109, the process proceeds to step S9110. In step S9110, it is determined whether a special notification preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. If a special notification preparation flag is not stored, in step S9111, an initial command setting process is executed to output an initial command to the dispensing control device 242. Then, in step S9112, interrupt permission is set and normal processing is performed. By inputting the initial command from the main control device 162, the MPU of the dispensing control device 242 recognizes that communication with the main control device 162 is proceeding normally.

If a positive judgment is made in step S9110, the process proceeds to step S9113. In step S9113, special notification start processing is executed. In the following step S2514, the special notification preparation flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404 is erased. After that, the processes of steps S2511 and S2512 are executed, and the process moves to normal processing. In the special notification start processing of step S9113, a special notification start command is set. This special notification start command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 of normal processing (see Figure 23). The notification/performance control device 140 starts a special notification based on receiving this special notification start command.

Here, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 119 (a), we will explain the special notification processing executed by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140. The special notification processing is processing executed by the MPU 442 as part of regular processing.

(Special notification processing)
In the special notification process, first, in step S9201, it is determined whether or not a special notification is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S9201, it is determined in step S9202 whether or not the special notification start command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a negative determination is made in step S9202, the special notification process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S9202, the process proceeds to step S9203, where the special notification start process is executed, and then the special notification process is terminated. In the special notification start process in step S9203, as shown in Figures 119(b) and 119(c), the circular illumination unit 26 of the front door frame 14 is fully illuminated. The hall manager of the gaming hall can easily determine whether or not the gaming machine is in a state after flying through the ceiling based on whether or not the circular illumination unit 26 is illuminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S9201, if a positive judgment is made in step S9201, i.e., if a special alert is being executed, processing to cancel the special alert is executed in steps S9204 to S9206. Here, we will first refer to the flowchart in Figure 120 to explain the special alert control processing executed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 as part of normal processing (see Figure 23).

(Special notification control process)
In the special notification control process, first, in step S9301, it is determined whether the reset switch 166 is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S9301, the special notification control process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S9301, the special notification cancellation process is executed in step S9302. In the special notification cancellation process, a special notification cancellation command is set. This special notification cancellation command is sent to the notification/presentation control device 140 in step S401 (see Figure 23) of the normal process. In the following step S9302, the number of games played counter in the various counter area 434 is reset (cleared to 0), and the special notification control process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the special alarm processing in Figure 119(a), in step S9204, it is determined whether a special alarm cancellation command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a positive determination is made in step S9204, special alarm cancellation processing is executed in step S9205. In the special alarm cancellation processing, the annular illumination unit 26 described above is turned off, as shown in Figure 119(c) → Figure 119(b).

If a negative judgment is made in step S9204, the process proceeds to step S9206 to determine whether the effect button 35 provided on the front door frame 14 has been operated (whether it has been turned ON). If a negative judgment is made in step S9206, the special notification processing is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S9206, the special notification cancellation processing is executed in step S9205, and then the special notification processing is terminated.

As described above in detail, when the reset switch 166 is operated (turned ON) while a special notification is being executed, the number of plays counter is reset (cleared to 0) and the special notification is canceled. In contrast, when the effect button 35 is operated (turned ON) while a special notification is being executed, the number of plays counter is not reset (cleared to 0), and the special notification is simply canceled.

If a game is played without the special notification being canceled, the light-emitting effect in the circular illumination unit 26 is given priority as the game progresses. However, if the game stops, the light-emitting mode in the circular illumination unit 26 returns to the mode corresponding to the special notification (all lights on). Also, if an operation-responsive effect is executed while the game is in progress, the effect button 35 may be operated by the player, but even if the effect button 35 is operated in a situation where the light-emitting effect associated with the game progress is given priority, the special notification will not be canceled and the temporarily suspended state will be maintained.

If the number of play times (play count) after the special play state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a jackpot, the game transitions to the fourth normal play state, which corresponds to the high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support mode A). In the fourth normal play state, frequent wins into the actuation ports 91 and 92 reduce investments associated with game progress. This function (ceiling function) is desirable for rescuing players. The fourth normal play state, entered upon reaching the ceiling, has an end reference number (400 plays). Even if the ceiling is reached, there is a possibility that the fourth normal play state will end without resulting in a jackpot during the fourth normal play state (ceiling breakthrough). This is desirable for preventing excessive benefits from reaching the ceiling, which could lead to excessive gambling. However, after the ceiling breakthrough, the number of play times stored in the play count counter remains unreset, making it impossible to reach the ceiling again. If the power switch is turned from OFF to ON without operating the reset switch 166 while the player is still in the state after running through the ceiling, a special notification will be issued. This allows the amusement hall manager to know whether the player is in the state after running through the ceiling. Supporting the player in knowing the state after running through the ceiling by turning on the power in this way is preferable for improving convenience for the manager.

If either the effect button 35 or the reset switch 166 is operated while the special notification is being executed, the special notification will be canceled. In contrast, if the reset switch 166 is operated while the special notification is being executed, the number of times the game has been played stored in the play count counter will be reset. This configuration allows the amusement hall manager to easily select how to respond to a gaming machine that is executing a special notification, depending on the business model of the amusement hall. In other words, the manager can choose whether to cancel only the special notification described above and leave the machine in the ceiling-flying state, or to reset the ceiling. This configuration allows the above-mentioned effects to be more effectively achieved.

The effect button 35, serving as the "first operating means," is located on the front of the gaming machine, and the reset switch 166, serving as the "second operating means," is located on the back of the gaming machine. This layout improves convenience for the manager while ideally avoiding the inconvenience of players resetting the number of runs.

<Modification 1>
In the twelfth embodiment, the operation means for canceling the special notification (effect button 35) is disposed on the front side of the gaming machine (more specifically, the front door frame 14), and the operation means for canceling the special notification and resetting the ceiling (reset switch 166) is disposed on the back side of the gaming machine (more specifically, the main control device 162), but this is not limited to this. Both the operation means for canceling the special notification and the operation means for canceling the special notification and resetting the ceiling may be disposed on the back side of the gaming machine.

In addition, it is sufficient for the operating means for canceling special alarms and resetting the ceiling to be located in a position that cannot be operated by the player, for example, in a position that can be accessed from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door frame 14 or inner frame 13, and they do not necessarily have to be located in the main control device 162.

<Modification 2>
In the twelfth embodiment, the effect button 35 is configured to function as both an operation means for the operation-responsive effect and an operation means for canceling the special notification, but this is not limited to this. An operation means for canceling the special notification may be provided separately from the effect button 35.

<Modification 3>
If a game is played under the condition that the special notification is not cancelled and continues, it is possible to configure the annular illumination unit 26 so that the light-emitting effects accompanying the progress of the game are not executed.

<Modification 4>
The special notification can be configured to execute a first special notification using the circular lighting unit 26 and a second special notification using the pattern display device 95 (for example, a counter display showing the number of plays remaining until the ceiling is reached, with the counter being fixed at a specific value such as "9999" or "0000" when the ceiling is reached), in parallel, and if the effect button 35 or reset switch 166 is operated while the special notification is being executed, the first special notification is canceled while the second special notification continues.

<Modification 5>
In the twelfth embodiment, when the effect button 35 is operated while the special notification is being executed, the special notification is canceled, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the special notification to be switched from a relatively high distinctiveness (highly noticeable) to a relatively low distinctiveness (less noticeable) by operating the effect button 35. In such a configuration, the device that executes the special notification may be changed from the circular illumination unit 26 to another device (for example, the symbol display device 95 or a lamp unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine).

<Modification 6>
In the twelfth embodiment, the special notification is implemented by fully lighting the circular illumination unit 26 of the front door frame 14, but the specific form of the special notification is arbitrary. It is sufficient to be able to distinguish between gaming machines that are implementing the special notification and gaming machines that are not implementing the special notification. For example, the special notification may be implemented by making the circular illumination unit 26 emit light in a special manner. It is also possible to implement the special notification on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, or by sound output from the speaker unit 29.

<Modification 7>
In gaming halls, instead of turning the power on/off for each gaming machine individually, work time is reduced by turning the power on/off for each island unit. Therefore, if the power is turned off and then turned on (restarted) while a special notification is being executed, the following effects can be expected by configuring the system to cancel the special notification. In other words, if the system is configured so that the operation of the effect button 35 or reset switch 166 is not required to cancel the special notification, there is no need to perform the cancel operation for each gaming machine individually, which can contribute to improving work efficiency.

In addition, if a ball enters a ball entry section such as the operating port 91, 92 or a game round begins while a special notification is being issued, the special notification can be temporarily restricted or cancelled.

<Modification 8>
In the twelfth embodiment, the effect button 35 is connected to the notification/effect control device 140, but this is not limited to this. The effect button 35 can also be connected to the main control device 162.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the behavior when the ceiling is reached and a jackpot occurs at the same time is characteristic. The following describes the characteristic configuration of this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a left-right symmetrical gauge (see FIG. 6), but in this embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) is a left-right asymmetrical gauge. The game board unit 80A will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a front view of the game board unit 80A.

The gaming board 80aA has multiple large and small openings that run through it in its thickness direction (front-to-back direction). Each opening is equipped with a general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83A, a through gate 84A, etc. When gaming balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating opening unit 82A, or the variable winning device 83A, they are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided corresponding to each winning section, and based on the detection results, the player is awarded a prize such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of gaming balls). In addition, an outlet 86 is provided at the bottom of the gaming board 80aA, and gaming balls that do not enter the various winning sections are discharged from the gaming area PE through the outlet 86.

In addition, numerous game pins 87 are planted on the game board 80aA to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills are also arranged. These game pins 87, windmills, and other components differentiate the flow path of the game balls, and are adjusted so that winning the above-mentioned general winning slot 81, etc. occurs with an appropriate probability.

Like the operating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment, the operating port unit 82A is composed of a first operating port 91A and a second operating port 92A arranged directly below the first operating port 91A. In particular, the second operating port 92A is equipped with an electric device 93A that functions as an opening/closing type ball-scoring assistance device (ball-scoring assistance means) or opening/closing member (opening/closing means).

A center frame 96A is provided on the gaming board 80aA, surrounding the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front of the gaming board 80aA, and similar to the first embodiment described above, the center frame 96A divides the flow path of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area PE into two routes: one that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side, and one that bypasses it from the left side. However, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the first actuation port 91A, second actuation port 92A, variable entry device 83A, and through gate 84A has been changed so that game balls launched down the left route can enter the first actuation port 91A and second actuation port 92A but cannot enter the variable entry device 83A or through gate 84A, and game balls launched down the right route can enter the second actuation port 92A, through gate 84A, and variable entry device 83A but cannot enter the first actuation port 91A. Note that it may also be configured so that game balls launched down the left route cannot enter the second actuation port 92A.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right and left routes depending on the game situation, it is possible to advance the game to an advantage. By encouraging such technical intervention, monotony in the game is prevented.

(Reserved ball storage area)
Here, in this embodiment, the configuration for storing the reserved information based on winnings in the actuation ports 91A and 92A is different from that in the first embodiment. Below, the configuration for storing the reserved information in this embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 122.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in this embodiment has a first actuation port reserve area Ra that stores the values of the win random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a win occurs in the first actuation port 91A, and a second actuation port reserve area Rb that stores the values of the win random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 when a win occurs in the second actuation port 92A.

The first actuation port holding area Ra is made up of areas 1 to 4, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the first actuation port 91A, the numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of area 1 → area 2 → area 3 → area 4. The second actuation port holding area Rb is made up of areas 1 to 4, and if multiple consecutive wins occur at the second actuation port 92A, the numerical information (hold information) is stored in chronological order in the order of area 1 → area 2 → area 3 → area 4.

In this embodiment, if reserved information is stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb, the reserved information stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb (more specifically, the first area) is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. If reserved information is not stored in the second actuation port reserve area Rb but reserved information is stored in the first actuation port reserve area Ra, the reserved information stored in the first actuation port reserve area Ra (more specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, a special loss could be determined by a lottery based on winning entries into actuation ports 91 and 92. However, in this embodiment, the special loss is omitted (excluded) from the lottery results based on winning entries into first actuation port 91 and second actuation port 92, which is a difference from the first embodiment. Below, the win/loss table for actuation ports in this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figure 123.

(Actuator port pass/fail table)
As shown in Figure 123, the hit/fail tables for the operating port include a hit/fail table for low probability mode (a group of hit/fail information for low probability) and a hit/fail table for high probability mode (a group of hit/fail information for high probability).

When the low-probability mode hit/miss table (Figure 123(a)) is referenced in the lottery based on winning through actuation ports 91A and 92A, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are six: "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". In other words, of the hit random number counter C1 values from "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to jackpot results. On the other hand, when the high-probability mode hit/miss table (Figure 123(b)) is referenced in the lottery, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are 30: "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107", ... "597". In other words, of the winning random number counter C1 values from "0 to 599," "7," "37," "57," "77," "97," "107," ... "597" correspond to jackpot results. All random number values that do not correspond to jackpot results correspond to miss results (specifically, normal miss results). In other words, in a lottery based on winning through actuation ports 91A and 92A, the "special miss" shown in the first embodiment does not occur.

The distribution table for actuation ports is divided into a distribution table for the first actuation port and a distribution table for the second actuation port. The contents of the distribution table will now be explained using the schematic diagram in Figure 124.

As shown in Figure 124(a), the allocation table for the first operating port sets the allocation destinations for game results as a 6R normal jackpot result (low probability special game result), a 6R special jackpot result (high probability special game result), and a 2R special jackpot result (high probability game result). Specifically, of the value of the type counter C2 from "0 to 29," "0 to 9" corresponds to a 6R normal jackpot result, "10 to 19" corresponds to a 6R special jackpot result, and "20 to 29" corresponds to a 2R special jackpot result.

As shown in Figure 124 (b), the allocation table for the second operating port sets the allocation destinations for game results as a 6R normal jackpot result (low-probability special game result) and a 6R special jackpot result (high-probability special game result). Specifically, of the value of the type counter C2, which ranges from "0 to 29," "0 to 9" corresponds to a 6R normal jackpot result, and "10 to 29" corresponds to a 6R special jackpot result.

Here, we will provide additional explanations about each jackpot, referring to the schematic diagram in Figure 125.

If a 6R normal jackpot result occurs, the game will transition to the third normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode B, after the special game state ends. As explained in the first embodiment, after transitioning to the third normal game state, if the number of plays executed during the third normal game state reaches the reference number of times for termination (specifically, "40 plays"), the game will transition to the first normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. In other words, a limit is placed on the number of plays in the third normal game state. In this embodiment, the count of the number of plays during the third normal game state is limited to the number of plays executed based on a win at the second actuation port 92A.

If a 6R probability jackpot is achieved, the game will transition to the second normal game state, which corresponds to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B, after the special game state ends. As explained in the first embodiment, the second normal game state will continue until the next jackpot is achieved. In contrast, if a 2R probability jackpot is achieved, the game will transition to the fifth normal game state, which corresponds to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode, after the special game state ends.

Here, referring to Figure 126, we will provide additional explanation on the flow of play when the ceiling is reached and a jackpot occurs at the same time.

In the example shown in Figure 126(a), play progresses in the first normal game corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode without resulting in a jackpot, and the number of plays executed after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling). The play that reaches the ceiling (the 400th play) results in a 6R normal jackpot, and the game transitions to the special game state without transitioning to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling. After the special game state ends, the game transitions to the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B.

In the example shown in Figure 126 (b), play progresses in the first normal game corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode without resulting in a jackpot, and the number of plays executed after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling). The play that reaches this ceiling (the 400th play) results in a 6R special jackpot, and the game transitions to the special game state without transitioning to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling. After the special game state ends, the game transitions to the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B.

In the example shown in Figure 126 (c), play progresses without resulting in a jackpot in the first normal game corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, and the number of plays executed after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling). The play that reaches this ceiling (the 400th play) results in a 2R special jackpot, and the game transitions to the special game state without transitioning to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling. After the special game state ends, the game transitions to the fifth normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode.

As detailed above, if reaching the ceiling coincides with a 6R normal jackpot result, a 6R special jackpot result, or a 2R special jackpot result, the player will not receive the benefit of reaching the ceiling. With this configuration, there is a concern that the benefit will be wiped out even though the ceiling has been reached, significantly reducing player satisfaction. This embodiment has been devised to address this situation. Here, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 127(a), we will explain the first fluctuation start process executed as part of the variable display control process (see Figure 41) in the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140. The first fluctuation start process is a process for starting a game round effect based on the reception of a fluctuation start command from the main control device 162, and sets the variable display mode of the pattern, such as a reach display, as a game round effect.

(First fluctuation start processing)
In the first fluctuation start process, first, in step S9401, the currently received fluctuation start command is read, and information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time are identified from the command. Also, as already explained, when a fluctuation start command is sent from the main control unit 162, a type command is also sent together. In step S9401, the type command received along with the currently received fluctuation start command is read, and various information related to the game result, such as information on the probability variable jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, information on the special miss result, information on the normal miss result, and information on reaching the ceiling, is identified from the identified information. Then, in step S9401, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the jackpot type if a jackpot has been won, information on the special miss if a special miss, information on the type of special miss if a special miss, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if a jackpot has not been won and there is no special miss, information on whether or not the ceiling has been reached, information on the fluctuation display time, etc. are grasped from the identified information, and the grasped information is stored in a register of the MPU 442.

In the following step S9402, based on the information obtained in step S9401, it is determined whether the result of the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result. If the current game round result is a jackpot result (a 6R special jackpot result or a 6R regular jackpot result), it is determined in the following step S9411 whether the current game round will be the one in which the ceiling is reached. If a negative determination is made in step S9411, the following step S9403 executes a jackpot effect setting process. The jackpot effect setting process is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the jackpot symbol combination to be stopped and the active line on which that symbol combination will be stopped, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the jackpot symbols.

In the stop result determination process for a jackpot, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the stop result where the same symbol combination is formed on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the following symbol combinations are defined as symbol combinations corresponding to a jackpot: "1", "1", "1" symbol combination, "2", "2", "2" symbol combination, "3", "3", "3" symbol combination, "4", "4", "4" symbol combination, "5", "5", "5" symbol combination, "6", "6", "6" symbol combination, "7", "7", "7", "7" symbol combination, "8", "8", "8" symbol combination, "9", "9", "9" symbol combination, and "9" symbol combination (see, for example, Figure 45(a)).

As already explained, when a jackpot result is reached, the result is notified via a reach display. The process for determining the variable display mode for a jackpot retrieves the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, and determines the presentation pattern for a normal reach display or super reach display that corresponds to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. Additionally, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If a positive judgment is made in step S9411, that is, if the current play is the play in which the ceiling is reached and corresponds to a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S9412. In step S9412, overlap effect setting processing is executed. Details of this overlap effect setting processing will be described later.

If it is determined in step S9402 that the result is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S9404. In step S9404, it is determined whether the ceiling will be reached in this game. If the ceiling will be reached, a positive determination is made in step S9404 and the process proceeds to step S9407. In step S9407, the effect setting process for reaching the ceiling is executed. The effect setting process for reaching the ceiling is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination to be displayed as a stop symbol for reaching the ceiling and the active line on which that symbol combination will be displayed as a stop symbol, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the symbol for reaching the ceiling.

In the process for determining the stop result for reaching the ceiling, a stop result in which a combination of symbols for reaching the ceiling is formed on one of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result for this game round. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, the combination of "1", "3", and "4" symbols is defined as the symbol combination that corresponds to reaching the ceiling (see Figure 45 (b)).

When the ceiling is reached, the result is notified via a reach display. The process of determining the variable display mode for reaching the ceiling retrieves the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, and determines the presentation pattern for a normal reach display or super reach display that corresponds to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. Additionally, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If a negative determination is made in step S9404, the process proceeds to step S9406. In step S9406, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a special miss. If a positive determination is made in step S9406, the process proceeds to step S9407. In step S9407, the special miss effect setting process is executed. The special miss effect setting process is broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the special miss pattern combination to be stopped and the active line on which that pattern combination will be stopped, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the special miss pattern.

In the stop result determination process for special misses, the stop result for this game round is determined to be the stop result where a combination of symbols corresponding to a special miss is formed on one of the active lines L1 to L5. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In this embodiment, just as when the ceiling is reached, the combination of "1", "3", and "4" symbols is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to a special miss (see Figure 45 (b)).

If a special miss occurs, the result is notified via a reach display. The process for determining the variable display mode for a special miss retrieves the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, and determines the presentation pattern for a normal reach display or super reach display that corresponds to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. Additionally, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If a negative judgment is made in step S9406, the process proceeds to step S9408, where the effect setting process for a complete miss is executed. In the effect setting process for a complete miss, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. If a reach will occur, the effect setting process for a reach occurrence is executed, and if a reach will not occur, the effect setting process for a reach not occurring is executed.

The effect setting process for reaching a win can be broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination to be displayed when a win is reached and a valid line on which that symbol combination will be displayed, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the symbol when a win is reached and a complete miss.

In the stop result determination process for reach-compatible complete misses, the stop symbols are determined so that they do not result in any of the symbol combinations corresponding to a jackpot result, a symbol combination corresponding to a special miss result, or a symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the active lines L1-L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

The process for determining the variable display mode for reach-compatible complete misses retrieves the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, and determines the presentation pattern for normal reach display or super reach display that corresponds to the game result for the variable display time and type command of the currently received variation start command. In addition, the process executes a process for storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

The effect setting process for when a reach does not occur can be broadly divided into a stop result determination process that determines the symbol combination to be displayed as a complete miss and not a reach and the effective line on which that symbol combination will be displayed as a complete miss, and a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) that determines the variable display mode of the symbol for a complete miss and not a reach.

In the stop result determination process for non-reach complete misses, the stop symbols are determined so that they do not result in any of the symbol combinations corresponding to a jackpot result, special miss results, or ceiling hit results. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each active line L1-L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in the final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

The process for determining the variable display mode for a complete miss that does not correspond to a reach is to obtain the variable display pattern table for a miss that does not correspond to a reach stored in various table areas of ROM 443, and determine the presentation pattern that corresponds to the game result for the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

After executing any of steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and S9412, the process proceeds to step S9409. In step S9409, commands containing information on the stop result and presentation pattern determined in steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and S9412 are output to the display control device 410 as stop result commands and pattern commands, respectively. Based on the received stop result commands and pattern commands, the MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the display of the symbol display device 95 to execute presentations for the current game round.

After executing the processing of step S9409, the processing to start the effect for the game round is executed in the following step S9410, and then this fluctuation start processing is terminated. Specifically, drive control of the speaker unit 29 and lamp unit 26 is started based on the effect pattern determined in the above steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and S9412, and the effect for the game round is started.

Here, the overlap setting process of step S9412 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 127 (b). In the overlap setting process, step S9501 determines whether the current jackpot result is either a 2R special jackpot result or a 6R normal jackpot result. If a positive determination is made in step S9501, normal setting processing is executed in step S9502. The normal setting processing is the same as the jackpot effect setting processing shown in step S9403 above.

In other words, in the stop result determination process that constitutes the normal setting process, a stop result in which the same symbol combination is formed on one active line L1-L5 is determined as the stop result for this game round. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each active line L1-L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

If the result is a 6R normal jackpot, one of the following symbol combinations will be set as the symbol combination to be stopped (determined) for display: "2", "2", "2" symbol combination, "4", "4", "4" symbol combination, "6", "6", "6" symbol combination, "8", "8" symbol combination, "8" symbol combination.

If the result is a 2R special jackpot, one of the following symbol combinations will be set as the symbol combination to be stopped (determined) for display: "1", "1", "1" combination, "3", "3", "3" combination, "5", "5", "5" combination, "9", "9", "9" combination.

If a jackpot result is achieved, the result is notified via a reach display. The variable display mode determination process, which constitutes the normal setting process, obtains the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, and determines the presentation pattern for a normal reach display or super reach display that corresponds to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If a negative judgment is made in step S9501, i.e., if the current jackpot result is a 6R variable jackpot result, special setting processing is executed in step S9503. Like the normal setting processing in step S9502, the special setting processing is also composed of a stop result determination processing and a variable display mode determination processing.

In the stop result determination process, which constitutes the special setting process, a stop result in which the same symbol combination is formed on one active line L1-L5 is determined as the stop result for this game round. Specifically, the final stop line tables stored in various table areas of ROM 443 store each active line L1-L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address memory area provided in RAM 444. In addition, information on the determined stop result is stored in a stop result address memory area. Then, the symbol combination of "7", "7", and "7" is set as the symbol combination to be stopped (determined) on the final stop line stored in the stop result address memory area.

If a jackpot result is achieved, the result is notified via a reach display. The variable display mode determination process, which constitutes the special setting process, obtains the variable display pattern tables for reach displays stored in the various table areas of ROM 443, and determines the presentation pattern for a normal reach display or super reach display that corresponds to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variable start command. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

In the following explanation, the pattern variable display mode determined in step S9503 above will be referred to as the special variable display mode, and will be distinguished from the pattern variable display mode (normal variable display mode) determined in steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and step S9502 above.

(Comparison of variable display modes)
Here, referring to Figure 128, we will explain the difference between the variable display mode (normal variable display mode) when the ceiling is reached and a 6R normal jackpot result and a 2R variable probability jackpot result overlap, and the variable display mode (special variable display mode) when the ceiling is reached and a 6R variable probability jackpot result overlap. Figure 128(a) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of play when the ceiling is reached and a 2R variable probability jackpot result overlap, and Figure 128(b) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of play when the ceiling is reached and a 6R variable probability jackpot result overlap.

In a game in which the ceiling is reached and a 2R special jackpot result occurs, as shown in Figure 128(a), the display of changing patterns on the operation port display unit and the display of changing patterns on the pattern display device 95 (display screen 95a) begins at timing tj1, when the game starts. At timing tj2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change, the display transitions to a reach display, and at timing tj3, the operation port display unit displays a frozen pattern corresponding to the 2R special jackpot result, and the pattern display device 95 displays a frozen pattern combination corresponding to the 2R special jackpot result (confirmed display). This clearly notifies the player that a 2R special jackpot result has occurred. In this variable display mode, the game transitions to a special game state without clearly indicating that the ceiling has been reached.

The game flow when the ceiling is reached and a 6R normal jackpot result occurs simultaneously is basically the same as in Figure 128(a), with the difference being that the symbol combination that is finally displayed (determined display) will be the symbol combination that corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, so explanation will be omitted.

In a game in which the ceiling is reached and a 6R special jackpot result occurs at the same time, as shown in Figure 128(b), the display of changing patterns on the operation port display unit and the display of changing patterns on the pattern display device 95 (display screen 95a) begin at timing tk1, when the game starts. At timing tk2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change, the display has transitioned to a reach display, and at timing tk3, the pattern combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling is displayed as a stopped (temporarily stopped) on the pattern display device 95. This clearly indicates to the player that the ceiling has been reached. However, at timing tk3, the display of changing patterns on the operation port display unit is still ongoing. At timing tk4, when a time equal to the above-mentioned fixed display time has passed since timing tk3, the display of changing patterns on the pattern display device 95 resumes. The period from tk1 to tk4 constitutes the first half of the special variable display mode, and considering that this first half indicates that the ceiling has been reached, this first half can also be considered the "ceiling reached indication part."

At tk5, after the second half of the special variable display mode begins at tk4, a picture corresponding to the 6R probability jackpot result is statically displayed on the operating port display, and the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R probability jackpot result is statically displayed (confirmed display) on the symbol display device 95. The execution time of the second half is shorter than that of the first half, and the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R probability jackpot result is statically displayed (confirmed display) without going through a reach display. The period from tk4 to tk5 constitutes the second half of the special variable display mode, and considering that this second half part clearly indicates that a 6R probability jackpot result has occurred, this second half part can also be said to be the "6R probability jackpot result display part."

The variable display time table is set so that the display time for the image change on the operation port display when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R normal jackpot result or a 2R special jackpot result is basically the same as the display time for the image change on the operation port display when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R special jackpot result is reached. As described above, by making the first half part that corresponds to the reach display relatively longer and the second half part that does not correspond to the reach display shorter, the sense of discomfort caused by the display change being repeated twice when a special variable display mode is executed is reduced.

If the number of play times (play count) after the special play state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a jackpot, the game will transition to the fourth normal play state, which corresponds to high frequency support mode A. In the fourth normal play state, frequent wins at actuation ports 91A and 92A reduce investment as the game progresses. This type of function (ceiling function) is desirable in terms of rescuing players. Here, if the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, it is assumed that the player's investment will have increased by the time the ceiling is reached. For this reason, if it becomes obvious that the player has reached the ceiling but is not able to enjoy the benefits, there is a concern that this will reduce the player's motivation to play. This is undesirable in terms of increasing attention to the game.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot result occurs in a game play that reaches the ceiling (in the case of overlap), different display effects are executed depending on whether the determination result is a 6R probability variable jackpot result, a 2R probability variable jackpot result, or a 6R normal jackpot result. Specifically, if a 6R probability variable jackpot result (a jackpot result that triggers a transition to long continuation high-frequency support mode) occurs in a game play that reaches the maximum number of times, an effect indicating that the maximum number of times has been reached is executed; and if a 2R probability variable jackpot result (a jackpot result that triggers a transition to low-frequency support mode) or a 6R normal jackpot result (a jackpot result that triggers a transition to short continuation high-frequency support mode) occurs in a game play that reaches the maximum number of times, an effect that does not indicate that the maximum number of times has been reached is executed. With this configuration, when a 6R probability jackpot results in a transition from special game state to high frequency support mode, the player can imagine that this is a benefit of reaching the ceiling; when a 2R probability jackpot results in a transition from special game state to low frequency switching mode, the fact that the ceiling has been reached is not made clear, allowing the player to imagine that no benefit has occurred in the first place; and when a 6R probability jackpot results in a transition to high frequency support mode, which is much shorter than when the ceiling has been reached, the fact that the ceiling has been reached is not made clear, allowing the player to imagine that no benefit has occurred in the first place. This configuration can improve player satisfaction and effectively increase attention to the game.

<Modification 1>
In the thirteenth embodiment, when the 6R normal jackpot result, which triggers the transition to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode B, coincides with reaching the ceiling, the normal setting process is executed, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the special setting process to be executed when the 6R normal jackpot result coincides with reaching the ceiling. In other words, in a game in which the ceiling is reached and the 6R normal jackpot result overlap, it is also possible to configure the variable display of the symbols to be executed in a special variable display mode consisting of a first half part in which the symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling is displayed in a static state (temporarily displayed in a static state) and a second half part in which the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result is displayed in a static state (determined display).

<Modification 2>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the termination reference number set when the ceiling is reached is greater than the termination reference number set when a 6R normal jackpot result is achieved, but this is not limited to this. The termination reference number set when a 6R normal jackpot result is achieved may be the same as the termination reference number set when the ceiling is reached, or the termination reference number set when a 6R normal jackpot result is achieved may be greater than the termination reference number set when the ceiling is reached. By combining these configurations with the configuration shown in the first modified example, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

<Modification 3>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the latter part (the part indicating the jackpot result) is configured to be shorter than the former part (the part indicating the ceiling reach) in the special variable display mode, but this is not limited to this. The former part and the latter part may be configured to be the same length, or the latter part may be configured to be longer than the former part.

In addition, in the latter half of the game, the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R jackpot result (the symbol combination of "7", "7", and "7") is displayed as a static display (confirmed display) without going through the reach display, but the latter half of the game may also be configured to display the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R jackpot result as a static display (confirmed display) via the reach display, just like in the first half of the game.

<Modification 4>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the variable display time table referenced when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R normal jackpot result or a 2R variable probability jackpot result overlaps is the same as the variable display time table referenced when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R variable probability jackpot result overlaps. In other words, the variable display time of the image on the operating port display unit (the variable display time of the image on the image display device 95) is the same when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R normal jackpot result or a 2R variable probability jackpot result overlaps, and when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R variable probability jackpot result overlaps. This may be modified as follows. That is, a variable display time table to be referenced when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R normal jackpot result or a 2R special jackpot result overlaps, and a variable display time table to be referenced when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R special jackpot result overlaps may be separately provided, and the variable display time of the pattern on the operation port display unit (the variable display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 95) may be different when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R normal jackpot result or a 2R special jackpot result overlaps and when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R special jackpot result overlaps. For example, the variable display time of the pattern on the operation port display unit (the variable display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 95) may be longer when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R normal jackpot result or a 2R special jackpot result overlaps than when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R normal jackpot result or a 2R special jackpot result overlaps. For example, in a configuration in which the reach display is executed in each of the first and second parts as shown in variant example 3 above, there is technical significance in configuring the display time of the changing pattern in the operating port display unit (the display time of the changing pattern in the pattern display device 95) to be longer when the ceiling is reached and a 6R special jackpot result overlaps than when the ceiling is reached and either a 6R normal jackpot result or a 2R special jackpot result overlaps.

<Modification 5>
In the thirteenth embodiment, when the ceiling is reached and a 6R variable probability jackpot result overlap, a symbol combination indicating the ceiling is reached and a symbol combination indicating the 6R variable probability jackpot result are displayed in a stopped state, respectively, to clearly indicate the ceiling is reached and the 6R variable probability jackpot result. However, the specific configuration for indicating the ceiling is at least arbitrary. For example, in a game in which the ceiling is reached and a 6R variable probability jackpot result overlap, a video or still image (a cut-in image of a character, etc.) indicating the ceiling has been reached can be displayed on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a), or sound effects or background music indicating the ceiling has been reached can be output from the speaker unit 29.

<Modification 6>
In the thirteenth embodiment, when the ceiling reach and the 6R variable probability jackpot result overlap, the ceiling reach is indicated in the first half and the 6R variable probability jackpot result is indicated in the second half. That is, the configuration is such that the ceiling reach → 6R variable probability jackpot result is indicated in this order, but this is not limited to this. When the ceiling reach and the 6R variable probability jackpot result overlap, it is also possible to indicate the 6R variable probability jackpot result in the first half and the ceiling reach in the second half, that is, to indicate the 6R variable probability jackpot result → ceiling reach in this order.

<Modification 7>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the second normal game state, which is entered when a 6R special jackpot result is achieved, is configured to continue until the next jackpot result, but this is not limited to this. A number of times may be limited for the second normal game state, as with the third normal game state. For example, when a 6R special jackpot result is achieved and the game state transitions to the second normal game state, the game state may transition to the first normal game state when the number of game times executed without a jackpot result after the special game state ends reaches a predetermined reference number of times. This predetermined reference number of times may be the same as the reference number of times set by reaching the ceiling, or it may be greater than the reference number of times.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the contents of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. The following configurations may be applied individually to the above-described embodiments, or may be applied in combination with some or all of them to the above-described embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above-described embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be achieved) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. The following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration formed by combining the embodiments, or may be applied in combination with some or all of them.

(1) In the above embodiments, the variable display time table referenced in the first normal game state and the variable display time table referenced in the fourth normal game state are the same, but the variable display time table referenced in the first normal game state and the variable display time table referenced in the fourth normal game state may be provided separately. In other words, the range and breakdown of the variable display time set in the first normal game state may be different from the range and breakdown of the variable display time set in the fourth normal game state.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, if the electric device 93 is in the open state when switching from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, the electric device 93 is forcibly switched to the closed state to prevent further winnings through the second operating port 92. To prevent winnings through the second operating port 92 after switching to the low-frequency support mode, for example, when switching from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, it is also possible to switch from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode before the end of the game round that triggers the switch (the game round that reaches the termination reference number). Specifically, it is also possible to switch from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at a predetermined timing during the variable display in the game round that reaches the termination reference number, or to switch from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode when the fixed display begins in the game round that reaches the termination reference number.

(3) In a configuration in which a special miss is determined by a lottery based on winning the first actuation port 91 and the second actuation port 92, it is possible to make the probability of a special miss based on winning the first actuation port 91 different from the probability of a special miss based on winning the second actuation port. For example, the probability of a special miss based on winning the first actuation port 91 may be lower than the probability of a special miss based on winning the second actuation port, or the probability of a special miss based on winning the first actuation port 91 may be higher than the probability of a special miss based on winning the second actuation port.

(4) When the ceiling is reached during the high-frequency support mode triggered by a special miss, the game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode triggered by a special miss (e.g., the fourth normal game state) is transitioned to a game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode (e.g., the first normal game state) based on the termination criteria being reached, and then the game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is transitioned to. However, whether or not to intervene in this manner in the game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is optional. For example, when the ceiling is reached during the high-frequency support mode triggered by a special miss, the game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode triggered by a special miss (e.g., the fourth normal game state) can be transitioned to a game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode triggered by reaching the ceiling (e.g., the fourth normal game state) based on the termination criteria being reached. In other words, if the ceiling is reached during high-frequency support mode triggered by a special miss, it is possible to configure the game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode to continue when the termination reference number of times is reached without intervening in a game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode (for example, the first normal game state).

(5) If a special miss occurs in a game where the ceiling is reached, the configuration may be such that the reaching of the ceiling is used as a trigger to transition to high-frequency support mode (a configuration that prioritizes reaching the ceiling), or the special miss may be used as a trigger to transition to high-frequency support mode (a configuration that prioritizes special misses).

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the play count counter is updated regardless of whether a play count related to the first actuation port 91 or a play count related to the second actuation port 92 is executed, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the play count counter to be updated when a play count related to the first actuation port 91 is executed, but not to be updated when a play count related to the second actuation port 92 is executed. It is also possible to configure the play count counter to be updated when a play count related to the second actuation port 92 is executed, but not to be updated when a play count related to the first actuation port 91 is executed.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, when the value of the play count counter reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the play count counter starts counting the number of plays after high frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, ends. However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the value of the play count counter reaches the upper limit (ceiling), it is also possible to configure the play count counter to start counting the number of plays from the next play after the ceiling is reached.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the value of the play count counter is updated (decremented by "1") at the start of a play round, but the timing of updating the value of the play count counter is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to configure the play count counter to be updated (decremented by "1") when a confirmation display is executed or when a play round ends.

(9) In the above embodiments, the base (the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot) is set so that the number of balls held is slightly decreased in either high frequency support mode A or high frequency support mode B, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the base so that the number of balls held is slightly increased in at least one of the support modes.

(10) The variable winning device 83 may be placed anywhere in the game area PE. For example, if the flow paths for game balls in the game area PE include a left route that bypasses the variable display unit 85 located in the center of the game board 80a from the left side and a right route that bypasses it from the right side, the variable winning device 83 may be placed on one of the routes, and game balls launched on the other route may be restricted from reaching the variable winning device 83.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the display of changing patterns on the actuation port display units D1, D2 and the display of changing patterns on the pattern display device 95 are initiated based on the winning/losing lottery (determination process) being performed in the main control unit 162, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the display of changing patterns on the actuation port display units D1, D2 and the display of changing patterns on the pattern display device 95 to begin prior to the winning/losing lottery (determination process) being performed in the main control unit 162.

(12) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, etc.

The present invention can also be applied to non-ball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple symbols circumferentially printed on them, and which start the reels by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and which award players with a prize such as a medal payout if a specific symbol or combination of symbols appears on an active line visible through a display window after the reels stop by operating the stop switch.

Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine main body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, is equipped with a storage section and a take-up device, and the reels begin to rotate when the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the take-up device.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, their effects, etc. Note that, for ease of understanding, the following will appropriately indicate the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments in parentheses, etc. However, the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses, etc.

<Features Group A>
The following feature group A was made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launch operation by the player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is variable, and the ball entrance section is switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature A1. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning devices 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91, 92) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
As the predetermined judgment information, first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) and second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing opening and closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism enters the receiving state,
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode via the special game state when the determination by the determination means results in a determination corresponding to the first determination information;
A gaming machine characterized by having a second transition means that, when the judgment by the judgment means results in a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, transitions to the specified gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode without passing through the special gaming state.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result corresponding to the first determination information (jackpot result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result corresponding to the second determination information (special miss result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the game flow when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, contributing to preventing monotony in gameplay. Furthermore, in this configuration, when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, the frequency with which the variable mechanism enters the accepting state differs depending on whether the trigger is a determination result corresponding to the first determination information or a determination result corresponding to the second determination information. For example, by favoring the switching control mode when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, excessive investment before transitioning to the special game state can be prevented (reducing a decline in motivation to play), and by favoring the switching control mode when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, gameplay can be made more interesting. In particular, by configuring the system to quickly switch to the third switching mode when a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained that does not trigger a large number of balls to be dispensed (a trigger for transitioning to a special game state), player satisfaction can be improved.

It is also possible for the "first determination information" shown in this feature to be "winning information" and the "second determination information" to be "special non-winning information."

Feature A2. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning devices 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91, 92) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
As the predetermined judgment information, first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) and second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing opening and closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism enters the receiving state,
As the predetermined gaming state,
a first gaming state (for example, a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (for example, a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized by having a second transition means for transitioning to the third gaming state without passing through the special gaming state when a judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the first gaming state.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result corresponding to the first determination information (jackpot result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the determination result corresponding to the second determination information (special miss result) is obtained, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the game flow when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, contributing to preventing monotony in gameplay. Furthermore, in this configuration, when changing the switching control mode to a higher level, the frequency with which the variable mechanism enters the accepting state differs depending on whether the trigger is a determination result corresponding to the first determination information or a determination result corresponding to the second determination information. For example, by favoring the switching control mode when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, excessive investment before transitioning to the special game state can be prevented (reducing a decline in motivation to play), and by favoring the switching control mode when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, gameplay can be made more interesting. In particular, by configuring the system to quickly switch to the third game state (third switching mode) when a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is reached that does not trigger a large number of balls to be dispensed (a trigger for transitioning to a special game state), player satisfaction can be improved.

It is also possible for the "first determination information" shown in this feature to be "winning information" and the "second determination information" to be "special non-winning information."

Feature A3: The judgment mode (lottery mode) in which the judgment means makes the judgment includes a low probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information being obtained is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information being obtained is relatively high,
The probability that the determination by the determination means will result in a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode,
The first gaming state corresponds to the first switching mode and the low probability mode,
A gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized in that the third gaming state corresponds to the third switching mode and the low probability mode.

If a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the first gaming state, the game will transition to the third gaming state without passing through the special gaming state. At this time, the determination mode will remain the low probability mode, but the switching control mode will change from the first switching mode to the third switching mode. This makes it possible to aim for a determination result corresponding to the first determination information while keeping investment down, and a certain type of player rescue function will be implemented. Because this rescue function is implemented without passing through the special gaming state as described above, the time required for the function to be implemented can be minimized, making it less likely that the player will feel as if the game is being unnecessarily delayed.

Feature A4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A3, wherein the period required for the transition by the second transition means is configured to be shorter than the period required for the transition by the first transition means.

With this configuration, when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is quickly changed to the third switching mode, thereby reducing the time lag until the benefits of the rescue function described above can be enjoyed. This is advantageous in terms of preventing a decline in the player's motivation to play, as they aim for a determination result corresponding to the first determination information (transition to the special game state).

Feature A5: The variable mechanism control means is configured to switch the variable mechanism to the receiving state when a lottery (support lottery) based on the game ball passing through a passing section (for example, a through gate 84) provided in the game area is won,
The second switching mode is configured to change the probability of winning in the lottery to be higher than that in the first switching mode,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that the third switching mode has the same probability of winning in the lottery as the first switching mode, but is configured so that the period required from winning the lottery to entering the acceptance state is shorter.

As shown in this feature, when switching from the first switching mode to the second switching mode, the probability of winning in the lottery based on passing through the passage section changes, and when switching from the first switching mode to the third switching mode, the winning probability remains unchanged, but the time required from winning to entering the acceptance state is shortened. By using different parameters in this way to differentiate between the second switching mode and the third switching mode, the technical idea shown in feature A1, etc., can be effectively realized.

Feature A6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A5, wherein the second switching mode is configured to have a higher ratio of the number of gaming balls paid out by the payout means to the number of gaming balls launched by the gaming ball launching means than the third switching mode.

According to feature A6, by switching to the second switching mode, the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired (i.e., the value obtained by dividing the number of game balls paid out by the number of game balls fired (hereinafter referred to as the base)) is higher than in the third switching mode, making it possible to proceed with the game while minimizing the loss of balls in hand. In other words, if a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained and the game transitions to the second switching mode via a special game state, there is a chance to win a large number of balls. In contrast, in the third switching mode, while the base is more favorable than in the first switching mode, the degree of favorability is kept lower than in the second switching mode, preventing the rescue function from becoming excessive. With this configuration, the use of multiple switching modes can be used to enhance the excitement of the game.

Feature A7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A5, wherein the third switching mode is configured to have a higher ratio of the number of gaming balls paid out by the payout means to the number of gaming balls launched by the gaming ball launching means than in the second switching mode.

According to feature A7, by switching to the third switching mode, the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired (i.e., the value obtained by dividing the number of game balls paid out by the number of game balls fired (hereinafter referred to as the base)) is higher than in the second switching mode, making it possible to proceed with the game while minimizing the loss of balls in hand. In other words, if the determination result corresponds to the second determination information and the game transitions to the third switching mode without passing through the special game state, although a large number of balls cannot be expected to be paid out at that point, it is possible to wait for an opportunity to win a large number of balls that would have been paid out as a result of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information while significantly minimizing the loss of balls in hand. With this configuration, the soundness of the game can be favorably improved.

Feature A8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A7, wherein the gaming machine is configured to transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of game plays executed in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode reaches a termination reference number (e.g., 40 plays) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information.

By setting an upper limit (termination threshold) on the number of times a game can be played in a predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode, it becomes possible to switch from the third switching mode back to the first switching mode, which effectively prevents a decrease in the sense of tension during gameplay after switching to the third switching mode.

Feature A9: The judgment mode (lottery mode) in which the judgment means makes the judgment includes a low probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information being obtained is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information being obtained is relatively high,
The probability that the determination by the determination means will result in a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode,
As the predetermined gaming state,
a first gaming state (for example, a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode;
A second gaming state (for example, a third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode and the low probability mode;
The first transition means is configured to transition to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state,
The second transition means is configured to transition to the third gaming state without passing through the special gaming state when a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first gaming state,
a third transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state when the number of times the game has been played in the second gaming state reaches a reference number of times to end the game (for example, 40 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information (a function of the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 for transitioning from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state when the time-saving period is exhausted);
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that it is equipped with a fourth transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 to transition from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state when the time-saving period is exhausted) that transitions to the first gaming state when the number of times the game is executed in the third gaming state reaches a termination reference number (for example, 40 times) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information.

According to this feature, an upper limit (termination threshold number) is set for the number of plays in the third gaming state, and when the upper limit is reached, a downgrade (return) from the third gaming state to the first gaming state may occur. This configuration effectively prevents a decrease in the sense of tension in the game after transitioning to the third gaming state.

In addition, a termination threshold number of plays is set for each of the second and third game states. By providing transition routes to limited advantageous states with upper limits on the number of plays, both via and not via special game states, it is possible to contribute to diversifying gameplay. In this configuration, it is preferable to configure the base in the third switching mode so that the difference between it and the base in the second switching mode is smaller than the difference between it and the base in the first switching mode.

Feature A10. A gaming machine as described in Feature A9, characterized in that it has a means for setting the termination reference number, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first gaming state by the fourth transition means, to a number less than the termination reference number, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first gaming state by the third transition means.

As shown in this feature, setting the termination reference number for the third game state to be less than the termination reference number for the second game state is advantageous in increasing the frequency of transitions to the third game state and the frequency of transitions between game states. This is preferable in preventing gameplay from becoming monotonous.

Feature A11. A gaming machine as described in Feature A9, characterized in that it has a means for setting the termination reference number, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first gaming state by the fourth transition means, to be the same as the termination reference number, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first gaming state by the third transition means.

As shown by this feature, by aligning the termination reference number of times in the third game state with the termination reference number of times in the second game state, it is possible to make it appear as if there are multiple transition routes to one game state (second game state, third game state). This is preferable for achieving game diversification while avoiding it becoming a factor that confuses players.

Feature A12. A fifth transition means for transitioning to the third gaming state when the number of times the game is executed after the special gaming state ends in the first gaming state reaches an upper limit number of times without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information;
a sixth transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state when the fifth transition means has transitioned to the third gaming state and the number of times the game has been played in the third gaming state reaches a reference number of times to end the game (for example, 400 times) without resulting in a determination result corresponding to the first determination information; and
A gaming machine described in any one of features A9 to A11, characterized in that the termination reference number, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first gaming state by the sixth transition means, is set to be greater than the termination reference number, which is the criterion for transitioning to the first gaming state by the fourth transition means.

According to this characteristic configuration, if a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, or if the number of play times during the first gaming state reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game will transition to a third gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode. In this way, by setting the trigger for transition to the third gaming state to a determination result that does not correspond to transition to a special gaming state or reaching the ceiling, and by providing relief to the player through the third gaming state, it is possible to contribute to curbing excessive investment. In particular, by setting a relatively high termination reference number triggered by reaching the ceiling and a relatively low termination reference number triggered by a determination result corresponding to the second determination information, it is possible to effectively achieve diversification of games and strengthened relief functions.

Feature A13. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning devices 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91, 92) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
As the predetermined judgment information, first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) and second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing opening and closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism enters the receiving state,
As the predetermined gaming state,
a first gaming state (for example, a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (for example, a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode;
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
a second transition means for transitioning to the third gaming state without passing through the special gaming state when a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for transitioning to the third gaming state when the number of times a game is executed after the special gaming state ends in the first gaming state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information.

As shown in this feature, if a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state. If a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained or the number of play times during the first gaming state reaches the upper limit (reaching the ceiling), the switching control mode is changed without going through the special gaming state. This diversifies the game flow when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to preventing monotony in gameplay. Furthermore, with this feature, when changing to a higher switching control mode, the frequency with which the variable mechanism enters the accepting state differs depending on whether the trigger is a determination result corresponding to the first determination information, a determination result corresponding to the second determination information, or reaching the ceiling. This further diversifies gameplay. In particular, by triggering a transition to the third gaming state by a determination result that does not correspond to a transition to the special gaming state or reaching the ceiling, and providing relief to the player through the third gaming state, this contributes to preventing excessive investment.

It is also possible for the "first determination information" shown in this feature to be "winning information" and the "second determination information" to be "special non-winning information."

Feature A14. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning devices 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91, 92) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
As the predetermined judgment information, first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) and second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing opening and closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism enters the receiving state,
As the predetermined gaming state,
a first gaming state (for example, a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode;
A second gaming state (for example, a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode;
a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode;
a means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for transitioning to the third gaming state when the number of times a game is executed after the special gaming state ends in the first gaming state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information.

As shown in this feature, if the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is reached, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and if the number of play times during the first game state reaches the upper limit (reaching the ceiling), the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. This diversifies the game flow when changing to a higher switching control mode, contributing to preventing monotony in gameplay. Furthermore, with the configuration shown in this feature, when changing to a higher switching control mode, the frequency with which the variable mechanism enters the accepting state differs depending on whether the trigger is a determination result corresponding to the first determination information or reaching the ceiling. This further diversifies gameplay. In particular, by triggering a transition to the third game state by reaching the ceiling and providing relief to the player through the third game state, it can contribute to preventing excessive investment.

It is also possible for the "first determination information" shown in this feature to be "winning information" and the "second determination information" to be "special non-winning information."

The technical ideas described above in Features A1 to A12 may also be applied to Features A13 to A14.

<Features Group B>
The following feature B group was made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launch operation by the player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is variable, and the ball entrance section is switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature B1. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning devices 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91, 92) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination,
As the predetermined judgment information, first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) and second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83 by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than in the low-frequency switching mode, as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means;
As the predetermined gaming states, a first type gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the low frequency switching mode and a second type gaming state (e.g., a second normal gaming state, a third normal gaming state, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high frequency switching mode are provided,
a first transition means for transitioning to the second type gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state (a function of transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state or the third normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a jackpot result is obtained);
a second transition means for transitioning to the second type gaming state without passing through the special gaming state when a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first type gaming state (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 for transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state when the special miss result occurs);
a third transition means for transitioning to the first type gaming state when the number of executions of games in the second type gaming state reaches a reference number of times to end (for example, 40 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information after transition to the second type gaming state by the second transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a time-saving period is consumed);
a fourth transition means (a function of transitioning to a fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the number of times of execution of a game after the special gaming state ends reaches an upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) for transitioning to the second type gaming state without passing through the special gaming state;
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the number of game plays executed after the special game state ends during the second type game state to which the transition has been made by the second transition means reaches the upper limit number, the fourth transition means delays the transition to the second type game state triggered by the reaching of the upper limit number of game plays until at least the number of game plays executed in the second type game state reaches the termination reference number.

According to Feature B1, even if gameplay continues without establishing a transition trigger to the special game state (a determination result corresponding to the first determination information), a transition to the second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode may occur due to a determination result corresponding to the second determination information or reaching the upper limit of the number of plays after the special game state ends (reaching the ceiling). Entering the high-frequency switching mode increases the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry area, thereby reducing investment. This configuration is desirable for improving the soundness of gameplay. However, if the determination result corresponding to the second determination information and reaching the ceiling are used together as a transition trigger to the second type of game state as described above, the following concern arises. That is, if the ceiling is reached during the second type of game state and the ceiling is invalidated, or if the second type of game state is forcibly terminated due to a determination result corresponding to the second determination information, some of the benefits that the player would have enjoyed would be lost, which could significantly reduce player satisfaction. In this regard, with this feature, if the ceiling is reached during the Type 2 gaming state, the transition to the Type 2 gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling is delayed until the number of playouts in the Type 2 gaming state reaches the termination reference number. This alleviates the above concerns and contributes to improving player satisfaction.

The configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a gaming machine equipped with a gaming board (gaming board 80a) on which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, a gaming ball launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on the player's operation, and a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out gaming balls (prize balls) based on the balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning device 83) provided in the gaming area, and a special information acquisition means (a process of acquiring the reserved information is performed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operation openings 91, 92) that serves as the ball entry section. a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result); and a game operation (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a special miss result). The game control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) controls predetermined notification means (operation port display units D1, D2) so that the game round operation for each game round is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with one game round being counted as a game round when a variable display of a pattern is started and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment, and the predetermined judgment information includes first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) and second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result), and the judgment result by the judgment means is determined based on the first judgment information. a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the determination result corresponding to the game state being determined and the game operation by the game cycle control means being completed; a variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which game balls are more difficult to enter than in the acceptance state; and The game machine is provided with a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing opening and closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state, a variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepting state, and a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric support processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism, and the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means is a first type switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second type switching mode (low frequency support mode). A second type switching mode (high frequency support mode) is provided in which the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than in the type switching mode, and when a judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first type switching mode, a first transition means (a function of transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a special miss result occurs) transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second type switching mode without passing through the special game state, and a second transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the time-saving consumption is triggered by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the case of transition to a game state corresponding to the first type switching mode when the number of times of execution of games in the predetermined game state reaches a termination reference number (for example, 40 times) without resulting in a determination result corresponding to the first determination information; and a second transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the time-saving consumption is triggered by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the case of transition to a game state corresponding to the first type switching mode when the number of times of execution of games after the termination of the special game state reaches a maximum number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without resulting in a determination result corresponding to the first determination information. It is also possible to have a gaming machine that includes third transition means (a function of transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the ceiling is reached), wherein the third transition means is configured to, when the number of executed game turns reaches the upper limit during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second type switching mode to which transition was made in response to the determination result corresponding to the second determination information, delay the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second type switching mode, which is triggered by the reaching of the upper limit, until at least the number of executed game turns in the predetermined gaming state reaches the termination reference number.

Feature B2. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning devices 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91, 92) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination,
As the predetermined judgment information, first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) and second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83 by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism enters the receiving state,
As the predetermined gaming states, a first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode, a second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode, and a third gaming state (e.g., a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode are provided,
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state (a function of transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state or the third normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a jackpot result is obtained);
a second transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first game state (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 for transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state when the special miss result is obtained);
a third transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state when the number of times the game has been played in the third gaming state to which the second transition means has been used reaches a reference number of times to end the game (for example, 40 times) without resulting in a determination result corresponding to the first determination information; and
a fourth transition means (a function of transitioning to a fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the number of times the game has been executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches an upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) for transitioning to the third gaming state without passing through the special gaming state;
The fourth transition means is configured to delay the transition to the third game state triggered by the reaching of the upper limit number of game plays after the special game state ends during the third game state transitioned to by the second transition means, until the number of game plays in the third game state reaches the termination reference number.

According to Feature B2, even if gameplay continues without the trigger for transitioning to the special game state (the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) being met, a transition to the third game state corresponding to the third switching mode may occur due to the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information or the reaching of the upper limit of the number of plays after the special game state ends (reaching the ceiling). Entering the third switching mode increases the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry area, thereby reducing investment. This configuration is desirable for improving the soundness of gameplay. However, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information and reaching the ceiling are used together as the trigger for transitioning to the third game state as described above, the following concern arises. That is, if the ceiling is reached during the third game state and the ceiling is invalidated, or if the third game state is forcibly terminated due to the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, some of the benefits that the player would have enjoyed would be lost, and there is a concern that player satisfaction would be significantly reduced. In this regard, with this feature, if the ceiling is reached during the third gaming state, the transition to the third gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling is delayed until the number of playouts in the third gaming state reaches the termination reference number. This alleviates the above concerns and contributes to improving player satisfaction.

Feature B3. The gaming machine described in Feature B2 is configured so that the switching mode of the variable mechanism when transitioning to the third gaming state by the fourth transition means is the same as the switching mode of the variable mechanism when transitioning to the third gaming state by the second transition means.

As shown in Feature B2, when the ceiling is reached during the third game state and a transition to the third game state is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the switching mode of the variable mechanism is made uniform, thereby preventing the benefit of reaching the ceiling from being outweighed by the behavior up to that point.

Feature B4: The termination reference number is a first termination reference number,
a fifth transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state when the number of times that games have been played in the third gaming state reached by the fourth transition means reaches a second reference number of times to end the game (for example, 400 times) without resulting in a determination result corresponding to the first determination information;
The gaming machine according to Feature B2 or Feature B3, wherein the first termination reference number is set to be less than the second termination reference number.

When the delay function described in Feature B2 is included, if the benefit of reaching the ceiling ends immediately after a large delay, it is expected that this will discourage the player from playing. Therefore, as described in this feature, by making the first termination criteria number < the second termination criteria number, excessive delays can be suppressed and the impression that the benefit after reaching the ceiling is stale can be prevented.

Feature B5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B2 to B4, wherein the fourth transition means is configured to transition to the third gaming state triggered by the reaching of the upper limit number of times after the number of times of execution of play after the special gaming state ends reaches the upper limit number during the third gaming state transitioned to by the second transition means, after transition to the first gaming state by the third transition means triggered by the number of times of execution of play in the third gaming state reaching the termination reference number.

As shown by this feature, if the ceiling is reached during the third game state, the game state is transitioned from the third game state to the first game state and then returned to the third game state. This adds an accent to the rhythm of the game and helps prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Feature B6: The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information,
The fourth transition means is configured to transition to the third gaming state triggered by the reaching of the upper limit number of times after transitioning to the third gaming state by the second transition means when the number of times of execution of games after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit number of times, after transitioning to the first gaming state by the third transition means triggered by the number of times of execution of games in the third gaming state reaching the end reference number of times,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B2 to B4, characterized in that the number of games executed during the first gaming state transitioned to by the third transition means when the transition to the third gaming state by the fourth transition means is delayed is specified to be less than the upper limit of the special information that can be stored by the acquired information storage means.

As shown in this feature, if the ceiling is reached during the third gaming state, the game transitions from the third gaming state to the first gaming state and then returns to the third gaming state. This adds an accent to the rhythm of the game and helps prevent the game from becoming monotonous. Furthermore, in a configuration that involves the first gaming state, repeated rounds of play in the first gaming state are likely to give the player the impression that their enjoyment of the benefit is being unduly delayed. This impression is likely to be reinforced when the number of special information stored becomes zero due to the inclusion of the first gaming state, interrupting the continuous progression of game rounds. In this regard, by limiting the number of rounds executed in the intervening first gaming state to be less than the upper limit of the special information stored, interruption of the continuous progression of game rounds upon returning to the third gaming state can be avoided, effectively alleviating the above-mentioned concerns.

Feature B7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B2 to B4, wherein the fourth transition means is configured to transition to the third gaming state triggered by the third transition means, when the number of play times after the special gaming state ends reaches the upper limit during the third gaming state transitioned to by the second transition means, after the number of play times in the third gaming state reaches the termination reference number, and after one play time in the first gaming state has been played, triggered by reaching the upper limit.

As shown by this feature, if the ceiling is reached during the third gaming state, the game transitions from the third gaming state to the first gaming state and then returns to the third gaming state. This adds an accent to the rhythm of the game and helps prevent the game from becoming monotonous. Furthermore, in a configuration that involves the first gaming state, repeated rounds of play in the first gaming state are likely to give the player the impression that their enjoyment of the benefits is being unduly delayed. In this regard, a configuration that returns to the third gaming state after one round of play can effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Feature B8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B5 to B7, further comprising a notification means for notifying a player of a transition to the third gaming state during the first gaming state in which the transition to the third gaming state is delayed by the fourth transition means.

Providing an opportunity to notify the player of the transition to the third game state during the first game state is preferable in terms of encouraging attention to each game session during the third game state before the transition to the first game state.

Feature B9: The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information,
The game control means has an operation period setting means capable of setting an operation period of the game operation in accordance with the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
The gaming machine described in feature B8 is characterized in that the operation period setting means is configured to set a predetermined operation period for game times executed during the first game state in which the transition to the third game state is delayed by the fourth transition means, regardless of the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means.

As shown in feature B5 and other features, in a configuration that returns to the third gaming state via the first gaming state, variations in the operation period of the gaming operation performed during the first gaming state can cause the following inconveniences. That is, if the operation period is relatively short, there will be insufficient time to notify the player of the transition to the third gaming state, and if the operation period is relatively long, the player may be more likely to get the impression that the transition to the third gaming state is being unduly delayed. Therefore, as shown in this feature, for gaming times during the first gaming state in which the transition to the third gaming state is delayed, a predetermined operation period is set regardless of the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the above concerns can be resolved by keeping the operation period constant.

Feature B10. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B2 to B4, wherein the fourth transition means is configured to transition to the third gaming state triggered by reaching the upper limit of the number of times the upper limit of the number of times has been played after the end of the special gaming state, without going through any other gaming state, after the end of the third gaming state, if the number of times the upper limit of the number of times the upper limit of the number of times has been played reaches the upper limit during the third gaming state transitioned to by the second transition means.

As shown by this feature, if the third game state triggered by the determination result corresponding to the second determination information and the third game state triggered by reaching the ceiling are seamlessly connected, the two benefits can be combined into one, enhancing the impact.

Feature B11. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B2 to B10, wherein if the number of play times after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit during the third game state transitioned to by the second transition means, and the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the first determination information while the transition to the third game state by the fourth transition means is delayed, the transition to the fourth transition means triggered by reaching the upper limit is invalidated.

As shown in this feature, if a determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in a situation where a transition to the third gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling is pending, it is preferable to configure the transition to the third gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling to be invalid in order to prevent excessive rescue functions for the player.

Feature B12: A special effect execution means is provided that can execute a special effect indicating a transition to the third gaming state when the number of executions of the game after the special gaming state ends reaches an upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without resulting in a determination result corresponding to the first determination information,
The gaming machine described in any one of Features B2 to B11 is characterized in that the special effect execution means is configured to execute the special effect in the game round in which the maximum number of plays has been reached if the maximum number of plays has been reached during the first gaming state, but not to execute the special effect in the game round in which the maximum number of plays has been reached if the maximum number of plays has been reached during the third gaming state to which the machine has been transitioned by the second transition means.

If the maximum number of plays is reached (ceiling reached) during the first gaming state, a special effect will be executed in that play round, providing a prompt notification that a transition to the third gaming state will occur. In contrast, if the maximum number of plays is reached (ceiling reached) during the third gaming state, the special effect will be avoided for that play round. In this way, by deliberately not executing a special effect when the transition to the third gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling is delayed, it is possible to prevent a decline in attention to the third gaming state, which was triggered by the determination result corresponding to the second determination information, before the end of that gaming state.

Feature B13. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B2 to B11, characterized in that, if the upper limit number of plays is reached during the third gaming state to which transition is made by the second transition means, a means is provided for notifying the player of the transition to the third gaming state in a game play that is executed after the game play in which the upper limit number of plays is reached, and that is prior to the transition to the third gaming state triggered by the fourth transition means upon reaching the upper limit number of plays.

As shown in this feature, if the maximum number of plays is reached (the ceiling is reached) during the third gaming state, the player will be notified of the transition to the third gaming state (the ceiling has been reached) in a gaming turn executed after the ceiling has been reached, in a gaming turn before the transition to the third gaming state is triggered by the ceiling being reached. This configuration can encourage anticipation that the third gaming state will effectively be extended by reaching the ceiling, even in gaming turns other than those in which the ceiling may be reached.

Feature B14: A special effect execution means is provided that can execute a special effect indicating a transition to the third gaming state when the number of executions of games after the special gaming state ends reaches an upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without resulting in a determination result corresponding to the first determination information,
The gaming machine described in any one of Features B2 to B11 is characterized in that the special effect execution means is configured to execute the special effect in the game round in which the maximum number of times has been reached if the maximum number of times has been reached during the third game state and the number of times the game round in which the third game state has been executed is greater than a predetermined number, and to execute the special effect in the game round in which the maximum number of times has been reached if the maximum number of times has been reached during the third game state and the number of times the game round in which the third game state has been executed is less than the predetermined number.

If the maximum number of plays is reached (the ceiling is reached) during the third gaming state, which is triggered by the determination result corresponding to the second determination information, the player's impression may differ depending on the timing. For example, if the ceiling is reached immediately after the transition, the player may be left with the impression that the determination result corresponding to the second determination information was a waste of money. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the ceiling is reached during the third gaming state, the timing of the special effect occurrence, i.e., the timing of the notification that the ceiling has been reached, can be varied depending on the number of plays executed during the third gaming state (the number of plays executed up to that point), thereby alleviating the above concerns.

Note that the technical ideas described in Features B3 to B14 may also be applied to Feature B1.

Incidentally, the technical ideas described in Feature Group A above may also be applied to Features B1 to B14.

<Feature Group C>
The following feature C group was made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launch operation by the player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is variable, and the ball entrance section is switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature C1. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432A in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination,
As the predetermined judgment information, first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) and second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state,
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided,
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (a reserve area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
The second storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information,
The judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information can occur in either the judgment based on the ball scoring in the first starting ball scoring section or the judgment based on the ball scoring in the second starting ball scoring section, while the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information can occur only in the judgment based on the ball scoring in the second starting ball scoring section,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The variable mechanism control means provides switching control modes (support modes) for the variable mechanism, including a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) that is set to make it difficult or impossible to score a ball in the second starting ball scoring area, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) that is set to make it easier to score a ball in the second starting ball scoring area than in the low-frequency switching mode by having the variable mechanism remain in a receiving state for a longer period of time than in the low-frequency switching mode;
As the predetermined gaming states, a first type gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the low frequency switching mode and a second type gaming state (e.g., a second normal gaming state, a third normal gaming state, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high frequency switching mode are provided,
a first transition means for transitioning to the second type gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 for transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state or the third normal gaming state in response to a jackpot result);
a second transition means for transitioning to the first type gaming state when the number of times of execution of games in the second type gaming state reaches a first reference number of times of termination (for example, 20 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the second type gaming state transitioned to by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the time-saving period is consumed);
a third transition means for transitioning to the second type game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first type game state (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 for transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state when a special miss result occurs);
a fourth transition means for transitioning to the first type game state when, in the second type game state transitioned to by the third transition means, the number of times the game has been executed in the second type game state reaches a second termination reference number (for example, 20 times) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information; and a fourth transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a time-saving period is consumed).

According to Feature C1, if a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the Type 1 game state, the game transitions to the Type 2 game state via the special game state. The Type 2 game state corresponds to the high-frequency switching mode, and increasing the number of balls that enter the second starting ball entry section reduces the loss of balls. A count limit is set for the Type 2 game state, and if the number of game rounds executed in the Type 2 game state reaches the first termination reference number, the game transitions to the Type 1 game state, which corresponds to the low-frequency switching mode. This makes it difficult for balls to enter the second starting ball entry section. Here, the special information obtained based on balls entering the second starting ball entry section is stored in the second storage means, and after transitioning from the Type 2 game state to the Type 1 game state, game rounds are executed based on the stored special information. The remaining game rounds in the second starting ball entry section may result in a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. If the remaining play results in a judgment corresponding to the second judgment information, the game will transition quickly to the second type of game state without passing through the special game state, and the high-frequency switching mode will loop. This loop makes it possible to aim for a judgment corresponding to the first judgment information while minimizing the loss of balls. By diversifying the game in this way, it can contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Feature C2. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432A in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation for each game round is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
As the predetermined judgment information, first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) and second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state,
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided,
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (a reserve area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
The second storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information,
The judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information can occur in either the judgment based on the ball scoring in the first starting ball scoring section or the judgment based on the ball scoring in the second starting ball scoring section, while the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information can occur only in the judgment based on the ball scoring in the second starting ball scoring section,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means include a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to score a ball in the second starting ball entry section, a second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set to make it easier to score a ball in the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by having the variable mechanism remain in the receiving state for a longer period of time than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high frequency support mode A) set to make it easier to score a ball in the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by having the variable mechanism remain in the receiving state for a longer period of time than in the first switching mode,
As the predetermined gaming states, a first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode, a second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode, and a third gaming state (e.g., a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode are provided,
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state (a function of transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state or the third normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a jackpot result is obtained);
a second transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state when the number of times the game has been played in the second gaming state reaches a first reference number of times to end the game (for example, 20 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the second gaming state transitioned to by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the time-saving period is consumed);
a third transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first game state (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 for transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in response to the special miss result);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a fourth transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a time-saving period is consumed) for transitioning to the first gaming state when the number of times the game has been executed in the third gaming state to which the state has been transitioned by the third transition means reaches a second termination reference number (for example, 20 times) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information.

According to feature C2, if a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, the game state transitions to the second game state via the special game state. The second game state corresponds to the second switching mode, and an increase in balls entering the second starting ball entry section reduces the loss of balls in the player's possession. A count limit is set for the second game state, and if the number of game rounds executed in the second game state reaches the first termination reference number, the game state transitions to the first game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode. This makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting ball entry section. Here, the special information obtained based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section is stored by the second storage means, and after transitioning from the second game state to the first game state, game rounds are executed based on the stored special information. The remaining game rounds in the second starting ball entry section may result in a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. If the remaining play results in a determination corresponding to the second determination information, the game will transition to the third game state corresponding to the third switching mode without passing through the special game state, and the high-frequency switching mode will loop. This loop makes it possible to aim for a determination corresponding to the first determination information while minimizing the loss of balls. By diversifying the game in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Feature C3. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432A in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination,
As the predetermined judgment information, first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) and second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state,
The starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91) disposed in a first flow path (left route) in the game area, and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92) disposed in a second flow path (right route) in the game area,
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (a reserve area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
The second storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information,
The judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information can occur in either the judgment based on the ball scoring in the first starting ball scoring section or the judgment based on the ball scoring in the second starting ball scoring section, while the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information can occur only in the judgment based on the ball scoring in the second starting ball scoring section,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means include a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to score a ball in the second starting ball entry section, a second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set to make it easier to score a ball in the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by having the variable mechanism remain in the receiving state for a longer period of time than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high frequency support mode A) set to make it easier to score a ball in the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by having the variable mechanism remain in the receiving state for a longer period of time than in the first switching mode,
As the predetermined gaming states, a first gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode, a second gaming state (e.g., a second/third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode, and a third gaming state (e.g., a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode are provided,
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state (a function of transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state or the third normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a jackpot result is obtained);
a second transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state when the number of times the game has been played in the second gaming state reaches a first reference number of times to end the game (for example, 20 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the second gaming state transitioned to by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the time-saving period is consumed);
a third transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first game state (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 for transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state in response to the special miss result);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a fourth transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a time-saving period is consumed) for transitioning to the first gaming state when the number of times the game has been executed in the third gaming state to which transition has been made by the third transition means reaches a second termination reference number (for example, 20 times) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information.

According to feature C3, if a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first game state, the game state transitions to the second game state via the special game state. The second game state corresponds to the second switching mode, and by firing the game ball along the second route, the number of balls that enter the second starting ball entry section increases, thereby suppressing the loss of balls. A count limit is set for the second game state, and if the number of game rounds executed in the second game state reaches the first termination reference number, the game state transitions to the first game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode. This makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting ball entry section. Here, the special information obtained based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section is stored by the second storage means, and after transitioning from the second game state to the first game state, game rounds are executed based on the stored special information. The judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information may be obtained in the remaining game rounds related to the second starting ball entry section. If the remaining play results in a determination corresponding to the second determination information, the game will transition to the third game state corresponding to the third switching mode without passing through the special game state, and the high-frequency switching mode will loop. This loop makes it possible to aim for a determination corresponding to the first determination information while minimizing the loss of balls. By diversifying the game in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Feature C4. A gaming machine as described in Feature C2 or Feature C3, characterized in that the determination based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry area is more likely to result in a determination corresponding to the second determination information than in a determination corresponding to the first determination information.

As described above, when the game state transitions from the second or third game state to the first game state, game rounds related to the second starting ball entry section are executed up to the number of special information stored in the second storage means. In these game rounds, the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is higher than the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information. Even if a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is not obtained, it is possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information by looping the high-frequency switching mode. This configuration contributes to increasing the enjoyment of the game without unnecessarily increasing the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information.

Feature C5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features C2 to C4, wherein if, during the second gaming state and the third gaming state, the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the second determination information, the determination result is invalidated.

According to feature C5, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the second/third game state, the judgment result is invalidated. On the other hand, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the remaining game times related to the second start ball entry section when transitioning from the second/third game state to the first game state, the judgment result triggers a transition to the third game state. With this configuration, the presence or absence of the loop depends on the maximum number of special information items that can be stored related to the second start ball entry section. Therefore, when adjusting the degree of advantage by increasing or decreasing the termination reference number in the second/third game state, the effect on the loop probability can be avoided, and the degree of freedom in setting the termination reference number can be favorably improved.

The configuration described in this feature can also be defined as "a gaming machine described in any one of Features C2 to C4, characterized in that, during the second gaming state and the third gaming state, the determination by the determination means is configured to avoid a determination result corresponding to the second determination information."

Feature C6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features C2 to C5, wherein the second termination reference number is defined to be the same as the first termination reference number.

This feature is advantageous in that, when the game progresses from the second game state to the first game state to the third game state, the player is encouraged to perceive the game states before and after the first game state as if they were the same.

Feature C7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features C2 to C6, wherein the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode is closer to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode than to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the first switching mode.

This feature is advantageous in that, when the game progresses from the second game state to the first game state to the third game state, the player is encouraged to perceive the game states before and after the first game state as if they were the same.

The "switching mode" described in this feature is composed of three elements: the period during which the open state is maintained, the number of times the open state is switched to, and the interval between open states. "Similar to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode" means that there are more matching or similar elements among these three elements than in the "first switching mode."

Incidentally, the configuration described in this feature can also be defined as "a gaming machine described in any one of Features G2 to G4, characterized in that the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode is the same as the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode."

Feature C8: A destination determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the second storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information becomes the subject of the determination;
A gaming machine described in any one of features C2 to C6, characterized in that it is equipped with a special effect execution means that, in the second gaming state and the third gaming state, executes a special effect based on a specified result by the destination determination means for special information that is to be determined after the transition from the second gaming state and the third gaming state to the first gaming state.

Immediately after transitioning from the second or third game state to the first game state, the remaining reserved play times related to the second starting ball entry section are executed. If a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during these play times, the game state will transition from the first game state to the third game state. Here, as shown in this feature, in the second/third game state, it is determined in advance whether the remaining reserved play times will result in a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, and a special effect is performed based on that result, thereby increasing attention to whether or not the above-mentioned loop will occur.

Feature C9. A gaming machine as described in Feature C8, wherein the destination specification means is configured to specify the destination in the final game turn in the second game state and the third game state when transitioning from the second game state and the third game state to the first game state.

If the above determination is made in the final game in the second/third game state, the special effect will be executed when the number of special information stored in the second storage means has reached the storage limit, and the special effect can effectively demonstrate its function of suggesting the continuation of the above loop.

Feature C10. A gaming machine as described in Feature C9, configured to start the special effect before the destination is determined by the destination determination means in the final game round.

Feature C10 allows the special effect to begin prior to identification by the advance identification means, thereby relaxing restrictions on the execution period of the special effect and effectively preventing the special effect from becoming stale.

Note that the technical ideas described in Features C4 to C10 may also be applied to Feature C1.

Incidentally, the technical ideas described in Features A to B above may also be applied to Features C1 to C10.

<Feature Group D>
The following feature group D was made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launch operation by the player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is variable, and the ball entrance section is switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature D1. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning devices 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91, 92) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
As the predetermined judgment information, first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) and second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing opening and closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode, as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means;
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 for transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state using the special miss result as a trigger);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of times of execution of games in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches a reference number of times of termination (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 260 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a time-saving period is consumed);
a third transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the number of times the game has been executed after the end of the special game state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without resulting in a determination result corresponding to the first determination information; and a function of transitioning to a fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the ceiling is reached.
a special effect execution means for executing a special effect suggesting a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the first transition means transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode;
Equipped with
The special effect execution means is configured to determine the presentation mode of the special effect depending on whether the maximum number of times is reached during the specified gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode to which the game is to be transitioned.

If the number of play times (play count) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the game will transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. In the second switching mode, frequent balls entering the second starting ball entry area reduce investments associated with game progress. This function (ceiling function) is desirable for rescuing players. Here, with the configuration shown in this characteristic, a transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode may occur even if a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained. In this case, a special effect is executed. The presentation style of the special effect is determined depending on whether the ceiling is reached during the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode to which the game has been transitioned. With this configuration, for example, a determination result corresponding to the second determination information can also suggest that the ceiling has been reached, or conversely, it can be difficult or impossible to distinguish whether the trigger for transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is a determination result corresponding to the second determination information or the ceiling being reached. This can contribute to increased attention to the game by diversifying the game.

Feature D2. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning devices 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91, 92) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
As the predetermined judgment information, first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) and second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing opening and closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode, as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means;
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the result of the determination means in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 for transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state using the special miss result as a trigger);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of times of execution of games in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode reaches a reference number of times of termination (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 260 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a time-saving period is consumed);
a third transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special game state when the number of times the game has been executed after the end of the special game state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without resulting in a determination result corresponding to the first determination information; and a function of transitioning to a fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the ceiling is reached.
a special effect execution means for executing a special effect suggesting a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the first transition means transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode;
The special effect execution means is configured to determine the presentation mode of the special effect based on the termination reference number of times in the specified game state corresponding to the second switching mode to which the transition is made and the remaining number of times of game play until the upper limit number of times is reached.

If the number of play times (play count) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. In the second switching mode, frequent balls entering the second starting ball entry area reduce investments associated with game progress. This function (ceiling function) is desirable for rescuing players. In this characteristic configuration, a transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode may occur even when a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained. In this case, a special effect is executed. The presentation style of the special effect is determined based on the termination reference number of times in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode to which the transition is made and the remaining number of play times until the ceiling is reached. With this configuration, for example, a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information can also suggest that the ceiling has been reached, or conversely, it can be difficult or impossible to distinguish whether the trigger for transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information or the ceiling being reached. This can contribute to increased attention to the game by diversifying the game.

Feature D3. The special effect execution means is a first execution means,
As the special effects, a first special effect and a second special effect having different performance modes are provided,
a second execution means for executing the second special effect as an effect suggesting a transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode when the third transition means transitions to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode;
The gaming machine described in feature D2 is characterized in that the first execution means has a means for executing the second special effect when the set termination reference number is greater than the remaining number of games until the upper limit number of games is reached.

According to feature D3, if the determination result corresponds to the second determination information and the ceiling is reached during a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode to which the transition is triggered by that determination result, the same special effect (second special effect) as the special effect that is executed when the ceiling is reached during normal play (second special effect) is executed. This configuration makes it appear as if the ceiling is variable.

Feature D4. A gaming machine as described in Feature D3, wherein the first execution means includes means for executing the first special effect when the set termination reference number of times is less than the remaining number of times until the upper limit number of times is reached.

According to feature D4, if the set termination reference number of times is less than the number of times played until the ceiling is reached, the first special effect is executed instead of the second special effect. This is preferable for achieving the mimicry effect described in feature D3.

Feature D5. A gaming machine as described in Feature D3 or Feature D4, wherein the second execution means is configured not to execute the second special effect when the third transition means transitions to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode after the first execution means executes the second special effect.

As shown in feature D5, if the ceiling is reached during a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, the second special effect is not executed and the fact that the ceiling has been reached is not made clear, thereby more effectively demonstrating the mimicry effect shown in feature D3.

Feature D6. The third transition means is configured to transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode by the second transition means when the upper limit number of times is reached during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, after transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode by the second transition means in response to the reaching of the termination reference number of times;
a state suggesting means for suggesting that the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is in effect when the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is in effect;
The gaming machine described in any one of features D3 to D5 is characterized in that the state suggestion means is configured to provide the state suggestion across three gaming states when the maximum number of times is reached during the second switching mode and the third transition means transitions from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode via the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode.

According to feature D6, when switching from second switching mode to first switching mode to second switching mode, the second switching mode is continuously suggested even during first switching mode, thereby more effectively achieving the mimicry effect described in feature D3.

Feature D7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features D2 to D6, wherein the first transition means has means for setting the termination reference number to any number including a first termination reference number and a second reference number, which are different numbers, when transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode.

By using both the first and second termination reference counts as shown in feature D7, the pseudo-variable ceiling function shown in feature D2 can be more effectively utilized.

Feature D8. The first termination reference number of times is less than the upper limit number of times,
A gaming machine described in feature D7, characterized in that the second termination reference number is the same as or greater than the upper limit number.

According to feature D8, when a first termination reference number is set, whether or not the ceiling will be reached during the second switching mode depends on the number of times remaining until the ceiling is reached, and when a second termination reference number is set, the ceiling may be reached during the second switching mode. This configuration effectively prevents the function of pseudo-varying the ceiling using the second determination information from failing to function properly.

Note that the technical ideas described above in Features D3 to D8 may also be applied to Feature D1.

Incidentally, the technical ideas described in Features A to C above may also be applied to Features D1 to D8.

<Feature Group E>
The following feature group E was made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launch operation by the player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is variable, and the ball entrance section is switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature E1. A game board (game board 80aB) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83B) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a special win game state transition process or a jackpot game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (a special win game state or a jackpot game state) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, a normal game state or a special game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83B) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83B by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state,
The variable ball entry section control means is configured to switch the variable ball entry section to the receiving state when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined information (for example, a special win result or a big win result) and the game state transitions to the special game state,
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided,
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (a reserve area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
The second storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information,
The predetermined information includes first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a normal jackpot) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a probability variable jackpot) that is more advantageous to the player than the first information,
The determination based on the ball scoring in the second starting ball scoring section is more likely to result in a determination corresponding to the second information than the determination based on the ball scoring in the first starting ball scoring section,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The variable mechanism control means provides switching control modes (support modes) for the variable mechanism, including a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) that is set to make it difficult or impossible to score a ball in the second starting ball scoring area, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) that is set to make it easier to score a ball in the second starting ball scoring area than in the low-frequency switching mode by having the variable mechanism remain in a receiving state for a longer period of time than in the low-frequency switching mode;
A gaming machine characterized by having a special transition means that transitions to the specified gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode when the number of game plays executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the specified information.

If the number of play times (play count) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the specified information, the game will transition to a specified game state compatible with the high-frequency switching mode. In the high-frequency switching mode, a ball can enter the second starting ball entry area, and a judgment (lottery) based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry area can result in not only a judgment result corresponding to the first information, but also a judgment result corresponding to second information that is more advantageous to the player than the first information. This significantly increases the degree of advantage in the judgment. In other words, reaching the ceiling will transition the player to a chance zone, which is more advantageous than the previous game state. A configuration in which a transition to the chance zone occurs when the ceiling is reached in this way can effectively stimulate the player's desire to play. This is advantageous for preventing gameplay from becoming monotonous and increasing attention to the game.

Feature E2. A game board (game board 80aB) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83B) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special jackpot result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the special win game state or a transition process to the jackpot game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (a special win game state or a jackpot game state) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, a normal game state or a special game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information and the game operation by the game number control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83B) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83B by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state,
The predetermined information includes first information (a random number group corresponding to a special winning result) and second information (a random number group corresponding to a big winning result),
The variable ball entry section control means
a means for switching the variable ball entry section to the receiving state in a first control mode when the determination result by the determination means becomes a first determination result (special jackpot result) that corresponds to the first information and the special game state is entered;
and means for switching the variable ball entry section to the receiving state in a second control manner when the determination result by the determination means is a second determination result (jackpot result) that corresponds to the second information and the game state transitions to the special game state, or when the determination result is the first determination result and the game ball passes through a predetermined area (V winning area) of the variable ball entry section,
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided,
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (a reserve area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
The second storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information,
The second judgment result can occur in either the judgment based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry section or the judgment based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section, while the first judgment result can occur only in the judgment based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The variable mechanism control means provides switching control modes (support modes) for the variable mechanism, including a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) that is set to make it difficult or impossible to score a ball in the second starting ball scoring area, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) that is set to make it easier to score a ball in the second starting ball scoring area than in the low-frequency switching mode by having the variable mechanism remain in a receiving state for a longer period of time than in the low-frequency switching mode;
A gaming machine characterized by having a special transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 to transition from the normal gaming state to the third special gaming state when the number of times the game is executed after the special gaming state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the specified information) that transitions to the specified gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode.

If the number of play times (play count) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the specified information, the game will transition to a specified game state compatible with the high-frequency switching mode. In the high-frequency switching mode, a ball can enter the second starting ball entry area, and a judgment (lottery) based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry area can result in not only a judgment result corresponding to the first information, but also a judgment result corresponding to the second information. This significantly increases the degree of advantage in the judgment (probability of winning or probability of transitioning to the special game state). In other words, reaching the ceiling will transition the player to a chance zone, which has a higher advantage than the previous game state. A configuration in which transition to the chance zone occurs when the ceiling is reached in this way can effectively stimulate the player's desire to play. This is advantageous for preventing gameplay from becoming monotonous and increasing attention to the game.

Furthermore, when the ceiling is reached, the ball will land in the second starting ball entry area, which not only prevents the player from losing balls but also increases the probability of transitioning to the special game state. This configuration allows the benefits of the second switching mode to be effectively utilized even if the player's stay in the second switching mode is shortened, effectively preventing the game from dragging on after the ceiling is reached.

Feature E3. The special transition means is a first special transition means;
a second special transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode when the number of executions of games in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode reaches a reference number of times to end (for example, 1 time) without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information after transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode by the first special transition means (a function of transitioning from the third special game state to the fourth special game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a time-saving period is consumed);
A gaming machine as described in feature E2, characterized in that it is equipped with a resetting means (ceiling resetting function in MPU 402 of main control unit 162) that resets the upper limit number of times when the second special transition means transitions to the specified gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode.

According to feature E3, the number of plays required to reach the ceiling is reset when the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling ends. This configuration is preferable for realizing a configuration in which the ceiling is shallow and the benefit of the ceiling is small, and a weak ceiling function is exerted in a short cycle. In other words, it is preferable for preventing monotony in play.

Feature E4: An execution count counter (e.g., a continuation count counter) is provided that counts the number of game times that have been executed without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information after the first special transition means has transitioned to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode,
The second special transition means is configured to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode when the value of the execution number counter becomes a value corresponding to the termination reference number,
The gaming machine described in feature E3 is characterized in that the execution count counter is updated (counts) when a game is played based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section, but is not updated (does not count) when a game is played based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section.

As shown in Feature E4, by configuring the termination criteria count to be updated when the ball hits the second starting ball hit area, it is possible to prevent the benefits of reaching the ceiling from being fully enjoyed.

Feature E5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features E2 to E4, wherein the upper limit number of plays, M (an integer), is specified to be smaller than the reciprocal of the probability (e.g., approximately 1/200) that the determination by the determination means will result in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode.

By specifying the upper limit number of times in the manner described above, the chance zones can be generated in short cycles, which can more effectively prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The configuration described in this feature can also be defined as "a gaming machine described in any one of Features E2 to E4, characterized in that in the specified gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the probability that the determination by the determination means will result in a determination result corresponding to the specified information is m/N (e.g., approximately 1/200), and the upper limit number of games, M (an integer), is specified so that M < N/m."

Feature E6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features E2 to E4, wherein the upper limit number of plays (an integer) is specified to be equal to or less than the reciprocal of the probability (e.g., approximately 1/200) that the determination by the determination means will result in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode.

By specifying the upper limit number of times in the manner described above, the chance zones can be generated in short cycles, which can more effectively prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The configuration described in this feature can also be defined as "a gaming machine described in any one of Features E2 to E4, characterized in that in the specified gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the probability that the determination by the determination means will result in a determination result corresponding to the specified information is m/N (e.g., approximately 1/200), and the upper limit number of games M (an integer) is specified so that M ≦ N/m."

Feature E7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features E2 to E6, wherein the sum (an integer) of the upper limit of the number of special information items stored in the second storage means and the termination reference count is specified to be equal to or less than the reciprocal of the probability (e.g., 1/10) that the determination by the determination means will result in a determination result corresponding to the first information.

By specifying the maximum number of memories and the termination criteria number in the manner described above, the chance zones can be generated in short cycles, which can more effectively prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The configuration described in this feature can also be defined as "a gaming machine described in any one of Features E2 to E6, wherein the probability that the determination result by the determination means will correspond to the first information is y/X (e.g., 1/10), and the sum S (an integer) of the upper limit of the number of special information items stored in the second storage means and the termination reference number of times is specified so that S ≦ X/y."

Feature E8. The termination reference number is a first termination reference number;
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode via the special game state when a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the second information is obtained in the predetermined game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode (a function of transitioning from the normal game state to the first special game state or the second special game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a jackpot result is obtained);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode when the number of executions of games in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode reaches a second termination reference number (for example, 6 times, 100 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first information and the second information after transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the first special game state or the second special game state to a fourth special game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a time-saving period is consumed);
A gaming machine described in any one of features E2 to E7, wherein the first termination reference number is specified to be less than the second termination reference number.

As shown in feature E8, by reducing the termination reference number of times (first termination reference number) set when the ceiling is reached compared to the termination reference number of times (second termination reference number) set when the determination result corresponds to the second information, the superiority of the determination result (the goal in the game) corresponding to the second determination information can be ensured while optimally demonstrating the rescue function when the ceiling is reached.

Note that the technical ideas described above in Features E3 to E8 may also be applied to Feature E1.

Incidentally, the technical ideas described in Features A to D above may also be applied to Features E1 to E8.

<Feature Group F>
The following feature group F was made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launch operation by the player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is variable, and the ball entrance section is switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature F1. A game board (game board 80aB) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83B) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special jackpot result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the special win game state or a transition process to the jackpot game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that transitions the game state to a special game state (a special win game state or a jackpot game state) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, a normal game state or a special game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information and the game operation by the game number control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83B) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83B by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state,
The predetermined information includes first information (a random number group corresponding to a special winning result) and second information (a random number group corresponding to a big winning result),
The variable ball entry section control means
a means for switching the variable ball entry section to the receiving state in a first control mode when the determination result by the determination means becomes a first determination result (special jackpot result) that corresponds to the first information and the special game state is entered;
and means for switching the variable ball entry section to the receiving state in a second control manner when the determination result by the determination means is a second determination result (jackpot result) that corresponds to the second information and the game state transitions to the special game state, or when the determination result is the first determination result and the game ball passes through a predetermined area (V winning area) of the variable ball entry section,
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided,
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (a reserve area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
The second judgment result can occur in either the judgment based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry section or the judgment based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section, while the first judgment result can occur only in the judgment based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The variable mechanism control means provides switching control modes (support modes) for the variable mechanism, including a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) that is set to make it difficult or impossible to score a ball in the second starting ball scoring area, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) that is set to make it easier to score a ball in the second starting ball scoring area than in the low-frequency switching mode by having the variable mechanism remain in a receiving state for a longer period of time than in the low-frequency switching mode;
a first special transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode when the number of times the game has been executed after the end of the special game state reaches an upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 for transitioning from the normal game state to the third special game state when the ceiling is reached);
a second special transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode when the number of executions of games in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode reaches a reference number of times to end (for example, 100 times) without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information after transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode by the first special transition means (a function of transitioning from the third special game state to the fourth special game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a time-saving period is consumed);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the sum (an integer) of the maximum number of special information that can be stored in the second storage means and the termination reference number of times is specified to be greater than or equal to the reciprocal of the probability (for example, approximately 1/5) that the judgment result by the judgment means will correspond to the specified information.

In this configuration, if the number of play times (play count) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the specified information, the game transitions to a specified game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode. Even if the high-frequency switching mode is activated, if the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the specified information remains low, the following inconveniences may occur. That is, even if the ceiling is reached, the period until the player receives the full benefit expected by the player (transition to the special game state) may be extended, or the high-frequency switching mode may end before the full benefit is obtained (a rush-through occurs). This is undesirable because it significantly reduces the player's motivation to play. In this regard, in the configuration described above, switching from the low-frequency switching mode to the high-frequency switching mode allows the ball to enter the second starting ball entry area, and the judgment (lottery) based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry area may result in not only the second judgment result corresponding to the second information but also the first judgment result corresponding to the first information. In other words, the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information, i.e., the probability of transitioning to a special game state, is significantly increased when the ceiling is reached. Furthermore, the sum (e.g., 104 times) of the upper limit of special information stored in the second storage means (e.g., 4) and the termination reference number (e.g., 100 times) is set to be equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information, thereby advantageously realizing a configuration in which transitioning to a special game state is highly likely or essentially confirmed when the ceiling is reached. This effectively prevents the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences.

Furthermore, if there is a limit to the number of plays that can be played in high-frequency switching mode when the ceiling is reached, for example, there is a greater concern about the above-mentioned rushing. In this regard, the above configuration can mitigate the impact of the limit on the number of plays when the ceiling is reached. In other words, even when adopting high-frequency switching mode with a limit on the number of plays when the ceiling is reached, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be effectively prevented.

Feature F2. A gaming machine as described in Feature F1, wherein the probability of the first determination result (e.g., 1/5) in the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section is set to be higher than the probability of the second determination result (e.g., 1/200).

Feature F2 significantly increases the probability that a judgment result corresponding to the specified information will be obtained when switching from low-frequency switching mode to high-frequency switching mode. This is advantageous for achieving the ceiling-reaching relief function described in feature F1, shortening the duration of stay in high-frequency switching mode and preventing the delay until the above-mentioned sufficient benefit is granted.

Feature F3: An execution count counter (e.g., a continuation count counter) is provided to grasp the number of game executions that have been executed without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information after the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode by the first special transition means,
The second special transition means is configured to transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode when the value of the execution number counter becomes a value corresponding to the termination reference number,
The gaming machine described in feature F1 or feature F2 is characterized in that the execution count counter is updated (counts) when a game is played based on a ball scoring in the second starting ball scoring section, but is not updated (does not count) when a game is played based on a ball scoring in the first starting ball scoring section.

According to the configuration shown in Feature F3, the number of plays related to the second starting ball entry section is counted by the execution count counter, while the number of plays related to the first starting ball entry section is not counted by the execution count counter. In this way, by configuring the number of plays related to the second starting ball entry section to determine whether the termination reference number has been reached, it is possible to preferably realize a configuration in which a transition to a special game state is highly likely or essentially confirmed when the ceiling is reached.

Feature F4: The termination reference number of times is a first termination reference number of times (e.g., 100 times),
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode via the special game state when a second determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the second information occurs in the predetermined game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode (a function of transitioning from the normal game state to the first special game state or the second special game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a jackpot result occurs);
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode when the number of executions of games in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode reaches a second termination reference number (for example, once or three times) without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information after transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the first special game state or the second special game state to a fourth special game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a time-saving period is consumed);
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, wherein the first termination reference number is set to be greater than the second termination reference number.

If the second determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained in a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode, the game will transition via a special gaming state to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode. In the configuration shown in this feature, the reference number of times to terminate the high-frequency switching mode, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, is greater than the reference number of times to terminate the high-frequency switching mode, which is triggered by the second determination result, and transitioning to the special gaming state when the ceiling is reached is favored. With this configuration, the rescue function shown in feature F1 etc. can be effectively utilized.

Feature F5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F4, wherein the upper limit number of plays, M (an integer), is specified to be greater than the reciprocal of the probability (e.g., 1/200) of the second determination result being reached in the determination by the determination means.

As shown in Feature F1, in a configuration in which both the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling and the high-frequency switching mode triggered by a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information execute game rounds based on a ball entering the second start ball entry section, the bonus is the same if a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained during the high-frequency switching mode. To increase player satisfaction, it is preferable to increase the bonus when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained. However, this could result in an increase in the benefits expected when the ceiling is reached, raising concerns that the rescue function resulting from reaching the ceiling may become overly powerful. This concern is particularly likely to be exacerbated in a configuration in which reaching the ceiling is highly likely or virtually certain to result in a transition to a special game state, as shown in Feature F1. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by setting the upper limit number of times (ceiling) greater than the inverse of the probability of the second determination result, the benefits expected from reaching the ceiling can be increased while reducing the number of times the ceiling is reached, thereby eliminating the above-mentioned concerns.

The configuration described in this feature can also be defined as "a gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F4, characterized in that the probability of the second determination result in the determination by the determination means is m/N (e.g., 1/200), and the upper limit number of plays, M (an integer), is specified so that M > N/m."

Feature F6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F4, wherein the upper limit number of plays, M (an integer), is specified to be equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability (e.g., 1/200) that the determination result by the determination means will correspond to the predetermined information.

As shown in Feature F1, in a configuration in which both the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling and the high-frequency switching mode triggered by a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information execute game rounds based on a ball entering the second start ball entry section, the bonus will be the same if a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained during the high-frequency switching mode. To increase player satisfaction, it is preferable to increase the bonus when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained. However, this could result in an increase in the benefits expected when the ceiling is reached, raising concerns that the rescue function resulting from reaching the ceiling may become overly powerful. This concern is particularly likely to be exacerbated in a configuration in which reaching the ceiling is highly likely or virtually certain to result in a transition to a special game state, as shown in Feature F1. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the upper limit number of times (ceiling) is set to be equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability of the second determination result, the benefits expected from reaching the ceiling can be increased while reducing the number of times the ceiling is reached, thereby eliminating the above-mentioned concerns.

The configuration described in this feature can also be defined as "a gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F4, characterized in that the probability that the determination by the determination means will result in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information is m/N (e.g., 1/200), and the upper limit number of plays, M (an integer), is specified so that M ≧ N/m."

Feature F7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F6, wherein when the determination by the determination means in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode transitioned to by the special transition means results in a determination result corresponding to the first information, the operating period of the gaming operation is shorter than when the determination result corresponds to the first information under other circumstances.

As shown in feature F7, in a predetermined gaming state that corresponds to the high-frequency switching mode after the ceiling is reached, the operation period of the gaming cycle operation when the first judgment result is reached is shortened, thereby shortening the time required to transition to the special gaming state, allowing the player to quickly enjoy the benefits they expect.

Feature F8. The second storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired based on a shot into the second starting shot section,
The game control means is configured to execute the game operation in such a manner that the operation period of the game operation becomes shorter as the number of special information stored in the second storage means increases,
The high-frequency switching modes include a first high-frequency switching mode and a second high-frequency switching mode in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period than in the first high-frequency switching mode, thereby making it easier to score in the second starting scoring section than in the first high-frequency switching mode.
When the determination by the determination means results in the first determination result, or when the first determination result is reached and the game ball passes through a predetermined area (V winning area) of the variable ball entry section, a means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first high frequency switching mode via the special game state is provided;
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F7, characterized in that the special transition means is configured to transition to the specified gaming state corresponding to the second high-frequency switching mode when the number of game plays executed after the special gaming state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the specified information.

According to feature F8, in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second high-frequency switching mode, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than in the predetermined game state corresponding to the first high-frequency switching mode, which is triggered by the first judgment result passing through the predetermined area or the second judgment result. In other words, in the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling, the frequency of balls entering the second starting ball entry section increases, and the amount of special information stored in the second storage means increases. Therefore, the operating period of the game-use operation in the game round after reaching the ceiling is shortened, and the period from reaching the ceiling to enjoying the above-mentioned benefits can be effectively prevented from being extended.

Note that the technical ideas described above in Features A to E may also be applied to Features F1 to F8.

<Feature Group G>
The following feature group G was made in consideration of the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launch operation by the player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is variable, and the ball entrance section is switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and the following background/issues: "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature G1. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432A in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination,
As the predetermined judgment information, first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) and second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state,
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided,
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (a reserve area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
The judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information can occur in either the judgment based on the ball scoring in the first starting ball scoring section or the judgment based on the ball scoring in the second starting ball scoring section, while the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information can occur only in the judgment based on the ball scoring in the second starting ball scoring section,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The variable mechanism control means provides switching control modes (support modes) for the variable mechanism, including a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) that is set to make it difficult or impossible to score a ball in the second starting ball scoring area, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) that is set to make it easier to score a ball in the second starting ball scoring area than in the low-frequency switching mode by having the variable mechanism remain in a receiving state for a longer period of time than in the low-frequency switching mode;
As the predetermined gaming states, a first type gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the low frequency switching mode and a second type gaming state (e.g., a third normal gaming state, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high frequency switching mode are provided,
a first transition means for transitioning to the second type gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state (a function of transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a jackpot result is obtained);
a second transition means for transitioning to the first type gaming state when the number of times the game has been executed in the second type gaming state reaches a reference number of times to end the game (for example, 10 times, 20 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the second type gaming state transitioned to by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the time-saving period is consumed);
and a termination reference number resetting means for resetting the termination reference number of times (for example, resetting to 20 times) when a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the second type gaming state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the termination reference number resetting means is configured to reset the number of times without going through the special game state.

According to feature G1, if a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the Type 1 game state, the game transitions to the Type 2 game state via the special game state. The Type 2 game state corresponds to the high-frequency switching mode, and the loss of balls is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry area. A count limit is set for the Type 2 game state, and if the number of game plays in the Type 2 game state reaches the termination reference number, the game transitions to the Type 1 game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode. This makes it difficult for balls to enter the second starting ball entry area. Here, a judgment based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry area may result in a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result). If a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the Type 2 game state, the termination reference number is reset without passing through the special game state. This causes the Type 2 game state (high-frequency switching mode) to loop (extend). This loop makes it possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while suppressing the loss of balls. By diversifying games in this way, we can help increase interest in games.

Feature G2. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432A in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination,
As the predetermined judgment information, first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) and second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state,
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided,
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (a reserve area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
The judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information can occur in either the judgment based on the ball scoring in the first starting ball scoring section or the judgment based on the ball scoring in the second starting ball scoring section, while the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information can occur only in the judgment based on the ball scoring in the second starting ball scoring section,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means include a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) set to make it difficult or impossible to score a ball in the second starting ball entry section, a second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set to make it easier to score a ball in the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by having the variable mechanism remain in the receiving state for a longer period of time than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high frequency support mode A) set to make it easier to score a ball in the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode by having the variable mechanism remain in the receiving state for a longer period of time than in the first switching mode,
As the predetermined gaming states, a first gaming state (for example, a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode, a second gaming state (for example, a third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode, and a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode are provided,
a first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state (a function of transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a jackpot result is obtained);
a second transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state when the number of times the game has been played in the second gaming state reaches a first reference number of times to end the game (for example, 10 or 20 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the second gaming state transitioned to by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the time-saving period is consumed);
a third transition means for transitioning to the third game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the second game state and the game time in which the determination result is obtained is completed (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 for transitioning from the third normal game state to the fourth normal game state when the special miss result is obtained);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a fourth transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a time-saving period is consumed) for transitioning to the first gaming state when the number of times the game has been executed in the third gaming state to which transition has been made by the third transition means reaches a second termination reference number (for example, 20 times) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information.

According to feature G2, if a judgment result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the first gaming state, the game transitions to the second gaming state via the special gaming state. The second gaming state corresponds to the second switching mode, and the decrease in balls is suppressed by increasing the number of balls that enter the second starting ball entry area. A number of times is limited in the second gaming state, and if the number of times that a game is played in the second gaming state reaches the first termination reference number, the game transitions to the first gaming state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode. This makes it difficult for a ball to enter the second starting ball entry area. Here, a judgment based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry area may result in a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special miss result). If a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the second gaming state, the game transitions to the third gaming state without passing through the special gaming state. The third gaming state corresponds to the third switching mode, and like the second gaming state, the game rounds related to the second starting ball entry section are executed. This state continues until the number of executed game rounds reaches the second ending reference number. Here, when transitioning from the second gaming state to the third gaming state, the game rounds related to the second starting ball entry section continue to progress. This makes it possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while minimizing the loss of balls. By realizing diversification of games in this way, it can contribute to increasing attention to the games.

Feature G3: A termination reference number resetting means (a function of resetting the continuation number counter in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided to reset the second termination reference number when a judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information occurs in the third gaming state;
The gaming machine described in feature G2 is characterized in that the termination reference number resetting means is configured to perform the resetting without going through the special game state.

According to feature G3, if a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the third gaming state, the second termination reference number is reset. In other words, the third gaming state loops. This loop does not go through the special gaming state, so gaming progresses smoothly even if the loop is repeated.

Feature G4. A gaming machine according to Feature G2 or Feature G3, wherein the second termination reference number is specified to be the same as or greater than the first termination reference number.

Feature G4 prevents the player from suffering a substantial loss when the second game state transitions to the third game state, depending on the timing of the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (the game turn resulting in that judgment result). This is preferable in that the loop function described above allows for diversification of games and effectively increases the interest in the games.

Feature G5. A gaming machine described in Feature G3 or Feature G4, wherein in the third gaming state, the probability that the determination by the determination means will result in a determination result corresponding to the first determination information is higher than the probability that the determination result will result in a determination result corresponding to the second determination information.

According to feature G5, during the loop, the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is higher than the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information. This configuration makes it less likely that the aforementioned loop function will not function properly due to frequent judgment results corresponding to the first judgment information.

Feature G6: A fifth transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the third gaming state (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a jackpot result is obtained);
a sixth transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state when the number of times that games have been played in the second gaming state to which the transition has been made by the fifth transition means reaches a third reference number of times for ending (for example, 20 times) without resulting in a determination result corresponding to the first determination information; and a sixth transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 has expended a time-saving period and the MPU 402 has expended a time-saving period and the MPU 402 has expended a time-saving period.
A gaming machine described in any one of features G3 to G5, characterized in that the third termination reference number is specified to be the same as or greater than the second termination reference number.

According to feature G6, if a determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained during the above-mentioned loop, the termination reference number of times (third termination reference number of times) in the second game state to which the game transitions next becomes equal to or greater than the second termination reference number. With this configuration, if a determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained during the loop, the player's advantage increases after the special game state ends compared to during the loop, and it is possible to add an accent to gameplay during the loop.

Feature G7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features G2 to G6, characterized in that the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode is closer to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode than to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the first switching mode.

This feature is advantageous in that it encourages the player to perceive the game states before and after the transition from the second game state to the third game state as if they were the same.

The "switching mode" described in this feature is composed of three elements: the period during which the open state is maintained, the number of times the open state is switched to, and the interval between open states. "Similar to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode" means that there are more matching or similar elements among these three elements than in the "first switching mode."

Incidentally, the configuration described in this feature can also be defined as "a gaming machine described in any one of Features G2 to G6, characterized in that the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode is the same as the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode."

Feature G8: The determination mode performed by the determination means includes a low probability mode in which the probability of a determination result corresponding to the first determination information being obtained is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of a determination result corresponding to the first determination information being obtained is relatively high,
A gaming machine described in any one of features G3 to G7, characterized in that the determination mode in the second gaming state is the low probability mode.

Feature G8 prevents the loop function from being overwhelmed by frequent occurrences of judgment results corresponding to the first judgment information during the above-mentioned loop. This makes it possible to diversify the game while suppressing an increase in gambling.

Feature G9. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432A in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination,
As the predetermined judgment information, first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) and second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided for switching the variable ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state,
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided,
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (a reserve area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
The judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information can occur in either the judgment based on the ball scoring in the first starting ball scoring section or the judgment based on the ball scoring in the second starting ball scoring section, while the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information can occur only in the judgment based on the ball scoring in the second starting ball scoring section,
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means include a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) that is set to make it difficult or impossible to score a ball in the second starting ball scoring section, and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) that is set to make it easier to score a ball in the second starting ball scoring section than in the low-frequency switching mode by having the variable mechanism remain in a receiving state for a longer period of time than in the low-frequency switching mode,
As the predetermined gaming state, a first type gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and a second type gaming state (e.g., a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode are provided,
a transition means for transitioning to the first game state when the number of times that games are executed in the second game state reaches a reference number of times to end (for example, 20 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the second game state (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the time-saving period is consumed);
and a termination reference number resetting means for resetting the termination reference number of times (for example, resetting to 20 times) when a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the second type gaming state;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the termination reference number resetting means is configured to reset the number of times without going through the special game state.

According to feature G9, if a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the second type game state, the termination reference number is reset. In other words, the second type game state loops. In this loop, the special game state is not entered, so the game progresses smoothly even if the loop is repeated. This allows for diversification of games and contributes to increasing attention to the game.

Note that the technical ideas described above in Features G3 to G8 may also be applied to Features G1 and G9.

Incidentally, the technical ideas described in Features A to F above may also be applied to Features G1 to G9.

<Feature H group>
The following feature group H was made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launch operation by the player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is variable, and the ball entrance section is switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature H1. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432A in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than in the low-frequency switching mode, as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means;
a special transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode without passing through the special game state when the number of times the game has been executed after the end of the special game state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information; and a function of transitioning to a fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the ceiling is reached.
an upper limit number setting means for setting the upper limit number of times when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained and the game state transitions to the predetermined game state via the special game state;
a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information being achieved is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information being achieved is relatively high, as a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination means makes the determination;
As the predetermined determination information, first information (a random number group corresponding to a normal jackpot result) which is a trigger for transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, and second information (a random number group corresponding to a probability variable jackpot result) which is a trigger for transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode are provided,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the upper limit number setting means is configured to set the upper limit number to a first number (e.g., 300 times) when the judgment by the judgment means results in a judgment result corresponding to the first information, and to set the upper limit number to a second number (e.g., 100 times) that is less than the first number when the judgment by the judgment means results in a judgment result corresponding to the second information.

If the number of play times (play count) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game will transition to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode. By forcibly changing the rhythm of the game in this way, monotony in the game can be effectively prevented. Here, the upper limit number of times that will result in the ceiling being reached will be the first number (e.g., 300 times) if a judgment result corresponding to the first information is obtained, and will be the second number, which is less than the first number, if a judgment result corresponding to the second information is obtained. Here, because the transition to the special game state occurs earlier in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, setting the upper limit number to a low number can effectively utilize the effects of the above-mentioned ceiling function. This can effectively contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Feature H2. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432A in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than in the low-frequency switching mode, as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means;
a special transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode without passing through the special game state when the number of times the game has been executed after the end of the special game state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information; and a function of transitioning to a fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the ceiling is reached.
an upper limit number setting means for setting the upper limit number of times when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained and the game state transitions to the predetermined game state via the special game state;
a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information being achieved is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information being achieved is relatively high, as a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination means makes the determination;
As the predetermined determination information, first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 6R normal jackpot result) which is a trigger for transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 2R probability variable jackpot result) which is a trigger for transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode are provided,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the upper limit number setting means is configured to set the upper limit number to be lower when the judgment by the judgment means results in a judgment result corresponding to the second information than when the judgment by the judgment means results in a judgment result corresponding to the first information.

If the number of play times (play count) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information, the game will transition to a specified game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode. By forcibly changing the rhythm of the game in this way, monotony in the game can be effectively prevented. Here, the upper limit number of times that will result in the ceiling being reached is configured to be fewer (shortened) when a judgment result corresponding to the second information is obtained compared to when a judgment result corresponding to the first information is obtained. Here, because the transition to the special game state occurs earlier in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, setting the upper limit number to a low number can effectively demonstrate the effects of the above-mentioned ceiling function. This can effectively contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Feature H3. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432A in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than in the low-frequency switching mode, as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means;
a special transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode without passing through the special game state when the number of times the game has been executed after the end of the special game state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information; and a function of transitioning to a fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the ceiling is reached.
an upper limit number setting means for setting the upper limit number of times when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained and the game state transitions to the predetermined game state via the special game state;
a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information being achieved is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information being achieved is relatively high, as a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination means makes the determination;
As the predetermined determination information, first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 6R normal jackpot result) which is a trigger for transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 2R probability variable jackpot result) which is a trigger for transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode are provided,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the upper limit number setting means is configured to set the upper limit number to a first number (e.g., 300 times) when the judgment by the judgment means results in a judgment result corresponding to the first information, and to set the upper limit number to a second number (e.g., 100 times) that is less than the first number when the judgment by the judgment means results in a judgment result corresponding to the second information.

If the number of play times (play count) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information, the game will transition to a specified game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode. By forcibly changing the rhythm of the game in this way, monotony in the game can be effectively prevented. Here, the upper limit number of times that will result in the ceiling being reached is configured to be fewer (shortened) when a judgment result corresponding to the second information is obtained compared to when a judgment result corresponding to the first information is obtained. Here, because the transition to the special game state occurs earlier in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, setting the upper limit number to a low number can effectively demonstrate the effects of the above-mentioned ceiling function. This can effectively contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Furthermore, in a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, even though the mode is set to high probability mode, the game progresses without producing a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, resulting in a large increase in investment contrary to the player's expectations. This is expected to be a factor that significantly reduces the player's motivation to play. In this regard, as shown in this feature, in a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, the above-mentioned upper limit number of times can be lowered and the game can be switched to the high frequency switching mode at an early timing, thereby suppressing investment, thereby making it possible to effectively utilize the effect of diversifying games (the effect of increasing attention to the game).

Feature H4. A gaming machine according to Feature H3, wherein the first number of times is equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the low probability mode, and the second number of times is equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the high probability mode.

If the rescue function for reaching the ceiling shown in Feature H3 were to be overly effective, the technical significance (diversification of gameplay) of providing predetermined game states corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency switching mode could be diminished. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by setting the upper limit number of times in each game state so that it is equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability of achieving a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, it is possible to optimally combine the diversification of gameplay with the rescue function.

Feature H5: The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information (for example, four pieces of special information),
The game control means has an operation period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that can set an operation period of the game operation according to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
the operation period setting means is configured to set the operation period such that the operation period becomes shorter as the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means increases,
a means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode when the number of times a game is executed in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode, which has been transitioned to by the special transition means, reaches a reference number of times to terminate (for example, 400 times) without resulting in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information;
A gaming machine according to feature H3 or feature H4, characterized in that the termination reference number of times is specified to be greater than the second number of times.

Increasing the number of stored special information items to shorten the operation period of the game play action is preferable for smooth game progress. However, assuming such a configuration, applying the configuration described in feature H3 above can cause the following inconvenience. That is, if the ceiling is reached in a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency switching mode and the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency switching mode, the game play in that predetermined game state may progress too quickly, resulting in the benefit of reaching the ceiling ending before the benefit can be fully experienced. This is a concern as it could significantly reduce the player's attention to the rescue function. In this regard, setting the termination reference number to be greater than the upper limit number (second number), as described in this feature, can help alleviate the above concern.

Feature H6: In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency switching mode, which is transitioned to upon reaching the first number of times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, a first termination reference number of times is set as the termination reference number, and in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency switching mode, which is transitioned to upon reaching the first number of times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, a second termination reference number of times is set as the termination reference number,
A gaming machine described in any one of Features H3 to H5, characterized in that the first termination reference number and the second termination reference number are specified to be the same number.

According to Feature H6, using a first termination threshold count and a second termination threshold count is preferable for simplifying the game configuration. Even with this configuration, the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information is increased during the high probability mode, so the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information increases while the rescue function is being exercised. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences that can occur in a specified game state that supports both the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode.

Feature H7. In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency switching mode, which is transitioned to when the first number of times has been reached in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, a first termination reference number of times is set as the termination reference number, and in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency switching mode, which is transitioned to when the first number of times has been reached in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, a second termination reference number of times is set as the termination reference number,
A gaming machine described in any one of Features H3 to H5, wherein the second termination reference number is specified to be less than the first termination reference number.

According to feature H7, by making the second termination threshold number less than the first termination threshold number, it is possible to prevent the rescue function from becoming a factor that encourages gambling.

Feature H8. The starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (first actuation port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second actuation port 92A) in which the determination by the determination means is more favorable to the player than the first starting ball entry section,
A gaming machine described in any one of Features H3 to H7, characterized in that the variable mechanism is configured to be switchable between the accepting state (open state) in which a gaming ball can enter the second starting ball entry section, and the non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for a gaming ball to enter than in the accepting state.

According to feature H8, judgments based on balls entering the second starting ball entry section are favored over judgments based on balls entering the first starting ball entry section to be more advantageous to the player. When the ceiling is reached in a predetermined game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, not only is investment suppressed, but the judgment results are also favored, thereby doubling the player's rescue function. When a player gets stuck in a predetermined game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, expectations of reaching the ceiling increase. This can contribute to further increasing attention to the game.

Feature H9. A gaming machine described in any one of Features H3 to H8, wherein the determination based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section includes a determination result that triggers a transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode, and the determination based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section does not include a determination result that triggers a transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode.

Feature H9 prevents a situation in which the ceiling is reached during a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, and while the rescue function is being activated, a determination result is made that triggers a transition back to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, effectively eliminating the benefit of the ceiling (wasted draw).

Feature H10. The first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section are arranged on a predetermined flow path in the game area,
The acquired information storage means includes a first storage means (a reserve area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting ball entry section, and a second storage means (a reserve area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry section,
A gaming machine described in any one of features H3 to H9, characterized in that when special information is stored in both the first storage means and the second storage means, the judgment means is configured to prioritize the special information stored in the second storage means as the subject of the judgment.

With this configuration, even if the ceiling is reached in a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency switching mode and the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency switching mode, there is no need to change the destination of the game balls to enjoy the benefits of the rescue function. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the rescue function is suddenly activated without going through a special game state, it is possible to prevent game balls from being wasted and to appropriately improve satisfaction with the rescue function.

Feature H11: The high-frequency switching mode is a first high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode A),
a second high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) is provided as a switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism, in which the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that in the low-frequency switching mode;
As the predetermined determination information, third information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 6R probability variable jackpot result) is provided, which serves as a transition trigger to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second high frequency switching mode,
A gaming machine described in any one of Features H3 to H10, characterized in that the second high-frequency switching mode is configured so that the ratio of the number of gaming balls paid out by the payout means to the number of gaming balls launched by the gaming ball launching means is higher than in the first high-frequency switching mode.

According to feature H11, when the ceiling is reached in a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency switching mode, the game transitions to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and first high frequency switching mode, in which game ball loss is suppressed compared to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and second high frequency switching mode. This configuration emphasizes the advantage of reaching the ceiling and can significantly change the rhythm of the game when the ceiling is reached.

Note that the technical ideas described in Features A to G above may also be applied to Features H1 to H11.

<Feature Group I>
The following group of features I was made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launch operation by the player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is variable, and the ball entrance section is switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature I1. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432A in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism enters the receiving state,
a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information being achieved is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information being achieved is relatively high, as a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination means makes the determination;
The predetermined determination information includes specific information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 10R probability variable jackpot result B) that triggers a transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode,
A gaming machine characterized by having a special transition means (a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 that transitions to a normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A when the ceiling is reached) that transitions to the specified gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A without passing through the special gaming state if, during the specified gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the number of gaming times executed after the special gaming state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 50 times) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information.

According to Feature I1, if, during a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the number of play times after the special gaming state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game transitions to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode without passing through the special gaming state. This configuration ensures the player's advantage during the high probability mode while effectively preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

Feature I2. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432A in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism enters the receiving state,
a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information being achieved is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information being achieved is relatively high, as a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination means makes the determination;
The predetermined determination information includes specific information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 10R probability variable jackpot result B) that triggers a transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode,
The high probability mode is terminated when the number of times a game is executed after transiting through the special game state to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode reaches a first reference number (e.g., 100 times) without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the second switching mode is terminated when the number of times a game is executed after transiting through the special game state to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode reaches a second reference number (e.g., 50 times) that is less than the first reference number without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information.
a means for shifting the switching control mode to the third switching mode when the number of times of execution of the game after the end of the special game state reaches a third reference number (for example, 50 times) without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the third reference number of times is specified to be equal to or greater than the second reference number of times and equal to or less than the first reference number of times.

According to feature I2, after transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the second switching mode ends if the number of game plays reaches a second reference number without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, and the high probability mode ends if the number of game plays reaches the first reference number. Here, if the number of game plays after the special game state ends reaches a third reference number without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the switching control mode becomes the third switching mode. This third reference number is equal to or greater than the second reference number and less than the first reference number, and the switching control mode switches to the third switching mode during the high probability mode. This configuration ensures the player's advantage during the high probability mode while effectively preventing gameplay from becoming monotonous.

Feature I3. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432A in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured to have different frequencies at which the variable mechanism enters the receiving state,
a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information being achieved is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information being achieved is relatively high, as a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination means makes the determination;
The predetermined determination information includes specific information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 10R probability variable jackpot result B) that triggers a transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode,
The high probability mode is terminated when the number of times a game is executed after transiting through the special game state to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode reaches a first reference number (e.g., 100 times) without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the second switching mode is terminated when the number of times a game is executed after transiting through the special game state to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode reaches a second reference number (e.g., 50 times) that is less than the first reference number without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information.
a means for shifting the switching control mode to the third switching mode when the number of times of execution of the game after the end of the special game state reaches a third reference number (for example, 50 times) which is less than the first reference number without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the third reference number of times is specified to be the same as the second reference number of times.

According to feature I3, after transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the second switching mode ends if the number of game plays reaches a second reference number without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, and the high probability mode ends if the number of game plays reaches the first reference number. Here, if the number of game plays after the special game state ends reaches a third reference number without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the switching control mode becomes the third switching mode. This third reference number is the same as the second reference number, and the switching control mode switches from the second switching mode to the third switching mode during the high probability mode. This configuration ensures the player's advantage during the high probability mode while effectively preventing gameplay from becoming monotonous.

Feature I4. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432A in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode), a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high-frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode are provided,
a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information being achieved is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information being achieved is relatively high, as a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination means makes the determination;
The predetermined determination information includes specific information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 10R probability variable jackpot result B) that triggers a transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode,
a first transition means for transitioning the lottery mode to the low probability mode without passing through the special game state when the number of times a game has been executed after transitioning through the special game state to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode reaches a first reference number (for example, 100 times) without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information;
A gaming machine characterized by having a second transition means that transitions the switching control mode to the third switching mode without passing through the special gaming state when the number of game plays executed after transitioning to the specified gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode becomes a second reference number (e.g., 50 times) that is less than the first reference number without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information.

According to Feature I4, after transitioning to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, if the number of game plays reaches the second reference number without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the switching control mode becomes the third switching mode, and if the number of game plays reaches the first reference number, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode. This configuration ensures the player's advantage in the high probability mode while effectively preventing gameplay from becoming monotonous.

Feature I5. The gaming machine described in Feature I4 is configured so that the third switching mode has a higher ratio of the number of gaming balls paid out by the payout means to the number of gaming balls launched by the gaming ball launching means than the second switching mode.

As shown in Feature I4, in gaming machines (so-called ST machines) that have an upper limit (first reference number) on the number of play times in a predetermined game state compatible with a high probability mode, the likelihood of a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information decreases as the number of play times approaches the first reference number, which can significantly lower the player's expectations. This is undesirable in terms of increasing attention to the game. In this regard, with the configuration shown in Feature I4, the third switching mode is triggered when the ceiling is reached, which increases the frequency of balls entering the second starting ball entry area, thereby suppressing investment. In this way, by using the ceiling function to further favor the switching control mode in the latter half, the weakness of ST machines (a significant decrease in expectations toward the end) can be overcome.

The configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a gaming machine including a gaming board (gaming board 80aA) on which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, a gaming ball launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on the player's operation, and a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out gaming balls (prize balls) based on the balls entering ball entry sections (operation ports 91A, 92A and variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area, and a special information acquiring means (an MPU 402 of a main control device 162 that acquires special information (reserved information) when a ball enters a starting ball entry section (operation ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section. a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), an acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, a determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result), and a game operation (a function of executing a lottery process in the operation port display units D1 and D2) prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means. a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (operation port display units D1, D2) so that a game round operation for each game round is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game round being counted as one game round when a variable display of a picture to be displayed is started and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment; and a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for changing a game state to a predetermined game state (a first normal game state to a fourth normal game state) based on the fact that the judgment result by the judgment means becomes a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information and the game round operation by the game round control means is ended. a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; a variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than the accepting state; and a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing opening/closing processing of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when transitioning to the special game state;
The device is equipped with a variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepting state, and a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric role support process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the variable mechanism, and the variable mechanism control means has a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (low frequency support mode) that is set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode. The game machine is provided with a second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) and a third switching mode (high frequency support mode A) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is configured so that the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball firing means is higher than in the second switching mode, and as a judgment mode (lottery mode) in which the judgment is made by the judgment means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is relatively low and a high probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is relatively high are provided, and the predetermined judgment information includes specific information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 10R certain variable jackpot result B) that triggers a transition to the high probability mode and the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, and the game machine is configured so that the number of game plays after transitioning through the special game state to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode reaches a first reference number (for example, 100 times) without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information. and second transition means for transitioning the switching control mode to the third switching mode without passing through the special game state when the number of executions of games after transitioning through the special game state to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode becomes a second reference number (for example, 50 times) which is less than the first reference number of times without resulting in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information.

Feature I6. A gaming machine as described in Feature I4 or Feature I5, wherein the second transition means is configured to transition from the second switching mode to the third switching mode during a game in which the second reference number of times has been reached.

The configuration shown in feature I6 allows for seamless high support, allowing for smooth gameplay.

Feature I7. A gaming machine as described in Feature I4 or Feature I5, wherein the second transition means is configured to transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode upon completion of a gaming round that has reached the second reference number (e.g., 50 rounds) without producing a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information after transitioning through the special gaming state to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, and to transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode in the next gaming round.

According to the configuration shown in Feature I7, when the rescue function is activated in response to reaching the ceiling, the switching control mode changes from the first switching mode to the third switching mode. This configuration can enhance the impact when the switching control mode is changed.

Feature I8. A gaming machine according to Feature I7, wherein the second reference number of times is specified to be equal to or less than the first termination reference number of times and equal to or greater than the difference between the first reference number of times and the second reference number of times.

This feature of the configuration shortens the duration of gameplay in the high probability mode and the third switching mode compared to the duration of gameplay in the high probability mode and the second switching mode, dramatically increasing the level of attention in the final stages of the advantageous state transitioned to after the special game state ends.

Feature I9. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information,
The game control means has an operation period setting means capable of setting an operation period of the game operation according to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features I4 to I5, characterized in that in the third switching mode, the average number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means when gaming balls are continuously fired toward the starting ball entry section is configured to be greater than the average number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means when gaming balls are continuously fired toward the starting ball entry section in the second switching mode.

This feature allows the speed of gameplay to change by transitioning from a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and second switching mode to a predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and third switching mode when the ceiling is reached. This further reduces the monotony of gameplay.

Feature I10. The starting ball scoring section includes a first starting ball scoring section and a second starting ball scoring section in which the judgment by the judgment means is more favorable to the player than the first starting ball scoring section,
The variable mechanism is configured to be switchable between the receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry portion and the non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the receiving state,
The first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section are both arranged in a predetermined flow path in the game area,
The gaming machine described in feature I9 is characterized in that the judgment means is configured to make the judgment in the order in which the balls enter the first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section.

This feature of the configuration shifts the game state from the high probability mode and the second switching mode to the high probability mode and the third switching mode when the ceiling is reached, increasing the opportunities for a game round related to the second starting ball entry section to be played. This significantly increases the player's advantage when the ceiling is reached, and can favorably increase attention to the game after the ceiling is reached.

Feature I11. When the number of execution times of the game after the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode by the second transition means reaches a third reference number without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, a third transition means is provided to transition the switching control mode to the first switching mode without passing through the special game state;
A gaming machine according to any one of features I4 to I10, wherein the third reference number of times is set to be greater than the first reference number of times.

With this configuration, after the special game state ends, the game state transitions in the following order: high probability mode and predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode → high probability mode and predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode → low probability mode and predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode → predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the first switching mode. This configuration prevents a rapid decline in attention to the game when the game transitions to the third switching mode and low probability mode upon reaching the ceiling.

Note that the technical ideas described above in Features I5 to I11 may also be applied to Features I1 to I3.

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in Features A to H above may also be applied to Features I1 to I10.

<Feature J group>
The following feature J group was made in consideration of the background and issues regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launch operation by the player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is variable, and the ball entrance section is switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1).", and that "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature J1. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning devices 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91, 92) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination,
As the predetermined judgment information, first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) and second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83 by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than in the low-frequency switching mode, as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means;
As the predetermined gaming state, a first type gaming state (for example, a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the low frequency switching mode and a second type gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high frequency switching mode are provided,
a first transition means for transitioning to the second type game state without passing through the special game state when a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first type game state, and when the number of times of execution of games after the special game state ends in the first type game state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information; and
a second transition means for transitioning to the first type gaming state when the number of executions of games in the second type gaming state reaches a reference number of times to end (for example, 40 times, 400 times) without a determination result corresponding to the first determination information after transition to the second type gaming state by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a time-saving period is consumed);
A gaming machine characterized by having a resetting means (a function of overwriting the value of the continuation count counter in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) that resets the remaining number of game rounds to be played in the second type game state, which is entered in response to a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, when the number of game rounds played after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit number.

According to Feature J1, even if gameplay continues without triggering a transition to the special game state (a determination result corresponding to the first determination information) being established, a transition to the Type 2 game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode may occur due to a determination result corresponding to the second determination information or reaching the upper limit of the number of plays after the special game state ends (reaching the ceiling). Entering the high-frequency switching mode increases the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry area, thereby reducing investment. This configuration is desirable for improving the soundness of gameplay. However, if the determination result corresponding to the second determination information and reaching the ceiling are used together as a trigger for transition to the Type 2 game state as described above, the following concern arises. That is, if reaching the ceiling is invalidated when the ceiling is reached during the Type 2 game state, some of the benefits that the player would have otherwise received will be lost, which could significantly reduce player satisfaction. In this regard, according to the configuration described in this feature, the number of remaining play times is reset when the ceiling is reached during the Type 2 game state. This eliminates the above-mentioned concern and contributes to improving player satisfaction.

The "resetting means" described in this feature may be configured so that the remaining number of play times set when a transition to the second type game state is triggered by a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is the same as the remaining number of play times set when the number of play times after the special game state ends during the second type game state reaches the upper limit, or the remaining number of play times set when a transition to the second type game state is triggered by a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is different from the remaining number of play times set when the number of play times after the special game state ends during the second type game state reaches the upper limit.

Feature J2. A gaming machine as described in Feature J1, characterized in that when the resetting means resets the remaining number of play times, the second type gaming state is continued without passing through any other gaming state other than the second type gaming state.

According to Feature J2, if the ceiling is reached during the Type 2 gaming state and the number of remaining play times is reset, the Type 2 gaming state will continue without transitioning to another gaming state as a result of the reset. This is preferable in terms of preventing disruption to the rhythm of play in the Type 2 gaming state.

Feature J3. A gaming machine as described in Feature J1 or Feature J2, wherein the remaining number of game plays set by the resetting means is configured to be greater than the remaining number of game plays set when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state.

Feature J3 prevents the remaining number of play times from decreasing due to reaching the ceiling, contributing to increased player satisfaction.

Feature J4: The game control means has an operation period setting means for setting an operation period of the game operation,
The operation period includes a first operation period (e.g., 20 sec to 30 sec) and a second operation period (e.g., 3 sec to 14 sec) that is shorter than the first operation period,
A gaming machine described in any one of features J1 to J3, wherein the operation period setting means is configured to set the second operation period as the operation period for the game number in which the maximum number of games is reached during the second type game state.

As shown in Feature J4, by configuring the second operation period as the operation period when the ceiling is reached during the second type game state, it is possible to effectively prevent the reset function from impairing the smoothness of game progress.

Feature J5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features J1 to J4, wherein when the resetting means resets the remaining number of play times while the variable mechanism is in the accepting state, the accepting state is maintained until the accepting period set upon switching to the accepting state has elapsed.

As shown in feature J5, even if a reset is performed while the variable mechanism is in an accepting state, by avoiding the forced termination of the accepting state, interruptions to the smooth flow of play can be effectively prevented.

Note that the technical ideas described in Features A to I above may also be applied to Features J1 to J5.

<Feature K group>
The following feature group K was made in consideration of the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launch operation by the player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is variable, and the ball entrance section is switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1)," and the following background/issues: "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature K1. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning devices 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91, 92) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination,
As the predetermined judgment information, first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) and second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83 by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than in the low-frequency switching mode, as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means;
As the predetermined gaming states, a first type gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the low frequency switching mode and a second type gaming state (e.g., a second normal gaming state, a third normal gaming state, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high frequency switching mode are provided,
a means for transitioning to the second type gaming state without passing through the special gaming state when a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first type gaming state (a function of transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a special miss result occurs);
In the second type gaming state, when a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the determination result is invalidated.
A display effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification/effect control device 140, a display control device 410) is provided to execute a display effect in parallel with the game operation when the game operation is being performed,
As the display effects, a first display effect and a second display effect are provided,
The display performance execution means
a means for executing the first display effect when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information (usually a miss result);
a means for executing the second display effect when a determination result by the determination means corresponds to the second determination information (a special miss result) under the condition that the first type gaming state is established;
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for executing the first display effect when the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information under a situation in which the second type of game state is in effect.

According to feature K1, even if gameplay continues without the trigger for transitioning to a special game state (a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) being met, a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information may result in a transition to a second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode. Entering the high-frequency switching mode increases the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry area, thereby reducing investment. This configuration is desirable for improving the soundness of gameplay. However, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the second type of game state, the judgment result is invalid. While this is desirable for preventing an increase in gambling, there is a concern that if the player becomes aware of this judgment result, the player may feel as if they have wasted their luck. This could be a factor that reduces motivation to play. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the determination result by the determination means does not correspond to the predetermined determination information (a normal miss), the first display effect is executed; if the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the second determination information (a special miss) under a situation in which the first type of game state is active, the second display effect is executed; and if the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the second determination information (a special miss) under a situation in which the second type of game state is active, the first display effect is executed. With this configuration, even if a determination result corresponds to the second determination information during the second type of game state, it can be made less noticeable. This prevents the above-mentioned inconveniences from occurring and contributes to improving player satisfaction. This is desirable for increasing attention to the game.

Feature K2. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning devices 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91, 92) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special miss result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination,
As the predetermined judgment information, first judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) and second judgment information (a random number group corresponding to a special miss result) are provided,
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (for example, the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the variable winning device 83 by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than in the low-frequency switching mode, as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means;
As the predetermined gaming states, a first type gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the low frequency switching mode and a second type gaming state (e.g., a second normal gaming state, a third normal gaming state, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high frequency switching mode are provided,
a means for transitioning to the second type gaming state without passing through the special gaming state when a determination result (a special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs in the first type gaming state (a function of transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when a special miss result occurs);
In the second type gaming state, when a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the determination result is invalidated.
A display effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification/effect control device 140, a display control device 410) is provided to execute a display effect in parallel with the game operation when the game operation is being performed,
The display performance execution means
A pattern display means (pattern display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns (patterns) on the display screen;
and a display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) for controlling the display of the pattern display means so that, after the plurality of patterns are variably displayed on the display screen, a pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means is finally stopped and displayed,
The game number control means is configured to control the predetermined notification means so that, when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in a game number in which the game is in either the first type game state or the second type game state, the notification result corresponds to the determination result,
As a symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, a first symbol combination (a symbol combination indicating a normal losing result) and a second symbol combination (a symbol combination indicating a special losing result) are provided,
The display control means
a means for stopping and displaying the first symbol combination when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information (usually a miss result);
a means for stopping and displaying the second pattern combination when the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the second judgment information (special miss result) under the condition that the first type game state is in, and a means for stopping and displaying the first pattern combination when the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the second judgment information (special miss result) under the condition that the second type game state is in.

According to feature K2, even if gameplay continues without the trigger for transitioning to a special game state (a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) being met, a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information may result in a transition to a second type of game state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode. Entering the high-frequency switching mode increases the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry area, thereby reducing investment. This configuration is desirable for improving the soundness of gameplay. However, if a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the second type of game state, the judgment result is invalid. While this is desirable for preventing an increase in gambling, there is a concern that if the player becomes aware of this judgment result, the player may feel as if they have wasted their luck. This could be a factor that reduces motivation to play. In this regard, with the configuration shown in this feature, if a determination result that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information (a normal miss result) is obtained, the first symbol combination is displayed as a static display. If a determination result that corresponds to the second determination information (a special miss result) is obtained in a Type 1 gaming state, the second symbol combination is displayed as a static display. If a determination result that corresponds to the second determination information (a special miss result) is obtained in a Type 2 gaming state, the first symbol combination is displayed as a static display. With this configuration, even if a determination result that corresponds to the second determination information is obtained in a Type 2 gaming state, it can be made less noticeable. This prevents the above-mentioned inconveniences from occurring and contributes to improving player satisfaction. This is desirable for increasing attention to the game.

Feature K3. The game control means has an operation period setting means for setting an operation period of the game operation,
The operation period includes a first operation period (e.g., 20 sec to 30 sec) and a second operation period (e.g., 3 sec to 14 sec) that is shorter than the first operation period,
The operation period setting means
a means for setting the first operation period as the operation period when a determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information under a situation in which the first type gaming state is established;
a means for setting the second operation period as the operation period when the determination result by the determination means does not correspond to the predetermined determination information (normal miss result) under the condition that the second type gaming state is in effect;
A gaming machine described in feature K1 or feature K2, characterized in that it has a means for setting the second operating period as the operating period when the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result (special miss result) corresponding to the second judgment information under a situation in which the second type gaming state is in effect.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, if a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs during the first type of game state, the operation period = first operation period; if a determination result (normal miss result) that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information occurs during the second type of game state, the operation period = second operation period; and if a determination result (special miss result) corresponding to the second determination information occurs during the second type of game state, the operation period = second operation period. By setting the operation periods in this manner, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort due to the operation periods and to optimally achieve the effects shown in feature K1, etc.

Feature K4: The second operation period is a variable period that is variable within a predetermined range (e.g., 3 sec to 14 sec),
The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information,
The gaming machine described in feature K3 is characterized in that when the second type of game state is in effect and the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result that does not correspond to the specified judgment information (normal miss result) or a judgment result that corresponds to the second judgment information (special miss result), and the second operation period is set as the operation period, the greater the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the shorter the operation period becomes.

In the Type 2 game state, balls frequently land in the starting ball entry area. Therefore, if the system is configured so that when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the Type 2 game state, the operating period is shortened according to the amount of special information, just as it is when a determination result does not correspond to the specified determination information, game rounds in which a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained can proceed smoothly and quickly, and the number of times the notification result from the specified notification means catches the player's eye can be reduced.

Feature K5: A destination determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the second determination information before the special information becomes the subject of the determination;
a special effect execution means for executing a special effect based on a result specified by the destination specifying means in the first type gaming state;
A gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K4, characterized in that it is equipped with a regulating means for regulating either the determination by the destination determination means or the special effect by the special effect execution means when the second type gaming state is in effect.

By executing a special effect (pre-announcement effect, pre-reading effect) using the determination result corresponding to the second determination information as the target of identification (so-called pre-reading) by the pre-determination means, monotony in the game can be effectively prevented. However, with this configuration, if the special effect occurs during the second type game state, not only will it be a cause of confusion for the player, but the reliability of the special effect will also be greatly reduced. Therefore, it is preferable to prevent the occurrence of the above inconveniences by configuring the game to restrict either the identification or the special effect during the second type game state.

Note that the technical ideas described above in Features A to J may also be applied to Features K1 to K5.

<Feature L group>
The following group of features L was made in consideration of the following background technology and issues: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launch operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is variable, and the ball entrance section is switched between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, thereby diversifying games (see, for example, Patent Document 1)."

Feature L1. A game board (game board 80a) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering ball entry sections (operation openings 91, 92 or variable winning devices 83) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91, 92) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than in the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing opening and closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than in the first switching mode, as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means;
A first execution count storage means (a game count counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404) for storing the number of games executed after the special game state ends;
a first resetting means for resetting (clearing to 0) the number of times of execution stored in the first number of times of execution storage means when the judgment result by the judging means corresponds to the predetermined judgment information (a function for clearing the number of times of game play counter to 0 by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 in normal processing, which is periodic processing);
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode without passing through the special gaming state when the number of executions stored in the first execution number storage means reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) (a function of transitioning to a fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the ceiling is reached);
a second execution count storage means (a continuation count counter provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404) for storing the number of times a game has been executed in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode to which the first transition means has been shifted;
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode when the number of executions stored in the second execution count storage means reaches a reference number of times to end (for example, 400 times) in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode transitioned by the first transition means (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the time-saving period is consumed);
a second reset means for resetting (clearing to 0) the number of times of execution stored in the first number of times of execution storage means when a predetermined reset operation (turning on the reset switch 166) is performed when the gaming machine is powered on (a function for clearing to 0 the number of times of execution counter by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 in the main processing executed at startup);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with an alarm means (annular illumination section 26 of the front door frame 14 and an alarm/performance control device 140) that executes a predetermined alarm (special alarm) when the power is turned on without the predetermined reset operation and the game state before the power is turned off was the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode to which the second transition means has transitioned.

If the number of play times (play count) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. In the second switching mode, frequent balls entering the starting ball entry area reduce investments associated with game progress. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable for rescuing players. In this characteristic configuration, the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode entered upon reaching the ceiling is set to an end reference number. Even if the ceiling is reached, there is a possibility that the predetermined game state will end without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information during the predetermined game state (hereinafter referred to as a ceiling run-through). This is desirable for preventing excessive benefits from reaching the ceiling, which could lead to excessive gambling. However, after the ceiling run-through, the number of play times stored in the first execution count storage means remains unreset, making it impossible to reach the ceiling again. If the gaming machine is powered off and then on again while in the state after the ceiling run-through without performing the predetermined reset operation, a predetermined notification is executed. This allows the amusement hall manager to determine whether or not the state has been reached after a player has run through the ceiling. Supporting the user in determining the state of a player after running through the ceiling by simply turning on the power in this way is advantageous for improving convenience for the manager.

Feature L2. A first operating means (effect button 35) and a second operating means (reset switch 166),
a notification canceling means for canceling the predetermined notification when either the first operating means or the second operating means is operated under a condition in which the predetermined notification is being executed,
A gaming machine described in feature L1, characterized in that the number of executions stored in the first execution count memory means is reset when the second operating means is operated while the specified notification is being executed.

The configuration described in this feature allows the amusement hall manager to easily select how to respond to a gaming machine that is issuing a specified notification, depending on the type of business the amusement hall operates. In other words, the manager can choose to cancel only the specified notification and leave the machine in the ceiling-breaking state, or to reset the ceiling. This configuration allows the effect described in feature L1 to be more effectively achieved.

Feature L3. A gaming machine as described in Feature L2, wherein the first operating means is disposed on the front side of the gaming machine and the second operating means is disposed on the rear side of the gaming machine.

As shown by this feature, by arranging the second operating means for resetting and canceling the notification on the rear side of the gaming machine and the first operating means for canceling the notification on the front side of the gaming machine, it is possible to improve convenience for the manager while reducing the inconvenience of players resetting the number of executions.

Feature L4: The notification canceling means is a first notification canceling means,
A gaming machine described in feature L2 or feature L3, characterized in that it is equipped with a second notification cancellation means that cancels the specified notification when the power is cut off while the specified notification is being executed and then turned on again.

A large number of gaming machines are often installed in the island facilities of gaming halls. As the number of installed machines increases, so does the number of gaming machines that execute the above-mentioned specified notification. Here, as shown in this feature, if the specified notification is canceled by turning the power OFF and then ON while the specified notification is being executed, there is no need to perform the above-mentioned cancellation operation for each gaming machine individually, which can further improve convenience for the manager.

Feature L5: The notification means performs the predetermined notification by lighting the light-emitting display unit (annular illumination unit 26) provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine in a predetermined light-emitting mode (for example, fully lit),
A gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L4, characterized in that it is equipped with a regulating means for regulating the specified notification at least when a game round is progressing by the game round control means.

In order to make the specified notification as conspicuous as possible, it is technically significant to display the specified notification on a light-emitting display unit located on the front of the gaming machine. However, if the specified notification is not canceled, for example because it is missed, the specified notification will continue even during the gaming hall's business hours. Here, with this characteristic configuration, the specified notification is restricted at least while a game round is in progress. This makes it possible to allow the light-emitting display unit to be used for purposes such as presentation. This is advantageous in that it reduces the likelihood of the specified notification being missed, while also preventing any resulting decline in presentation function.

Incidentally, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "the notification means performs the predetermined notification by making the light-emitting display unit (annular illumination unit 26) provided on the front part (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine emit light in a predetermined light-emitting mode (for example, all lights on),
It is also possible to configure the gaming machine as described in any one of Features L1 to L4, characterized in that the predetermined notification is cancelled when a game round is started by the game round control means.

Note that the technical ideas described above in Features A to K may also be applied to Features L1 to L5.

<Feature M group>
The following group of features M was made in consideration of the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launch operation by the player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entrance section provided in the gaming area, the player is given a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls. The ball entrance section is variable, and by switching the ball entrance section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state depending on the gaming situation, diversification of games is attempted (for example, see Patent Document 1)," and the background and issues that "in the above-mentioned types of gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in their configuration in order to increase attention to the games."

Feature M1. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing opening and closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than in the low-frequency switching mode, as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means;
As the predetermined gaming states, a first type gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the low frequency switching mode and a second type gaming state (e.g., a second normal gaming state, a third normal gaming state, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high frequency switching mode are provided,
a means for transitioning to the second type gaming state without passing through the special gaming state when the number of times the game has been executed after the end of the special gaming state in the first type gaming state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information; and a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 for transitioning to a fourth normal gaming state when the ceiling is reached.
A display effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification/effect control device 140, a display control device 410) for executing a display effect in parallel with the game operation when the game operation is being performed,
As the display effects, a first display effect that clearly indicates that the upper limit number of times has been reached and a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the upper limit number of times has been reached are provided,
As the predetermined determination information, first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 6R probability variable jackpot result) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 2R probability variable jackpot result) are provided,
The display performance execution means
a means for executing a first display effect when a determination result by the determination means in a game in which the upper limit number of times has been reached corresponds to the first information;
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for executing a second display effect when the judgment result by the judgment means in the game round in which the maximum number of times has been reached corresponds to the second information.

If the number of play times (play times) after the special play state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information, the game transitions to a Type 2 play state compatible with the high-frequency switching mode. In the Type 2 play state, frequent balls entering the starting ball entry area reduce investments associated with game progress. Such a function (ceiling function) is desirable for rescuing players. If the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, there is a possibility that a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information will be obtained in the play time in which the ceiling is reached. In this configuration, when the above-mentioned overlap occurs, different display effects are executed depending on whether the judgment result is a judgment result corresponding to the first information or a judgment result corresponding to the second information. Specifically, if a judgment result corresponding to the first information is obtained in the play time in which the upper limit is reached, a first display effect indicating that the upper limit has been reached is executed. If a judgment result corresponding to the second information is obtained in the play time in which the upper limit is reached, a second display effect is executed, which does not indicate that the upper limit has been reached. This configuration helps prevent the game presentation from becoming monotonous and contributes to increasing attention to the game.

The description regarding "predetermined determination information" can also be written as "The predetermined determination information includes first information that provides a relatively high advantage to the player (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 6R special jackpot result), and second information that provides a relatively low advantage to the player (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 2R special jackpot result)."

Feature M2. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing opening and closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than in the low-frequency switching mode, as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means;
As the predetermined gaming state, a first type gaming state (for example, a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the low frequency switching mode and a second type gaming state (for example, a second normal gaming state or a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high frequency switching mode are provided,
a means for transitioning to the second type gaming state without passing through the special gaming state when the number of times that the game has been executed after the end of the special gaming state in the first type gaming state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information being obtained (a function of transitioning to a fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the ceiling is reached);
As the predetermined determination information, first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 6R probability variable jackpot result) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 2R probability variable jackpot result) are provided,
a means for transitioning to the second type gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained by the determination means;
a means for transitioning to the first type gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained by the determination means;
A display effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification/effect control device 140, a display control device 410) for executing a display effect in parallel with the game operation when the game operation is being performed,
As the display effects, a first display effect that clearly indicates that the upper limit number of times has been reached and a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the upper limit number of times has been reached are provided,
The display performance execution means
a means for executing a first display effect when a determination result by the determination means in a game in which the upper limit number of times has been reached corresponds to the first information;
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for executing a second display effect when the judgment result by the judgment means in the game round in which the maximum number of times has been reached corresponds to the second information.

If the number of play times (play count) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information, the game transitions to a Type 2 game state compatible with the high-frequency switching mode. In the Type 2 game state, frequent balls entering the starting ball entry area reduce investment as the game progresses. This function (ceiling function) is desirable for rescuing players. Here, if the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, it is assumed that the player's investment will be high when the ceiling is reached. Therefore, if it becomes obvious that the player has reached the ceiling but is unable to enjoy the benefits, there is a concern that this will reduce the player's motivation to play. This is undesirable in terms of increasing attention to the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, if a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information is obtained in the play time that reaches the ceiling (in the case of overlap), different display effects are executed depending on whether the judgment result corresponds to the first information or the second information. Specifically, if the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained in a game in which the maximum number of plays is reached (i.e., a determination result that the high-frequency switching mode will be selected after the special game state has ended), a first display effect indicating that the maximum number of plays has been reached is executed. If the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained in a game in which the maximum number of plays is reached (i.e., a determination result that the low-frequency switching mode will be selected after the special game state has ended), a second display effect is executed, which does not indicate that the maximum number of plays has been reached. With this configuration, when the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained, which switches the special game state to the high-frequency switching mode, the player can imagine that this is a benefit of having reached the ceiling. When the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained, which switches the special game state to the low-frequency switching mode, the ceiling is not indicated, which allows the player to imagine that no benefit has been achieved in the first place. This configuration improves player satisfaction and effectively increases attention to the game.

Feature M3. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing opening and closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set so that the period during which the variable mechanism is in an accepting state is longer than in the low-frequency switching mode, as switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means;
As the predetermined gaming states, a first type gaming state (e.g., a first normal gaming state) corresponding to the low frequency switching mode and a second type gaming state (e.g., a second normal gaming state, a third normal gaming state, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high frequency switching mode are provided,
a means for transitioning to the second type gaming state without passing through the special gaming state when the number of times the game has been executed after the end of the special gaming state in the first type gaming state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information; and a function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 for transitioning to a fourth normal gaming state when the ceiling is reached.
a means for transitioning to the first type gaming state when the number of times a game has been executed in the second type gaming state transitioned to by the second transition means reaches a first termination reference number (for example, 400 times) without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information;
As the predetermined determination information, first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 6R probability variable jackpot result) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 6R normal jackpot result) are provided,
a means for transitioning to the second type gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result corresponding to the first information and a determination result corresponding to the second information are obtained by the determination means;
The second type gaming state, which has been transitioned to due to a determination result corresponding to the first information, continues until a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained next, while the second type gaming state, which has been transitioned to due to a determination result corresponding to the second information, transitions to the first type gaming state when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained next, or when the number of game plays executed in the second type gaming state reaches a second termination reference number (for example, 40 times) which is less than the first termination reference number without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information.
A display effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification/effect control device 140, a display control device 410) is provided to execute a display effect in parallel with the game operation when the game operation is being performed,
As the display effects, a first display effect that clearly indicates that the upper limit number of times has been reached and a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the upper limit number of times has been reached are provided,
The display performance execution means
a means for executing a first display effect when a determination result by the determination means in a game in which the upper limit number of times has been reached corresponds to the first information;
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for executing a second display effect when the judgment result by the judgment means in the game round in which the maximum number of times has been reached corresponds to the second information.

If the number of play times (play count) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information, the game transitions to a Type 2 game state compatible with the high-frequency switching mode. In the Type 2 game state, frequent balls entering the starting ball entry area reduce investment as the game progresses. This function (ceiling function) is desirable for rescuing players. Here, if the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, it is assumed that the player's investment will be high when the ceiling is reached. Therefore, if it becomes obvious that the player has reached the ceiling but is unable to enjoy the benefits, there is a concern that this will reduce the player's motivation to play. This is undesirable in terms of increasing attention to the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, if a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information is obtained in the play time that reaches the ceiling (in the case of overlap), different display effects are executed depending on whether the judgment result corresponds to the first information or the second information. Specifically, if the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained in a game in which the maximum number of times is reached (i.e., a determination result indicating that the long continuation high-frequency switching mode will be selected after the special game state ends), a first display effect indicating that the maximum number of times has been reached is executed. If the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained in a game in which the maximum number of times is reached (i.e., a determination result indicating that the short continuation high-frequency switching mode will be selected after the special game state ends), a second display effect indicating that the maximum number of times has not been reached is executed. With this configuration, when the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained, which results in the special game state switching from the long continuation high-frequency switching mode, the player can imagine this as a benefit of having reached the ceiling. When the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained, which results in the special game state switching from the short continuation high-frequency switching mode, the ceiling is not indicated, which allows the player to imagine that no benefit has been achieved in the first place. This configuration improves player satisfaction and effectively increases attention to the game.

In addition, the description in this feature that "the second type gaming state, which has been transitioned to due to a determination result corresponding to the first information, continues until a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained next, while the second type gaming state, which has been transitioned to due to a determination result corresponding to the second information, transitions to the first type gaming state when a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained next, or when the number of game plays executed in the second type gaming state reaches a second termination reference number (e.g., 40 times) that is less than the first termination reference number without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information" has been changed to "the second type gaming state, which has been transitioned to due to a determination result corresponding to the first information, continues until a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained next, It is also possible to change the configuration so that, in the second type gaming state to which a transition has been made due to a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, if the number of game rounds executed reaches a second termination reference number (e.g., 9999 times) that is greater than the first termination reference number, the game state is transitioned to the first type gaming state; and, in the second type gaming state to which a transition has been made due to a determination result corresponding to the second information, if the number of game rounds executed in the second type gaming state reaches a third termination reference number (e.g., 40 times) that is greater than the first termination reference number, without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the game state is transitioned to the first type gaming state.

Feature M4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features M1 to M3, wherein the display effect execution means is configured to execute an effect indicating that the maximum number of times has been reached in the first display effect, and then execute an effect indicating that the judgment result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information, whereas the second display effect is configured to execute an effect indicating that the maximum number of times has been reached without executing an effect indicating that the judgment result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information.

With this configuration, the first display effect, which is executed when a determination result corresponding to the first information is reached, first indicates that the ceiling has been reached, and then indicates that the determination result corresponds to the predetermined determination information. With this configuration, the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is indicated, and the special game state is entered, minimizing the sense of incongruity in the effect while making it appear as if two benefits have been granted.

Feature M5. A game board (game board 80aA) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
a game ball launching mechanism (110) that can launch game balls into the game area based on the player's operation;
A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 224) that pays out game balls (prize balls) based on balls entering the ball entry section (operation openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83A) provided in the gaming area,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process to acquire reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating port 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
a determining means (a function of executing lottery processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result);
a game round control means (a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) so that a game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the game round operation (variable display of a pattern on the operation opening display sections D1 and D2) being started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game round operation being ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, which is counted as one game round;
a special game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing, etc., in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game cycle operation by the game cycle control means being completed;
A variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than the acceptance state;
When the game is transitioned to the special game state, a variable ball entry section control means (a function of executing opening and closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) switches the variable ball entry section between an accepting state and a non-accepting state;
A variable mechanism (electric device 93A) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state;
A variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided,
The switching control modes (support modes) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means include a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) that is set to make it difficult or impossible to score a ball in the starting goal area, a second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) that is set to make it easier to score a ball in the starting goal area than in the first switching mode by having the variable mechanism remain in the receiving state for a longer period of time than in the first switching mode, and a third switching mode (high frequency support mode A) that is set to make it easier to score a ball in the starting goal area than in the first switching mode by having the variable mechanism remain in the receiving state for a longer period of time than in the first switching mode,
As the predetermined determination information, first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 6R probability variable jackpot result) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 2R probability variable jackpot result) are provided,
a first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode via the special game state when the determination by the determination means results in a determination result corresponding to the first information;
a second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the first switching mode via the special game state when the determination by the determination means results in a determination corresponding to the second information;
a third transition means for transitioning to the predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode without passing through the special game state when the number of times the game has been executed after the end of the special game state reaches an upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information; and a function of transitioning to a fourth normal game state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the ceiling is reached.
A display effect execution means (a symbol display device 95, a notification/effect control device 140, a display control device 410) for executing a display effect in parallel with the game operation when the game operation is being performed,
As the display effects, a first display effect that clearly indicates that the upper limit number of times has been reached and a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the upper limit number of times has been reached are provided,
The display performance execution means
a means for executing a first display effect when a determination result by the determination means in a game in which the upper limit number of times has been reached corresponds to the first information;
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for executing a second display effect when the judgment result by the judgment means in the game round in which the maximum number of times has been reached corresponds to the second information.

If the number of play times (play count) after the special game state ends reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the game transitions to a predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode. In this predetermined game state, frequent balls entering the starting ball entry area reduce investment as the game progresses. This function (ceiling function) is desirable for rescuing players. Here, if the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, it is assumed that the player's investment will be high when the ceiling is reached. Therefore, if it becomes obvious that the player has reached the ceiling but is unable to enjoy the benefits, there is a concern that this will reduce the player's motivation to play. This is undesirable in terms of increasing attention to the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, if a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained in the play time that reaches the ceiling (if there is a duplication), different display effects are executed depending on whether the judgment result corresponds to the first information or the second information. Specifically, if the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained in a game in which the maximum number of plays is reached (i.e., a determination result indicating that the second switching mode will be selected after the special game state ends), a first display effect indicating that the maximum number of plays has been reached is executed. If the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained in a game in which the maximum number of plays is reached (i.e., a determination result indicating that the first switching mode will be selected after the special game state ends), a second display effect indicating that the maximum number of plays has not been reached is executed. This configuration allows the player to visualize the situation as if the ceiling had been reached when the determination result corresponding to the first information results in a transition from the special game state to the high-frequency switching mode (second switching mode). Furthermore, if the determination result corresponding to the second information results in a transition from the special game state to the low-frequency switching mode (first switching mode), the ceiling is not displayed, allowing the player to visualize the situation as if no benefit had been achieved in the first place. This configuration improves player satisfaction and effectively increases attention to the game.

The technical ideas described above in features M1 to M4 may also be applied to feature M5.

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in Features A to L above may also be applied to Features M1 to M3.

Pachinko gaming machine: A gaming machine that includes an operating means (game ball launching handle 41) operated by the player, a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage (guide rail 100) that guides the launched game balls to a predetermined game area (game area PE), and various game components (nails, etc.) arranged within the game area, and that awards a bonus to the player when the game ball passes through a predetermined passage section of each game component (general winning opening 81, etc.).

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the series of symbols as it stops. The symbol fluctuations are initiated by operating a start operating means, and the symbol fluctuations are stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed. A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the fluctuations is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating pattern sequence consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the symbol sequence as a final stop; the pattern change begins when a start operating means is operated, and the pattern change is stopped when a stop operating means is operated or after a predetermined time has passed; a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol; further equipped with a ball receiving device that performs a loading process to take gaming balls from the ball receiving device, and a payout device that pays out gaming balls to the ball receiving device; and configured so that operation of the start operating means is valid when gaming balls are inserted by the loading device.

10... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 41... Gaming ball launching handle, 80... Gaming board unit, 80a... Gaming board, 82... Actuation port unit, 83... Variable winning device, 84... Through gate, 86... Outlet port, 91... First actuation port, 92... Second actuation port, 93... Electric role device, 95... Pattern display device, 95a... Display screen, 99... Main display unit, 110... Gaming ball launching mechanism, 140... Notification and performance control device, 162... Main control device, 224... Payout device, 242... Payout control device, 402... MPU, 403... ROM, 404... RAM, 421... Win/lose table storage area, 422... Allocation table storage area, 423... Variable display time table storage area, 431... Lottery counter buffer, 432... Reserved ball storage area, 433... Electric role reserve area, PE... Game area.

Claims (1)

a specific determination means for executing a specific determination when a predetermined determination trigger is met;
a means for transitioning to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined gaming state based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result;
A means for changing a predetermined variable ball entry means from a first state in which the game ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter to a second state in which the game ball can be entered or is easier to enter than in the first state, and then executing a specific game in which the game ball is returned to the first state;
Equipped with
The specific game can be executed in the special game state,
As game states different from the predetermined game state and the special game state, there are a first specific game state to which a game can be shifted via the special game state when a predetermined first condition is met, and a second specific game state to which a game can be shifted without passing through the special game state when a predetermined second condition different from the first condition is met,
A variable means is provided corresponding to a predetermined ball entry means different from the predetermined variable ball entry means, and is switchable between a first mode in which the predetermined ball entry means can receive a game ball, and a second mode in which the predetermined ball entry means cannot receive a game ball or is more difficult to receive than the first mode,
The switching control modes of the variable means include a first switching mode in which a ball is relatively likely to enter the predetermined ball entry means, and a second switching mode in which a ball is relatively unlikely to enter the predetermined ball entry means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the switching control mode in the first specific gaming state is the first switching mode, and the switching control mode in the second specific gaming state is the second switching mode.